Copyright: Copyright (C) 1996 Lotus Development Corporation, an IBM subsidiary.


Did you know...?

•	You can use SmartMaster content topics to get a head start on your presentation. Content topics provide task-specific prompts as well as actual content, and ready-to-go charts and diagrams to which you can add your own data.

•	To add a new page, click the New Page button.

•	You can save all your presentation pages in one file.

•	To change an object, you must select it first. To change text attributes, you must highlight the text first.

•	Menus in Freelance Graphics are dynamic. That is, when you select an object, you will see a new menu choice that lets you work with that object.

•	You can click the right mouse button at any time to get a menu of tasks related to the selected object or--if no object is selected--to the current page.

•	To change properties for most objects, double-click the object to open the InfoBox. Double-clicking text, however, lets you edit text. To change the properties for text, click the text once, then choose Text - Text Properties.

•	You can leave the InfoBox open as you work.

•	You can collapse the InfoBox to show just its title bar by double-clicking the title bar. Double-click the title bar again to expand the InfoBox to its full size.

•	To get assistance as you work in Freelance Graphics, click the Guide Me button.

•	You can leave the Help steps window open as you work.

•	You can undo many of the commands in Freelance Graphics. Choose Edit - Undo to reverse up to the last ten actions.


Learning Freelance Graphics

For many tasks in Freelance Graphics, you won't need any help. Simply reading the menus, clicking buttons, and responding to instructions in dialog boxes and the InfoBox will enable you to complete your work successfully.

When you do need help, all the information you need is available online. See Getting Help.

In addition to Help, Freelance Graphics introduces a variety of new features designed to deliver the help you need, when you need it.

•	The Freelance Graphics Tour is a brief online introduction to the features of Freelance Graphics. See Taking a tour.

•	Guide Me is a fast way to get the help you need for the task you are working on. See Using Guide Me.

•	Demos perform steps for you automatically using sample data. See Using Demos.

•	"Did you know...?," a special section in Help, provides a quick listing of useful features and tips. See Did you know...?.


Using Demos

A demo opens a sample file, then performs the steps you see in Help one at a time. At the end of the demo, the sample file closes and you are returned to your presentation at the point you left off, with the Help window open, so you can perform the steps yourself.

To start a demo, click the demo icon in a procedure.

You can see demos of the following tasks:

Adding a movie

Adding pages in Current Page view

Adding ready-made diagrams

Aligning objects

Changing the bullet type, size, or color

Creating a named style

Drawing circles and ellipses

Drawing curves

Drawing lines and arrows

Editing text

Inserting columns and rows in a table

Rearranging pages in Page Sorter view

Sizing objects with the mouse


Using Guide Me

Guide Me is a convenient and fast way to get the help you need for the task you are working on. The best way to learn how it works is to try it.

As you are working on your presentation, click the Guide Me button at any time.

When you click the Guide Me button, you are presented with a question and a list of tasks. Click the task that most closely matches your needs. Guide Me displays a Help procedure immediately, or another list of tasks, so you can narrow the scope of your request. You will never have to click more than three times to display the Help procedure you need. And you can leave the Help procedure window open while you complete the task.

Guide Me is aware of your selections in Freelance Graphics. For example, if you select a chart, Guide Me is ready with a list of tasks related to charts. If you select a rectangle, Guide Me displays a list of topics covering the types of actions you can perform on drawn objects.

Guide Me is also aware of which view of Freelance Graphics you are working in. Guide Me displays different tasks depending on whether you are in Current Page view, Outliner view, or Page Sorter view.

A number of Help screens contain a Demo button. Click the Demo button to see Freelance Graphics demonstrate the task on a sample file. See Using Demos.

If you cannot find what you need from the Guide Me task lists, click the Help Topics button to search the entire Help system for a topic that will help you.

Note	After a set period of inactivity, a Guide Me reminder message pops up automatically. You can turn off this prompting by selecting the check box in this message box.


Getting Help

All the information you need to use Freelance Graphics can be found in its online Help system.

You can request help in several ways:

•	Click the Guide Me button (in the upper right corner of the screen) to zero in on the precise Help topic you need to complete a task. You can leave the Help screen open while you are completing the task.

For more information, see Using Guide Me.

•	Choose Help - Help Topics from the main menu and do one of the following.

•	Click the Contents tab, then browse through Help books to find topics of interest.

•	Click the Index tab to use the Help Index the same way you use the index of a book. Look up a keyword to locate the information you want.

•	Click the Find tab to use the Find feature to do a full-text search of Help topics for what you need.

•	In an open Help topic:

•	Click green text with a dotted underline to view a pop-up window, which typically displays a definition or an example. For example, click the words Guide Me button to see a pop-up definition.

•	Click green text with a solid underline to jump to another help topic.

•	Print the topic by clicking the Print button.

•	Click the Go Back button to return to the previously displayed Help topic.

•	Click a Demo button to see a demonstration of a Help procedure (available for some procedures).

For more information, see Using Demos.

•	Click the right mouse button to open a menu of standard Windows help options.

•	Click the question mark button in the upper right corner of an InfoBox for help.

•	Click the Help button in a dialog box for information about that dialog box.

•	Press F1 in many places in Freelance Graphics to get context-sensitive help.


Taking a tour

The Freelance Graphics Tour is a brief, online introduction to the features of Freelance Graphics that contains five sections:

•	Introduction

•	Team Computing

•	Getting Started Quickly

•	Making Changes

•	Creating Data Charts

You can run the tour at any time by choosing Help - Tour.


Creating 35mm slides

You can create 35mm slides, even if you do not have a slide driver, by sending your presentation file to a slide service.

Note	 If you have a slide driver, see  Creating 35mm slides using a slide driver .

To prepare your presentation for a slide service:

1.	Choose File - Setup for 35mm Slides.

2.	Select "Adjust page size and color output for 35mm slides" and click OK.

Freelance Graphics automatically adjusts the page dimensions and chooses the best color scheme for 35mm output. It also displays the recommended drawing area. To ensure that the objects on your page will not be clipped, we recommend keeping them within the borders of the recommended drawing area.

Note	This setting is saved with the file. Selecting it optimizes your screen and printed output for 35mm slides. Before producing output other than for 35mm slides, choose File - Setup for 35mm Slides again, and deselect this option.


Creating 35mm slides using a slide driver

You create 35mm slides by installing a slide driver, choosing it as your output device, and sending the resulting file to a slide service.

Note	If you do not have a slide driver, see Creating 35mm slides.

1.	Install the slide driver through the operating system.

See your operating system and slide driver documentation for instructions.

2.	Choose File - Setup for 35mm Slides.

3.	Select "Adjust page size and color output for 35mm slides" and click OK.

4.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

5.	Under Print to, select the slide driver.

6.	Click Print.

7.	Follow the instructions for your particular slide driver to produce a file in the format required by your slide service.

Freelance Graphics automatically adjusts the page dimensions and chooses the best color scheme for 35mm output. It also displays the recommended drawing area. To ensure that the objects on your page will not be clipped, we recommend keeping them within the borders of the recommended drawing area.

Notes

35mm slides have a more square shape than letter-sized paper. To take advantage of this, select a slide driver as your output device in Freelance Graphics before working on your presentation. Follow steps 4 and 5 to select a slide driver.

The "Adjust page size and color output for 35mm slides" setting is saved with the file. Selecting it optimizes your screen and printed output for 35mm slides. If you later choose a printer as your output device, Freelance Graphics may warn you that the objects on your page will not be visible on the new device. Do not modify the objects on your page, but move them manually within the recommended draw area.

 See details


Details: Creating 35mm slides using a slide driver

Freelance Graphics supports a variety of slide drivers, including Autographix and Genigraphics. In addition, some slide services can produce 35mm slides directly from a Freelance Graphics presentation file. Contact the vendor for the slide driver you want to use.

 Go to procedure


Attaching a script to an icon

You can associate a script, an executable file (such as a .BAT or .EXE file) to launch an application, or a new or existing OLE object with a custom icon.

Note	You cannot associate a script, an executable file, or an OLE object to a standard Freelance Graphics icon.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Click Edit Icon.

3.	Click the desired custom icon in the Available icons list.

4.	Click Attach Script.

5.	Select what you want to do.

6.	(Optional) If you are attaching a script or executable file, click Browse to search for the file to attach.

7.	Click OK to return to the Edit Icon dialog box.

Changes were automatically saved when you clicked OK.

8.	Click OK to return to the SmartIcons Setup dialog box.

You can now add the icon to any set of SmartIcons.

9.	Click OK.

Note	When you attach a script to a custom icon, be sure you have a sub named Main, otherwise the program will not execute.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Attaching a script to an icon

Clicking Attach Script

Options:	What it does:
Run a Script (*.lss)	Lets you attach a LotusScript file (.LSS) to an icon to run a script.
Run an application (*.bat, *.com, *.exe, *.pif)	Lets you attach an executable program file, such as a .BAT or .EXE, to an icon to launch an application.
Embed an OLE object	Lets you associate a new or existing OLE object with this icon.
 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Creating a custom icon

You can create a custom icon based on a standard Freelance Graphics icon, a custom icon you designed, or from a blank picture.

Creating a custom icon based on another  icon

Creating a custom icon based on a blank picture


Creating a custom icon based on another icon

You can create a custom icon based on another icon, including one of the standard Freelance Graphics icons, such as the File - Save icon.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Click Edit Icon.

3.	In the Available icons box, click an icon to use as a base for your new icon.

4.	Click New Icon from Current.

5.	Specify a file name and a description for the new icon, and click OK.

6.	Use the Left and Right mouse button colors to apply colors.

7.	Click Attach Script to attach a script to the new icon, then click OK. See Attaching a script to an icon.

8.	Click OK to return to the SmartIcons Setup dialog box.

9.	Click OK.

Note	When you create a custom icon it is stored as a .BMP file in the Freelance Graphics icons folder (directory) \LOTUS\FLG\ICONS.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating a custom icon based on another icon

Available icons (drag to add)

The standard Freelance Graphics icons in this list are grouped according to the Freelance Graphics menu: File, Edit, View, Create, Presentation, the menu for the currently selected object (Page, Text, and so on), Window, and Help.

Custom icons appear at the top of this list, in alphabetical order.

Applying colors

You can select from a color palette by clicking the Left and Right arrows. In the Picture editor window, use the left and right mouse buttons, and click where you want to apply color on the selected icon. Freelance Graphics applies the colors and updates the Preview icon as you work.

Saving the icon

The custom icon is saved in the current size shown in the SmartIcons Setup dialog box (Regular or Large).

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Creating a custom icon based on a blank picture

You can create a custom icon based on a blank picture.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Click Edit Icon.

3.	Click New Icon from Blank.

4.	Specify a file name and a description for the new icon and click OK.

5.	Use the Left and Right mouse button colors to apply colors.

6.	Click Attach Script to attach a script to the new icon, then click OK. See Attaching a script to an icon.

7.	Click OK to return to the SmartIcons Setup dialog box.

8.	Click OK.

Note	When you create a custom icon, it is stored as a .BMP file in the Freelance Graphics icons folder (directory) \LOTUS\FLG\ICONS.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating a custom icon based on a blank picture

Applying colors

You can select from a color palette by clicking the Left and Right arrows. In the Picture editor window, use the left and right mouse buttons, and click where you want to apply color on the selected icon. Freelance Graphics applies the colors and updates the Preview icon as you work.

Saving the icon

The custom icon is saved in the current size shown in the SmartIcons Setup dialog box (Regular or Large).

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Editing a custom icon

You change the picture or attach a script to custom icons you create.

Note	You cannot edit a standard Freelance Graphics icon.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Click Edit Icon.

3.	Click the desired icon from the Available icons box.

4.	Use the Left and Right mouse button colors to make changes to the icon.

5.	(Optional) Click Attach Script to change or attach a script to this icon, then click OK. See Attaching a script to an icon.

6.	Click OK to return to the SmartIcons Setup dialog box.

7.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Editing a custom icon

Available icons (drag to add)

The standard Freelance Graphics icons in this list are grouped according to the Freelance Graphics menu: File, Edit, View, Create, Presentation, the menu for the currently selected object (Page, Text, and so on), Window, and Help.

Custom icons appear at the top of this list, in alphabetical order.

Applying colors

You can select from a color palette by clicking the Left and Right arrows. In the Picture editor window, use the mouse left and right buttons, and click where you want to apply color on the selected icon. Freelance Graphics applies the colors and updates the Preview icon as you work.

Saving the icon

The custom icon is saved in the current size shown in the SmartIcons Setup dialog box (Regular or Large).

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Edit Icon dialog box

You can create, modify, edit, and save or copy icons as new icon files from this dialog box. You can also associate a script, an executable file (such as a .BAT or .EXE file) to launch an application, or a new or existing OLE object with a custom icon.

Custom icons are saved as .BMP files in the \LOTUS\FLG\ICONS folder (directory).

You can use the Left and Right mouse button colors to paint the icon.

In order to use a custom icon, you must attach a script to it.

Choose a task

Creating a custom icon based on another icon

Creating a custom icon based on a blank picture

Editing a custom icon

Attaching a script to an icon

 See related topics


Overview: Using colors

In order to understand how Freelance Graphics uses colors, and how you should use colors in Freelance Graphics, you need to know about:

•	The color chooser. See Specifying the color chooser.

•	Color libraries--the source for all colors in Freelance Graphics. See Overview: Color libraries.

•	Color palettes--collections of colors that set the tone of a SmartMaster look, and thus a presentation. See Overview: Color palettes.

•	The difference between palette colors and static colors.

The color chooser

Freelance Graphics has two color choosers. The amount of work you do with color will determine which chooser you should use.

The standard color chooser is sufficient for most users' needs. The standard color chooser has two sections: suggested colors at the top, and a color library at the bottom. Here is what a standard color chooser looks like:

If you do a lot of design work, modifying or creating SmartMaster looks or content topics, you should use the designer's chooser. If you opt to use the designer's color chooser, the  Edit Palette command is available on the Presentation menu. See Specifying the color chooser.

The designer's chooser has three sections: suggested colors at the top, a palette in the middle, and a color library at the bottom. Here is what a designer's color chooser looks like:

Palette colors

Carefully chosen to work well together, palette colors are colors that change when you switch SmartMaster looks or palettes. Freelance Graphics uses palette colors for things like text, the SmartMaster look background, drop shadows, and so on.

For example, if you create your own diagram in a presentation, Freelance Graphics uses palette colors in the diagram so it works well with the rest of your presentation. If you switch SmartMaster looks, and therefore switch palettes, the diagram still looks good with the new SmartMaster look since it now uses colors from the new palette.

Static colors

Static colors are colors that do not change when you change SmartMaster looks or palettes. This means that you can assign a static color to an object, and the object will retain that color even when you switch SmartMaster looks.

For example, if your corporate logo uses specific colors, use static colors to make sure those colors remain the same regardless of which SmartMaster look you switch to. Static colors are colors in the color library section of the color chooser. See Using a static color.

Colors and printing

For information on how Freelance Graphics handles color printing, see Details: Enhancing printed output.


Using a static color

Static colors are colors that do not change when you change SmartMaster looks or palettes. This means that you can assign a static color to an object, and the object will retain that color even when you switch SmartMaster looks.

1.	Click the right mouse button over  what you want to change and choose its Properties command.

2.	Click the Lines & Colors tab in the InfoBox.

3.	(Optional) Under Border, select a static color (from the ones in the smaller boxes).

4.	(Optional) Under Interior, select a static color (from the ones in the smaller boxes) for the pattern color and/or background.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See related topics


Changing colors and patterns

To change the color of text, see Changing properties for selected text.

1.	Click the right mouse button over the object and choose its Properties command.

2.	Click the Lines & Colors tab in the InfoBox.

3.	(Optional) Under Border, select a color.

4.	(Optional) Under Interior, select a pattern color.

5.	(Optional) Under Interior, select a pattern and/or a background color.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	When you change colors, you should use one of the 16 suggested colors (the ones in the larger boxes).

 See details


Details: Changing colors and patterns

Pattern color, background color, patterns, and graduated fills

Objects can have one color (solid) or two (a pattern or a graduated fill). When the object is solid, it uses the pattern color. When the object has a pattern, it uses the pattern color and the background color.

If you choose different colors for the pattern color and background, Freelance Graphics paints the object using both colors, creating a pattern or a graduated fill. In the Pattern gallery, black represents the pattern color and white represents the background color.

Note	Select None in the Pattern gallery if you do not want an object to have any color. This overrides the color choices.

Too many objects with graduated fills on a page can cause degradation in your color output and lengthy printing times. If either of these things happen, consider changing graduated fills to solids.

Same color as border

If you select "Same color as border" under Interior, Freelance Graphics uses the border color for pattern color.

Palette colors vs. static colors

Choose palette colors for objects such as text, charts, or diagrams. If you switch SmartMaster looks, Freelance Graphics can recolor whatever you have changed with the color palette and suggested colors of the new SmartMaster look.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Color libraries

Each SmartMaster look has its own library of 256 colors, 16 of which are set aside for you so you can create custom colors. Although each color library initially has the same colors, if you modify the red, green, and blue (RGB) values of a color in a color library, you change the color library only for the SmartMaster look you are currently using.

In general, it is best not to modify the colors in a color library. However, if you find that colors in your output are not looking the way you want them to, you may want to edit a color library to adjust colors for your particular output device. See Modifying a color in a color library.

This is what a color library looks like:

Custom colors

If you need a particular color that is not available in a Freelance Graphics color library, you should create a custom color. For example, you can create custom colors to match your company logo or a company color scheme. See Creating custom colors.

Color libraries and color palettes

A color library is the source of colors for a color palette. See Overview: Color palettes for more information about color palettes.

CMYK colors

You may be more familiar with CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) values for colors, rather than the RGB values that Freelance Graphics uses. If so, you can create custom colors, using CMYK values, to get the color output you want. See Converting CMYK colors to RGB colors.

For general information about using colors, see Overview: Using colors.

Colors and VGA monitors

VGA users may want to know which of the colors in a color library are "pure" colors, that is, without dither. Each color library contains the following non-dithered colors:

Red	Midnight
Yellow	Hot pink
Olive	Plum red
Neon green	Scarlet
Dark green	White
Turquoise	25% Gray
Aztec blue	50% Gray
Blue	Black


Edit Library dialog box

Use the Edit Library dialog box to modify a color library, create custom colors, or convert CMYK colors to RGB colors.

In general, it is best not to modify the colors in a color library. If you need a particular color that is not available, you can create a custom color. If you find that colors in your output are not looking the way you want them to, you may want to modify a color library.

Choose a task

Creating custom colors

Converting CMYK colors to RGB colors

Modifying a color in a color library


Converting CMYK colors to RGB colors

If you know the CMYK values of the colors you want you can use these values to create custom colors.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

2.	Choose Presentation - Edit Palette.

3.	Click Edit Library.

4.	Under Custom Colors, click an empty slot.

5.	Click CMYK.

6.	Under Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black, type in the CMYK values.

7.	Click OK to return to the Edit Library dialog box.

8.	Click OK to return to the Edit Palette dialog box.

9.	Click OK.

10.	Click Done.

Note	If you create custom colors, you might want to deselect the "Adjust output library for printing" setting. That way, you prevent Freelance Graphics from trying to find what it thinks is the best match between the color you have on your screen and the color your printer can produce. See Enhancing printed output.


Creating custom colors

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop

2.	Choose Presentation - Edit Palette.

3.	Click Edit Library.

4.	Under Custom Colors, click an empty slot.

5.	Under Red, Green, and Blue, move the boxes in the horizontal scroll bars until you create the color you want.

6.	Under New name, type in the name of the new color.

7.	Click OK to return to the Edit Palette dialog box.

8.	Click OK.

9.	Click Done.

Note	If you create custom colors, you might want to deselect the "Adjust output library for printing" setting. That way, you prevent Freelance Graphics from trying to find what it thinks is the best match between the color you have on your screen and the color your printer can produce. See Enhancing printed output.

 See details


Details: Creating custom colors

You can use the name of a color as a note; for example, "CorpBlue--do not change," or "CorpSienna--use for logo."

 Go to procedure


Modifying a color in a color library

In general, it is best not to modify the colors in a color library. If you need a particular color that is not available, you should consider creating a custom color instead. See Creating custom colors.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

2.	Choose Presentation  - Edit Palette.

3.	Click Edit Library.

4.	Click the color you want to modify.

5.	Under Red, Green, and Blue, move the scroll bars until you have the color you want.

6.	Under New name, type in the name of the new color.

7.	Click OK to return to the Edit Palette dialog box.

8.	Click OK.

9.	Click Done.

Note	If you modify a color, you might want to deselect the "Adjust output library for printing" setting. That way, you prevent Freelance Graphics from trying to find what it thinks is the best match between the color you have on your screen and the color your printer can produce. For information on how to do this, see Enhancing printed output.

 See details


Details: Modifying a color in a color library

Red, green, and blue values

All colors are a combination of red, green, and blue values (RGB values). For example, slate blue has 0 parts red, 128 parts green, and 192 parts blue. Each RGB value can range from 0 to 255.

When you modify the RGB values of a library color, the modified color is available for the current SmartMaster look only. This is because all SmartMaster looks have their own color libraries.

Black-and-white palettes and color libraries

Each black-and-white palette uses a black-and-white version of the color library. You cannot edit library colors when you are viewing the presentation in black and white.

 Go to procedure


Edit Palette dialog box

Use the Edit Palette dialog box to make global color changes by customizing a color palette, modify a color library that a color palette draws on, and create a new color palette to use for creating new SmartMaster looks.

Choose a task

Changing colors globally

Modifying a color in a color library

Creating a new palette


Overview: Color palettes

Each SmartMaster look has a palette of 64 colors--48 that it uses and placeholders for 16 alternate colors that you can add. The palette sets the tone of a presentation.

A palette ensures that the colors in your presentation look good together. The palette associated with the SmartMaster look has the same name as the SmartMaster look, but a different extension. For example, the STACK.MAS SmartMaster look has a palette called STACK.PAL.

What is a palette and what does it do?

The colors in a palette come from a color library, a collection of 256 colors. See Overview: Color libraries for more information about color libraries.

Here is an example of a palette:

The grid of colors with rows labeled A - D and columns labeled 1 - 12 is a palette. Each cell in the labeled grid contains a color that controls a particular element of your presentation, such as titles, drop shadows, bullets, or data series in charts.

The grid below the labeled cells, a grid of 16 larger cells containing color swatches, contains additional colors that the professional artists who design SmartMaster looks and color palettes recommend you use with the palette.

If you change the color of something in your presentation, you should consider using one of these colors. Using these recommended colors ensures good results if you switch SmartMaster looks, because each has a color palette laid out this same way. When you switch palettes, the colors in one palette are substituted for the colors in the other palette according to each color's location in the palette.

When you drag the mouse over a cell, the name and cell location of the color appears above the palette, and a description of the element(s) that the color in that cell controls displays below the palette. In this example, the selected cell is yellow, its cell location is B2, and it controls the color for titles, subtitles, and bulleted lists. When you switch to a new SmartMaster look, and therefore to a new palette, Freelance Graphics again uses the color in cell B2 for titles, subtitles, and bulleted lists.

You can change individual colors in a palette if some colors are not suited to your needs. For example, if drop shadows for objects in your presentation are black, and you want them to be gray, you switch the color in the cell that controls drop shadows from black to gray. However, you should use caution changing colors in cells A1 -  A11; these slots control colors in the SmartMaster look design elements and background.

Note	If you are creating your own SmartMaster look, you must follow this palette layout to make yours interchangeable with the ones that come with Freelance Graphics.

Working in black-and-white

Each color palette is associated with one of six black-and-white palettes. The black-and-white palettes are balanced to give optimal contrast for text, background, objects, and charts. These palettes provide balanced grays for output on any black-and-white device.

Are there any other palettes?

Freelance Graphics has six alternate color palettes, named PAL1.PAL - PAL6.PAL. These are ready-made palettes with the same structure as all the palettes in the SmartMaster looks. They are provided for you to use in building your own SmartMaster looks.

 See related topics


Changing colors globally

Replacing a color in the palette is the easiest way to make global color changes to your presentation. Be careful when customizing color palettes, especially cells A1 - A11. These cells control colors of the SmartMaster look.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

2.	Choose Presentation  - Edit Palette.

3.	Click the color cell you want to change.

Tip	To display a description below the palette of what each cell in the palette controls, drag the mouse over each cell.

4.	Under Change color, click the color you want to change to.

5.	(Optional) Click Preview and hold down the mouse. Release it to return to the Edit Palette dialog box.

6.	To change other color cell assignments, repeat steps 3-5.

7.	Click OK.

8.	Click Done.

Note	When you save the presentation, Freelance Graphics saves the palette changes along with the presentation.

 See related topics


Using a different palette

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

2.	Choose Presentation - Switch Palette.

3.	Select the palette you want to use.

4.	(Optional) Click Preview and hold down the mouse. Release it to return to the Choose Palette dialog box.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Click Done.


Creating a new palette

The easiest way to create a new palette is to customize the palette of a SmartMaster look that has a color scheme you like. Be careful when customizing color palettes, especially cells A1 - A11. These cells control colors of the SmartMaster look design elements.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

2.	Choose Presentation - Edit Palette.

3.	Click the color cell you want to change.

Tip	To display a description below the palette of what each cell in the palette controls, drag the mouse over each cell.

4.	Under Change color, click the color you want to change to.

5.	(Optional) Click Preview and hold down the mouse. Release it to return to the Edit Palette dialog box.

6.	To change other cell assignments, repeat steps 3-5.

7.	Click Save.

8.	Type in the new palette name and give it a .PAL extension.

9.	Click Save to return to the Edit Palette dialog box.

10.	Click OK.

11.	Click Done.


Restoring the original color palette

To restore the original palette of a SmartMaster look, reassign it to your presentation.

1.	Choose Presentation - Choose a Different SmartMaster Look.

2.	Select the SmartMaster look you are currently using.

3.	Click OK.

Note	If you customize the color palette of a SmartMaster look, and then save it, you permanently change the palette associated with that look. If you want to restore the original palette, you have to reinstall the look.


Editing black-and-white palettes

Be careful when customizing color palettes, especially cells A1 - A11. These cells control colors of the SmartMaster look.

1.	Choose View - Display in Color.

2.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

3.	Choose Presentation - Edit Palette.

4.	Click the color cell you want to change.

Tip	To display a description below the palette of what each cell in the palette controls, drag the mouse over each cell.

5.	Under Change color, click the color you want to change to.

6.	(Optional) Click Preview and hold down the mouse. Release it to return to the Edit Palette dialog box.

7.	To change other color cell assignments, repeat steps 4-6.

8.	Click OK.

9.	Click Done.

10.	Choose View - Display in Color.

Note	When you save the presentation, Freelance Graphics saves the palette changes along with the presentation.

 See details


Details: Editing black-and-white palettes

Printing a black-and-white presentation to a color printer

If you switch a presentation to its black-and-white palette, and then print it on a color printer, your output prints in black and white. Switch back to the color palette in order to print color output.

How the black-and-white palette works

The black-and-white palette comes from a black-and-white library composed of black, white, and shades of gray. Each color in a color palette has an equivalent in its black-and-white palette.

Just as in a color palette, each cell in the labeled grid contains a color that controls a particular element of your presentation, such as titles and subtitles, drop shadows, bullets, or data series in charts.

 Go to procedure


Previewing changes

1.	To accept the changes, click OK.

2.	To return to the dialog box so you can make more changes or cancel the change, click Change.

Tip	Another way to preview your changes is to hold down the left mouse button on Preview while you view them, then release the mouse to return to the dialog box.


Specifying the color chooser

Color palettes ensure that colors in your presentation look good together.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	Under Color chooser, select a color chooser.

•	Standard chooser contains two sections: 16 suggested colors at the top, and a 256-color library at the bottom.

•	Designer's chooser contains all the SmartMaster look colors and has three sections: suggested colors at the top, a palette in the middle, and a color library at the bottom. Use the Designer's chooser if you do a lot of design work, including modifying or creating SmartMaster looks.

3.	Click OK.

 See related topics


Changing to different display modes

If you change your monitor after installing Freelance Graphics, you must rerun the Freelance Graphics Installation program. The exact sequence of dialog boxes for this procedure varies depending on your current configuration.

1.	If Freelance Graphics is running, choose File - Exit Freelance Graphics.

2.	Start the Freelance Graphics Installation program.

3.	Click Next or Yes until you get to the Install Options & Freelance Graphics Directories dialog box.

4.	Select "Customize features - Manual install" and click Next.

5.	In the Customize dialog box, click the Freelance Graphics tab.

6.	Select the appropriate display type.

7.	Deselect all other check boxes under all tabs, unless you want to install or reinstall additional components (in which case you should select the appropriate items).

8.	Click Next and complete the installation as directed.


Freelance Graphics Preferences dialog box

The Freelance Graphics Preferences dialog box lets you select a variety of options in Freelance Graphics.

Startup options

•	Lets you start Freelance Graphics with a blank page. See Skipping the startup dialog boxes.

•	Sets the view in which you start Freelance Graphics. See Changing the startup view.

Replicate

•	Sets where Freelance Graphics replicates objects on the page. See Replicating objects.

Drawing tools

•	Sets how the drawing tools work. See the section "Keeping drawing tools active" in Overview: Drawing.

Color chooser

•	Sets the kind of color palette Freelance Graphics displays when you change colors. See Specifying the color chooser.

Save

•	Sets the choices you get when you save a file. See Details: Saving a presentation.

Undo

•	Turns Undo on or off. See Undoing actions.

File Locations

•	Sets default folders (directories) for saving different kinds of Freelance Graphics files. See Specifying the folders (directories) for Freelance Graphics.

Additional options

•	Auto timed save -- sets how frequently Freelance Graphics saves your file. See Details: Saving a presentation.

•	Recent files -- sets how many files are listed at the end of the File menu. See Details: Opening an existing presentation.

•	Disable black & white palettes -- prints using the gray scale equivalents of colors.

•	Keep text overrides when changing a look -- keeps local changes to text levels if you switch SmartMaster looks.

•	Scanning speed -- changes how quickly samples of SmartMaster looks, clip art, or diagrams are displayed when you click the Scan button. See Changing the scanning speed.

Disable Document Management System (DMS)

•	Disables or enables a DMS. This option is displayed only if you have a DMS installed on your system. See Overview: Using DMS dialog boxes.


Changing the scanning speed

You can set the number of seconds each image is displayed when you use the Scan button to view SmartMaster looks, clip art, or diagram choices.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	For Scanning speed, enter a number between 0.1 and 100.

3.	Click OK.


Skipping the startup dialog boxes

The startup dialog boxes let you create new presentations and give you access to existing presentation files. However, if you always want to start Freelance Graphics with a blank page in an untitled presentation, you can skip the startup dialog boxes.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	Select "Skip the startup dialogs and bring up a blank page with no look (blank background)."

3.	Click OK.

This change takes effect the next time you start Freelance Graphics.

 See related topics


Changing the startup view

You can specify which view is displayed when you start Freelance Graphics.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	Under Startup view, select one of the views.

3.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing the startup view

Which view do you want?

Views provide different ways to view and work on a presentation. You can choose which of the three views you want when you start your work session. By default, Freelance Graphics starts in Current Page view. If you change the startup view, the change will take effect the next time you start Freelance Graphics. Choose one of these views as the startup view:

•	Current Page view lets you work with individual pages of a presentation.

•	Page Sorter view displays thumbnail sketches of all the pages in your presentation. Use this view to rearrange, copy, add, or delete pages.

•	Outliner view organizes the text from your presentation into outline form. You can add, delete, and move text, bulleted items, or pages.

Note	You can always switch between views when you are working in Freelance Graphics by clicking the appropriate tab at the top of the page.

 Go to procedure


Set View Preferences dialog box

The Set View Preferences dialog box lets you select various display options.

Show page borders

•	Recommended drawing area -- displays a one-half inch (or more if the printer requires it) margin around the page, allowing you to switch among most printers without affecting the size of the margin.

•	Printable area -- displays onscreen markers for indicating the printable area of the page required by the printer that you have selected. See Displaying the printable area of a page.

•	None -- does not display any margin. If you have optimized your screen display for screen show, there is no need for a margin (unless you plan on making a printed copy of the presentation, in which case, keep the margin visible).

Display

•	Coordinates -- displays or hides coordinates for drawing. See Displaying and hiding coordinates.

•	Drawing ruler -- displays or hides the drawing ruler. See Displaying and hiding the drawing ruler.

•	Text block ruler -- displays or hides the text block ruler. See Displaying the text ruler.

Cursor size

•	Lets you select the size of the crosshair pointer you use when drawing.

 See related topics


Overview: Diagrams, text shapes, and connectors

Diagrams

You can create effective business diagrams by choosing from one of many ready-made diagrams or by creating diagrams from scratch by combining text shapes and connectors. See Adding ready-made diagrams and Creating a custom diagram.

You can customize a ready-made diagram by:

•	Adding text to a text shape. See Adding text shapes.

•	Moving or sizing text shapes. See Moving objects by dragging and Sizing objects with the mouse.

•	Adding connectors to shapes, or repositioning the entry point of connectors on shapes. See Adding connectors to an object.

•	Changing the style of connectors or text shapes. See Switching styles for connectors and text shapes.

•	Changing attributes of text shapes. See Changing the attributes of text shapes.

•	Ungrouping a diagram and editing its parts. See Grouping and ungrouping objects.

•	Copying, pasting, or replicating diagram elements. See Copying objects from one place to another and Replicating objects.

Text shapes

Text shapes are ready-made geometric objects to which you can add text. The text remains with a shape when you move or size the text shape. See Adding text shapes.

Text shapes can display prompt text ("Type text") if you like. To display prompt text in shapes, see Displaying prompt text in a text shape.

Connectors

You can connect shapes--or any two Freelance Graphics objects--with connectors. When you move an object that is connected to another, Freelance Graphics automatically resizes and repositions the connectors to maintain the link between the objects. See Adding connectors to an object.


Diagram tasks

You can choose from one of many ready-made diagrams or create a diagram from scratch by combining text shapes and connectors.

Adding ready-made diagrams

Creating a custom diagram


Adding connectors to an object

You can connect any two Freelance Graphics objects, including text shapes, clip art, drawn objects, text blocks, grouped objects, imported objects, organization charts, tables, and charts.

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Drag and drop a connector from the Connectors palette to the page.

3.	Move the mouse pointer to one end of the connector until the mouse pointer changes to a double-arrow.

4.	Drag the end of the connector around the perimeter of the object to which you want to attach it. When an X-mark appears, release the mouse button.

5.	Click the opposite end of the connector and repeat step 4 to attach the connector to a second object.

Notes

To reposition a connector, click it, then repeat steps 3 and 4.

When you move an object that is connected to another, Freelance Graphics automatically resizes and repositions the connectors to maintain the link between the objects.

To detach a connector from an object, drag it away from the object until the X-mark disappears, or click it and choose Connector - Disconnect.

 See related topics


Adding text shapes

Text shapes, or shapes with text, are geometric objects to which you can add text.

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Drag and drop a text shape from the Text with shapes palette to the page.

3.	(Optional) Size the shape.

4.	With the shape selected, type any text you want.

5.	Click OK.

Notes

To keep the text proportionate to the size of a shape or grouped diagram, press SHIFT as you drag a selection handle to size the text shape.

You cannot change text shapes by editing their points.

 See related topics


Adding a diagram to a diagram file

1.	Create the diagram.

2.	Select all the parts of the diagram, click the right mouse button over one of the selected objects, and choose Group.

Note  If you do not group the parts of a diagram, Freelance Graphics saves each selected object as a separate diagram. Each object (or grouped object) will appear in a separate panel in the diagram library.

3.	If it is not already selected, select the diagram you want to add to the library.

4.	Choose Create - Add to Library - Diagram Library.

5.	Highlight the name of the file to which you want to add the diagram.

6.	Click Open.

The diagram is added as the last diagram in the file.

7.	(Optional) To verify that you have added the diagram to the file, click the Clip Art button, select "Diagram," and look for the new diagram in the last panel of the diagram category (the same as the file name you highlighted in step 5).

 See related topics


Adding ready-made diagrams

 Show me a demo

You can add a ready-made diagram to a page, and then customize it by adding your own text or adding or rearranging other diagram components.

1.	Click the New Page button.

2.	Select the Diagram page layout and click OK.

3.	Click the 'Click here...' diagram block.

4.	Select 'Use a ready-made diagram' and click OK.

5.	Select a diagram category or click Scan.

Note	If you clicked Scan, click Stop Scan when you see the category you want.

6.	Click the diagram you want to add to the page, then click OK.

Notes

To add text to any shape in the diagram, click the "Type text" prompt, then type your text.

You can also add a diagram to a page by choosing Create - Drawing/Diagram and following steps 4 through 6.

 See details


Details: Adding ready-made diagrams

Sizing diagrams

To size a ready-made diagram--especially a pyramid chart--press the SHIFT key as you drag. Otherwise, the text may spill over the borders of the diagram or become jumbled.

Customizing ready-made diagrams

To change individual components of a ready-made diagram, you may need to ungroup the diagram first. See Grouping and ungrouping objects.

 Go to procedure


Creating a custom diagram

You can create a custom diagram by combining shapes and connectors.

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Drag and drop a shape from the Shapes with text palette to the page.

Note	Shape icons with a tick mark in the lower right corner indicate a secondary palette of shapes.

3.	To add text to a shape, click the shape, type the text you want to add, then click OK.

4.	To add a connector to the page, drag and drop a connector from the Connectors palette to the page.

5.	To link the connector to a shape, select the connector, then move the mouse pointer to one end of the connector until the mouse pointer changes to a double-arrow.

6.	Drag the end of the connector around the perimeter of the shape to which you want to attach it. When an x-mark appears on the shape, release the mouse button.

7.	Click the opposite end of the connector and repeat steps 5 and 6 to attach the connector to a second shape.

8.	Repeat steps 2 - 7 to create additional diagram elements.

9.	(Optional) Group the components of the diagram to make it easier to size or move.

10.	(Optional) To store this diagram in a diagram file, choose Create - Add to Library - Diagram Library. See Adding a diagram to a diagram file.

 See related topics


Fitting text inside text shapes

As you add text to a text shape, the text wraps, then the shape grows larger so that the text does not spill over the edge of the shape. You can, instead, make text shrink as you type, to fit within the borders of the shape.

1.	Click the text shape.

2.	Choose Text Shape - Text Shape Properties.

3.	Click the Basics tab.

4.	Select "Shrink text to fit shape."

Note	This affects only new text you enter.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.


Moving connectors and connected objects

You can move connectors, individual connected objects, or all connected objects as a group.

1.	To move an object that is connected to another object, drag it to a new location.

The connector moves with the object and is resized as necessary to maintain the connection.

2.	To move connected objects as a group, select all the objects in a group, then drag them to a new location.

The connectors are moved with the objects.


Offsetting a connector from an object

If you do not want a connector to actually touch the object to which it is connected, you can offset a connector from an object without breaking the connection.

1.	Double-click the connector you want to offset.

2.	Click the Offset tab in the InfoBox.

3.	Type a whole number from 0 to 50 to represent the relative offset distance of the connector from an object.

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.


Displaying prompt text in a text shape

You will see "Type text" (or your custom prompt) inside a shape if the prompt text option is turned on. In ready-made diagrams, prompt text is displayed by default.

1.	Click a text shape.

2.	Choose Text Shape - Text Shape Properties.

3.	Click the Basics tab.

4.	Select "Display prompt text."

5.	(Optional) To customize the prompt, select the existing prompt in the box and type a new prompt.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Notes

To turn off prompt text for any shape, deselect "Display prompt text" in step 3.

Prompt text is not printed or displayed in a screen show.


Saving a presentation as a diagram file

You can save an entire presentation as a diagram file so you can later view and retrieve diagrams from it.

1.	Create as many diagrams as you like in your presentation.

2.	Select all the parts of each diagram, click the right mouse button over one of the selected objects, and choose Group.

Note If you do not group the parts of a diagram, Freelance Graphics saves each object as a separate diagram. Each object (or grouped object) will appear in a separate panel in the diagram library.

3.	Choose File - Save As.

4.	Under Save as type, select "Lotus Freelance Diagram (DGM)."

Note Make sure you save the diagram file in the \LOTUS\SMASTERS\FLG folder (directory) so that it will appear in the diagram library.

5.	Type a file name and click Save.

6.	(Optional) To verify that you have created a new diagram file, click the Clip Art button, select "Diagram," and look for the diagram category (the same as the file name added in step 5).

 See related topics


Changing the attributes of text shapes

You can change the attributes of both the text in a text shape and the shape itself.

1.	Click the shape with text.

2.	Choose Text Shape - Text Shape Properties.

3.	Click the tab in the InfoBox for the attributes you want to change.

4.	Make the changes you want.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Notes

If several text shapes are grouped, changing the attributes of one text shape affects all text in every shape of the group. To change the attributes of just one text shape, choose Group - Ungroup, then change the attributes of the text shape.

You cannot change the shadow color of text shapes.

 See related topics


Switching styles for connectors and text shapes

You can change connectors or text shapes to a new style.

1.	Click the right mouse button over a connector or text shape.

2.	Choose Switch Connector Type or Switch Text Shape Type.

3.	Select a new object type from the palette.


Overview: Drawing

Using the Tools palette

You access the drawing tools by clicking the Drawing & Text button on the left side of the window in Current Page view.

The Tools section of the palette contains tools for drawing arcs, arrows, circles, ellipses, curves, lines, polygons, polylines, rectangles, squares, and freehand objects. You can also combine polygons, polylines, and curves to create drawings with curved and straight edges.

The Shapes with text section of the palette contains tools for drawing shapes to which you can add text.

The Connectors section of the palette contains tools that you can use to connect objects.

Closed and open objects

Drawn objects are either closed or open. The starting and endpoints of closed objects are connected, such as rectangles, circles, or polygons. You can fill the interior of closed objects with colors and patterns.

The starting and endpoints of open objects are not connected, such as lines or arcs. You cannot fill open objects with a color or a pattern (unless you first close them with the Drawing - Convert - To Polygons command).

Keeping drawing tools active

To draw several objects of the same type without clicking the icon each time, choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences and select "Keep tool active" under Drawing tools. This is particularly useful if you are drawing a complex image. To deactivate a drawing tool, click the Pointer icon or another drawing icon in the Tools palette.

Using the keyboard to draw objects

For precise drawing, use the keyboard when you draw an object. Click the Tool icon you want, press the SPACEBAR to anchor the crosshair pointer's position, then use the arrow keys to extend the object. Press the spacebar twice to add one segment of a polyline or polygon. Press ENTER to complete the drawing.

Toggling between the large and small crosshair pointer

To toggle between a large and small crosshair pointer for drawing, press SHIFT+F4. A large crosshair helps you align objects as you draw.

Setting the point of origin

To reset the point of origin on the drawing ruler -- useful for creating scale drawings -- see Details: Displaying and hiding the drawing ruler.

Displaying drawing coordinates

Coordinates help you measure and position objects. To display coordinates as you work in Current Page view, choose View - Set View Preferences and select "Coordinates" under Display.

Adding a shadow to drawn objects

You can add a shadow to any object you draw. Display the InfoBox for the selected object, click the Lines & Colors tab, then make a selection from the Shadow drop-down box.

Redrawing the screen

As you change or add to the page contents, Freelance Graphics redraws the screen. To halt the redrawing of the screen, press ESC. This is particularly useful when the page has a complex drawing, such as a chart or a symbol, and you are drawing an object or experimenting with sizing or positioning an object. To redraw the screen, choose View - Redraw.

Undoing editing actions

You can undo up to 10 actions by choosing Edit - Undo.


Drawing arcs

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Click the Arc icon in the Tools section of the palette.

3.	Position the crosshair pointer at the beginning point of the arc and drag to the endpoint.

Freelance Graphics displays a dashed line.

4.	Drag a point on the line to define the arc's curve.

As you drag, you see a dashed outline of the arc.

5.	Release the mouse button to complete the arc.

 See details


Details: Drawing arcs

Drawing an arc by clicking points

You can also draw an arc by clicking the Arc icon, clicking the two endpoints, and then clicking a third point to define the curvature of the arc. However, dragging to define the curvature of the arc provides better visual feedback because you can see the curve change its shape as you drag the mouse.

Changing the shape of an arc

To reshape an arc after you create it, click the arc to select it, choose Edit - Points Mode, then drag any point on the arc to change its shape.

Closing an arc

To close and fill an arc, click to select it, then choose Drawing - Convert - To Polygons.

 Go to procedure


Drawing circles and ellipses

 Show me a demo

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Click the Circle icon in the Tools section of the palette.

3.	To draw an ellipse, position the crosshair pointer at the starting point of the ellipse and drag to size the ellipse.

Note	To draw a circle, press SHIFT as you drag.

Freelance Graphics displays a dashed outline of the circle or ellipse.

4.	Release the mouse button to complete the circle or ellipse.

Tip	To draw circles that contain text, use the Circle icon in the Text Shapes section of the palette.

 See details


Details: Drawing circles and ellipses

To constrain a circle or ellipse to increments of one grid unit, choose View - Set Units & Grid and select "Snap to grid." When you draw the circle or ellipse, it snaps to the points on the grid.

To edit points on a circle or an ellipse, you must first convert it to a line. Click the circle or ellipse, then choose Drawing - Convert - To Lines.

 Go to procedure


Drawing curves

 Show me a demo

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Click the Curve icon in the Tools section of the palette.

3.	Drag a line to create the first segment of the curve, then release the mouse button.

4.	Repeat the previous step to create each segment of the curve.

Note	To delete a segment while drawing a curve, press BACKSPACE. Continue pressing BACKSPACE to delete segments in reverse.

5.	Click the Pointer icon in the Tools section of the palette to complete the curve.

Tip	You can also draw a curve by following steps 1 and 2, then clicking a series of points on the page, or by combining the clicking and dragging actions.

 See details


Details: Drawing curves

To close and fill a curve, click the curve to select it, then choose Drawing - Convert - To Polygons.

To draw a cusp, see Details: Changing the shape of curves by dragging points.

 Go to procedure


Drawing an object with curved and straight segments

You can draw objects with curved and straight segments by drawing a combination of polylines, polygons, and curves.

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Click the Polygon, Polyline, or Curve icon in the Tools section of the palette. See details.

3.	Draw the first segment of your drawing.

4.	Switch to the next tool by clicking the Polyline, Polygon, or Curve icon. Continue to create the drawing by switching between these icons until you are through. Clicking any other icon will close the drawing.

Note	To delete a side or segment while drawing, press BACKSPACE. Continue pressing BACKSPACE to delete sides or segments in the reverse order of their creation.

5.	Click the Pointer icon in the Tools section of the palette to complete the object.

 See details


Details: Drawing an object with curved and straight segments

To draw a closed object, start with the Polygon icon.

To draw an open object, start with the Polyline icon or the Curve icon.

 Go to procedure


Drawing freehand

The Freehand tool makes the mouse function like an electronic pen or pencil.

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Click the Freehand icon in the Tools section of the palette.

3.	Position the crosshair pointer at the starting point of the drawing, and hold down the left mouse button as you draw, as if you were drawing with a pencil.

Tip	Press BACKSPACE to stop drawing temporarily while you move the crosshair pointer to a new location. This starts a new object.

4.	Release the mouse button to complete the drawing.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Drawing freehand

Adding an arrowhead to a freehand line

To add an arrowhead to a freehand line, double-click the line and select an Arrowhead option in the InfoBox.

Drawing several objects of the same type

To draw several objects of the same type without clicking the icon each time, choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences and select "Keep tool active" under Drawing tools. This is particularly useful if you are drawing a complex image. To deactivate a drawing tool, click the Pointer icon or another drawing icon in the Tools section of the palette.

Drawing perpendicular line segments with the Freehand tool

To draw perpendicular line segments with the Freehand tool, choose View - Set Units & Grid and select "Snap to grid." When you draw with the Freehand tool, each segment snaps to the grid points.

 Go to procedure


Drawing lines and arrows

 Show me a demo

1.	Click the Drawing & Text Button.

2.	Click the Line icon or the Arrow icon in the Tools section of the palette.

3.	Position the crosshair pointer at the beginning point of the line or arrow and drag to the endpoint.

As you drag, Freelance Graphics displays a dashed line.

4.	Release the mouse button to complete the line or arrow.

Tip	You can also draw these by following steps 1 and 2, and then clicking the start and endpoints of the line or arrow.

 See details


Details: Drawing lines and arrows

Constraining a line or arrow to 45-degree increments

To constrain a line or arrow to 45-degree increments, press SHIFT as you drag. To create a horizontal line, for example, press SHIFT and drag horizontally across the page.

Adding a marker to a line or arrow

You can add a marker to the endpoints of a line or arrow by double-clicking the line and selecting a new marker in the InfoBox.

Constraining the length of a line or arrow to grid units

To constrain the length of a line or arrow to increments of one grid unit, choose View - Units & Grid and select "Snap to grid." When you draw the line, it snaps to the points on the grid.

Changing the position of an arrowhead

To change the position of an arrowhead from one end of the line to the other, or to place an arrowhead at both ends of a line, double-click the line or arrow and select an Arrowhead position in the InfoBox.

Drawing a multi-segmented arrow

To draw a multi-segmented arrow, click the Polyline icon in the Tools section of the palette, draw a multi-segmented line, then double-click it to add an arrowhead using the InfoBox.

Note	You can also find multi-segmented arrows in the Connectors section of the palette.

Changing the size of an arrowhead

To change the size of an arrowhead, double-click the arrowhead and select a new size in the InfoBox.

 Go to procedure


Drawing lines with multiple segments

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Click the Polyline icon in the Tools section of the palette.

3.	Drag as many line segments as you want.

Note	To delete a segment while drawing a polyline, press BACKSPACE. Continue pressing BACKSPACE to delete line segments in the reverse order of their creation.

4.	Click the Pointer icon in the Tools section of the palette to complete the polyline.

Tip	You can also draw a polyline by following steps 1 and 2 and then clicking the points for each segment, or by combining the clicking and dragging actions.

 See details


Details: Drawing lines with multiple segments

Adding markers to a line

You can add a marker to the segments and endpoints of a line by double-clicking the line and selecting a new marker.

Constraining a line segment to 45-degree increments

To constrain a line segment to 45-degree increments, press SHIFT as you drag.

Constraining the length of a line to grid units

To constrain the length of a line to increments of one grid unit, choose View - Units & Grid and select "Snap to grid." When you draw the line, it snaps to the points on the grid.

 Go to procedure


Drawing polygons

Polygons are closed objects with three or more sides.

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Click the Polygon icon in the Tools section of the palette.

3.	Drag the crosshair pointer the length of one side of the polygon, and release the mouse button to complete the side.

Freelance Graphics displays a dashed outline of the polygon.

4.	Repeat step 3 to draw additional sides of the polygon.

Note	To delete a side while drawing a polygon, press BACKSPACE. Continue pressing BACKSPACE to delete sides in the reverse order of their creation.

5.	Click the Pointer icon in the Tools section of the palette to complete the polygon.

If you do not close the last side, Freelance Graphics automatically draws it by connecting the first and last line segments.

Tip	You can also draw a polygon by following steps 1 and 2, then clicking the points, or by combining the clicking and dragging actions.

 See details


Details: Drawing polygons

To constrain the angle of a side to 45 degrees, press SHIFT as you drag.

To constrain the length of a side to increments of one grid unit, choose View - Set Units & Grid and select "Snap to grid."

 Go to procedure


Drawing squares and rectangles

1.	Click the Drawing & Text button.

2.	Click the Rectangle icon in the Tools section of the palette.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	To draw a rectangle, position the crosshair pointer at the starting point of the rectangle and drag to size it.

•	To draw a square, press SHIFT as you drag.

Freelance Graphics displays a dashed outline of the square or rectangle.

4.	Release the mouse button to complete the square or rectangle.

Tip	To draw squares and rectangles that contain text, use the Rectangle icon in the Text Shapes section of the palette.

 See details


Details: Drawing squares and rectangles

To constrain the length of a side to increments of one grid unit, choose View - Set Units & Grid and select "Snap to grid." When you draw the square or rectangle, it snaps to the points on the grid.

To edit the points on a square or rectangle, you must first convert it to a polygon. Click the square or rectangle, then choose Drawing - Convert - To Polygons.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Drawing with precision

Freelance Graphics has a number of features that help you draw precisely:

•	A grid (a series of regularly spaced dots across the page) to help you align objects on the page. When you size or move objects, objects can "snap to" the points on the grid. You can change the horizontal and vertical distances between the grid points, show or hide the grid, and turn the snapping feature on or off. See Displaying the drawing grid.

•	Commands to align objects with each other or space them evenly on a page. See Aligning objects and Aligning objects on a grid.

•	The ability to move objects in grid increments with the keyboard. See Moving objects on a page using the keyboard.

•	A drawing ruler to help you measure and align objects. See Displaying and hiding the drawing ruler.

•	Coordinate display to help track the movement of the mouse pointer. See Displaying and hiding coordinates.

•	After you create several objects, you can make them all the same size, make them smaller or larger by small, incremental amounts, or reduce or enlarge them by fixed amounts. See Details: Sizing objects with the mouse.

 See related topics


Displaying and hiding coordinates

You can display coordinates in the status bar to track the movement of the mouse pointer and to help you with precise drawing tasks.

1.	Choose View - Set View Preferences.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Select "Coordinates" to display onscreen coordinates.

•	Deselect "Coordinates" to hide the display of onscreen coordinates.

3.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Displaying and hiding coordinates

Freelance Graphics displays two sets of coordinates in the status bar.

•	The x- and y-coordinates represent the horizontal and vertical distances between the mouse pointer and the origin. The origin coordinates 0,0 are located at the top left corner of the page. You can change the point of origin. For more information, see Details: Displaying and hiding the drawing ruler.

•	The other coordinates represent an object's height and width as you draw or size an object. These coordinates also show the distance an object is moved.

 Go to procedure


Displaying the drawing grid

A grid (a series of regularly spaced dots across the page) helps you align and space objects evenly.

1.	Choose View - Set Units & Grid.

2.	Under Grid, select "Display grid."

3.	(Optional) To make objects "snap" to the points on the grid, select "Snap to grid."

4.	(Optional) Modify the horizontal or vertical spacing of the grid dots (this is based on the units of measurement specified).

5.	Click OK.

Freelance Graphics displays a grid on the pages in the current presentation. If you print or preview a page, the grid is not displayed.

 See related topics


Displaying and hiding the drawing ruler

You can display the drawing ruler along the top and left sides of the page in Current Page view. Use this ruler to determine the mouse pointer location when you create objects on the page.

1.	In Current Page view, choose View - Set View Preferences.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Select "Drawing ruler" to display the ruler.

•	Deselect "Drawing ruler" to hide the ruler.

3.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Displaying and hiding the drawing ruler

Shortcuts

You can use the following SmartIcons to display and hide the drawing ruler.

How the ruler shows the location of selected objects

When an object is selected, the horizontal ruler shows the location of the left and right edges of the box around the object; the vertical ruler shows the location of the top and bottom edges. When multiple objects are selected, the drawing ruler displays the locations of the edges of the smallest area that surrounds all objects.

Drawing ruler units are based on the units of measurement you select in the Units & Grid dialog box. See Changing units of measurement for grids, margins, and rulers.

Setting the point of origin

By default, the point of origin (0,0) for the drawing ruler is at the top left corner of the page. To change the point of origin, first display the ruler, then click anywhere on the ruler across the top or along the left side of the page to set new zero points.

 Go to procedure


Changing units of measurement for grids, margins, and rulers

You can choose the unit of measurement to be used by the drawing ruler, text ruler, the size of columns and rows in tables, page margins, grid spacing values, and coordinates in the status bar.

1.	In Current Page view, choose View - Set Units & Grid.

2.	Under Units, select the new unit of measurement.

3.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Changing units of measurement for grids, margins, and rulers

Units

Units determine the type of measurement to be used by the drawing ruler, text ruler, page margins, grids, and coordinates in the status bar.

Grid

You can display grid lines in Current Page view. A grid is a series of regularly spaced dots across the page that helps you align and space objects. If you print or preview a page, the grid is not displayed.

"Display grid" turns the grid display on and off. Select this option to display the grid.

Toggling between showing and hiding the grid

You can use the following SmartIcons to toggle between showing and hiding the grid:

Snapping objects to a grid

Select "Snap to grid" to align objects on the grid as you add them. This aligns objects whether the grid is displayed or not.

Existing objects do not automatically snap to the grid when you select this option. You must select and move the objects before Freelance Graphics snaps them to the grid.

Toggling between turning grid snapping on and off

You can use the following SmartIcons to turn grid snapping on and off.

Note	You can also press SHIFT+F7 to turn grid snapping on and off.

Horizontal and vertical space

This option determines the horizontal and vertical distance between the grid dots.

 Go to procedure


Copying objects between presentations in Freelance Graphics

1.	Select the object you want to copy.

2.	Choose Edit - Copy.

3.	Go to where you want to paste the object.

4.	Choose Edit - Paste to paste the object.


Copying objects from one place to another

You can copy and paste within a presentation, from one presentation to another, or from another Windows application to Freelance Graphics.

1.	Select the object you want to copy.

2.	Choose Edit - Copy.

3.	Go to where you want to paste the object.

4.	Choose Edit - Paste.

The object is pasted, but also remains on the Clipboard until you copy or cut again in any Windows application. This allows you to paste an object repeatedly.

 See related topics


Moving objects from one place to another

You can move objects by cutting and pasting them within a presentation, from one presentation to another, or from one Windows application to another.

1.	Select the object you want to move.

2.	Choose Edit - Cut.

3.	Go where you want to paste the object.

4.	Choose Edit - Paste.

The object is pasted, but also remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy again in any Windows application. This allows you to paste an object repeatedly.

 See related topics


Deleting objects

1.	Click the object you want to delete.

Note	To delete several objects at once, press SHIFT as you click each additional object.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	To delete objects and store them on the Clipboard, choose Edit - Cut. The objects remain on the Clipboard until you copy or cut again.

•	To delete the objects and remove them completely from your computer, choose Edit - Clear.

 See related topics


Moving objects on a page using the keyboard

It is generally easier to move objects with the mouse, but you can move objects more precisely using the keyboard.

1.	Click the object you want to move.

Note	To move several objects at once, press SHIFT as you click each additional object.

2.	Press ↑, ↓, ←, or → to move the dotted outline representing the object.

If the "Snap to grid" feature is turned on, each time you press an arrow key the object moves one grid unit.

3.	Press ENTER to move the object.

 See related topics


Overview: Pasting cut or copied objects

When you cut or copy an object in any Windows application, the object is stored on the Windows Clipboard. The object remains on the Clipboard until you copy or cut again in any Windows application.

Depending on the application you use to cut or copy the object, the object may be stored on the Clipboard in a variety of formats.

When you use Edit - Paste to paste an object from the Clipboard, Freelance Graphics looks among the formats available on the Clipboard and makes a "best guess" at which format you want to use.

If you want to paste the object using a format you pick yourself, use Edit - Paste Special.

To do a simple copy and paste, see Copying objects from one place to another.

To make copies of an object that are progressively offset from the original, see Replicating objects.

To cut an object and paste it somewhere else, see Moving objects from one place to another.


Replicating objects

You can make copies of an object that are progressively offset from the original.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	Select "Offset copy from original," and click OK.

3.	Click the object you want to replicate.

Note	To replicate several objects at once, press SHIFT as you click each additional object.

4.	Choose Edit - Replicate.

5.	(Optional) Repeat step 4 for each copy you want to make.

 See related topics


Undoing actions

You can undo up to the last ten actions you performed.

To undo an action

Choose Edit - Undo.

Note	Some actions cannot be undone. If a command or action cannot be undone, Undo is dimmed on the Edit menu.

Turning Undo on and off

In most situations, you will want to keep Undo enabled. However, disabling Undo can sometimes enhance the speed of Freelance Graphics.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	Under Undo, select Enable or Disable.

3.	Click OK.


Overview: Presentation files

Presentation files contain the pages of your presentation. You do not have to save each page as a separate file--a single Freelance Graphics file can hold many pages. The number of pages that you can have in a presentation file depends on your system memory. Each presentation file has the same SmartMaster look for all its pages.

The Freelance Graphics 96 presentation file extension is PRZ. The extension for SmartMaster content topics is SMC. The extension for SmartMaster look files is MAS.

You can also open presentation files created in other versions of Freelance Graphics: Freelance Graphics for Windows Release 1.0 and 2.x presentation files have the extension PRE; Freelance Graphics for OS/2 presentation files have the extension PRS.

You can import files and export files, as well as copy pages between presentations that you create in Freelance Graphics. You can also distribute your presentation for review by others.

 See related topics


Closing a presentation

To close a presentation, choose File - Close.

Note	If you have not saved the file, Freelance Graphics asks if you want to save the file. If you click OK and have not yet named the file, Freelance Graphics displays the Save As dialog box so you can specify a file name.


Deleting Freelance Graphics files from your hard disk

You can delete files to free up disk space.

1.	(Optional) Delete one or more SmartMaster looks (.MAS), SmartMaster content topics (.SMC), clip art (.SYM), and diagrams (.DGM) from the \LOTUS\SMASTERS\FLG folder (directory).

2.	(Optional) Delete one or more multimedia files (.WAV, .AIM) from the \LOTUS\FLG\MEDIA folder.

3.	(Optional) Delete one or more presentation files (.PRZ, .PRE, and .PRS) from the \LOTUS\WORK\FLG folder.

4.	(Optional) Delete the tour files (.PRZ) from the \LOTUS\FLG\TOUR folder.

Notes

If you changed the folders where each of these file types reside, substitute those folders for the default folders listed here.

If you are sharing Freelance Graphics on a network, only your LAN administrator can delete files from the \LOTUS program folder.

 See related topics


Specifying the folders (directories) for Freelance Graphics

You can set the default folders (directories) Freelance Graphics uses.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	Click File Locations.

3.	Type in the folders (directories) you want to use, then click OK to return to the Freelance Graphics Preferences dialog box.

4.	Click OK.

Note	You can change the folder (directory path) when you open or save a file. The folder (directory) change is in effect for that file for the current Freelance Graphics session only, and does not affect the default folder (directory) setting.


Ending a Freelance Graphics session

To end a Freelance Graphics session and close the application, choose File - Exit Freelance Graphics.

If you have not saved your presentation, Freelance Graphics will prompt you to save the presentation. If you click OK and have not yet named the file, Freelance Graphics displays the Save As dialog box so you can specify a file name.

 See details


Details: Ending a Freelance Graphics session

File - Exit & Return

When you are editing an embedded OLE Freelance Graphics presentation, File - Exit & Return exits Freelance Graphics and you return to the client application.

When you return to the client application, the Freelance Graphics presentation object displays a pictorial representation of the last page that you were working on in that application. The next time you edit that object (by double-clicking the object), your Freelance Graphics presentation opens to that page.

If you choose File - Exit & Return and you have modified the Freelance Graphics presentation, you are prompted to update the Freelance Graphics presentation object.

 Go to procedure


Specifying network options for sharing presentations

You must name and save a file before this menu item is available.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Network Options.

2.	Specify the reservation and setting.

See Details

3.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Specifying network options for sharing presentations

Only one user at a time can have a file's reservation, even though more than one user can look at the file at the same time. You would typically reserve a file only if you are working with files on a network.

Reservation

•	Get--Gives you the reservation for the file (if no one else has it).

•	Release--Releases the reservation. Use this when you are finished editing the presentation.

Setting

•	Automatic--Gives you the file reservation automatically when you open the file (if no one else has it).

•	Manual--Gives you the file reservation only when you select "Get" under Reservation.

If you open the file without the reservation, Freelance Graphics displays Read Only after the file name.

Reservations for files on a standalone system

File reservation is typically used for network files, but you can also set reservations for files on your computer. For example, you may want other users to view a file on your system but not want them to change the file. In this case, set the reservation to Manual so no one can accidentally overwrite your file.

 Go to procedure


Opening an existing presentation

Freelance Graphics opens a file in the view in which it was saved. For example, if you saved and closed a presentation in Outliner view, the next time you open the presentation, it opens in Outliner view.

1.	Choose File - Open.

Note	If you're running a DMS, it displays its own dialog box rather than the Freelance Graphics dialog box. See Overview: Using DMS dialog boxes.

2.	Under Files of type, select the file type you want.

See File types

3.	Under Look in, select the folder (directory) containing the file you want.

4.	Select the file name from the file list box.

5.	Click Open.

Note	Click Lotus Notes to open a file stored in a Notes database. Click Internet to open a file from a host server on the Internet.

 See details


Details: Opening an existing presentation

Open one or more files at a time

To open a presentation in place of the current file, select "Replace current file" in the Open dialog box. To open more than one file at a time, deselect this option.

Tip	Use the Window menu to tile or cascade the windows.

Note	At the end of the File menu, Freelance Graphics displays the names of up to the last five files opened. Choose one of these files to open it. To set how many file names are displayed, choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences, select "Recent files", and specify the number of file names to display.

Choose which view to display when you open a file

To open a presentation file in a different view, choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences and, under Startup view, select the view you want the file to open in.

Network files and reservations

If the file is on a network and someone else has the file reservation, you can open the file as read-only. This means you can use the file, but you can save changes to it only if you save it with another file name.

If you open the file without the reservation, Freelance Graphics displays Read Only after the file name in the title bar. For more information about getting a file reservation, see Specifying network options for sharing presentations.

Files of type

This specifies the type of files you want listed in the File name box. To list files with other extensions, select one or edit the extension in the File name box.

The default file types are:

•	Lotus Freelance 96 Presentation (PRZ)--Displays Freelance Graphics 96 presentation file names.

•	Lotus Freelance 2.x Presentation (PRE)--Displays Freelance Graphics for Windows Release 1.0 and 2.X presentation file names.

•	Lotus Freelance SmartMaster look (MAS)--Displays SmartMaster look file names.

•	Lotus Freelance SmartMaster Content (SMC)--Displays Freelance Graphics 96 SmartMaster content topic file names.

•	Lotus Freelance Clip Art (SYM)--Displays clip art library file names.

•	Lotus Freelance Diagram (DGM)--Displays diagram library file names.

•	Lotus Freelance for OS/2 (PRS)--Displays Freelance Graphics for OS/2 presentation file names.

Note	You can only import PRS files; you cannot save a file in this format.

•	Freelance (DRW)--Displays Freelance Graphics for DOS draw files.

Note	You can only import DRW files; you cannot save a file in this format.

For information about other file types that you can import, see Overview: Import file types; for other file types you can export, see Overview: Export file types.

 Go to procedure


Reinstalling deleted Freelance Graphics program files

This procedure applies only to standalone users of Freelance Graphics. If you are sharing the Freelance Graphics program on a network, notify your LAN administrator if any files are missing or unavailable.

1.	Click Start in the Windows Taskbar.

2.	Choose Run.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	If you are installing from a diskette or CD, type a:install (or specify the letter of the drive you are installing from) in the Open box.

•	If you are installing from a network server, type x:\path\install in the Open box, where x:\path is the drive letter for the Freelance Graphics program or distribution directory on your server.

4.	Click OK.

5.	From the Welcome dialog box, enter your name and company and click Next.

6.	Select "Customize features - Manual install" from the Install Options dialog box and click Next.

7.	Select the appropriate files and features in the Customize dialog box. (Deselect the features you already have.)

8.	Click Next, and follow the instructions online.


Saving a presentation

Using File - Save

To save a presentation, choose File - Save.

Note	If you are saving a presentation for the first time, Freelance Graphics displays the Save As dialog box.

Using File - Save As

You use File - Save As to save a file using another name or directory.

1.	Choose File - Save As.

2.	Select the file type in Save as type. For more information see Overview: Freelance Graphics file types.

3.	Choose a folder (directory) and type the new file name.

4.	(Optional) If you have chosen to save this presentation as a PRZ file (the standard Freelance Graphics presentation file type) and you want to prepare this presentation so it can be run as a screen show without Freelance Graphics, be sure that "Prepare for Mobile Screen Show Player" is selected.

Note	The Mobile Screen Show Player is a separate application that runs externally to Freelance Graphics. You can use the player to assemble and play screen shows using one or more existing presentation files. To start the Mobile Screen Show Player, double-click the Mobile Screen Show Player icon.

5.	Click Save.

Notes

You can also use File - Save As to export a file. For more information, see Overview: Export file types.

Click Lotus Notes to save a file to a Notes database. Click Internet to save a file to a host server on the Internet.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Saving a presentation

You can specify how to save a file in the Freelance Graphics Preferences dialog box. To open the dialog box, choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

•	Replace--Overwrites the existing file with the new one.

•	Backup--Save previous copy to backup directory.

•	Confirm--Confirm that you want to write over an existing file or backup file.

To automatically save the current file at specified time intervals, select "Auto timed save" and set the time interval.

File - Save Copy As

When a Freelance Graphics presentation is an embedded OLE object in another application, and you are editing the embedded Freelance Graphics presentation, File - Save Copy As saves a copy of the object as a Freelance Graphics presentation file without updating the object in the client application.

Typically, when you are editing a Freelance Graphics presentation object that is embedded in another application, you use File - Update to save the changes you have made to the object to the other application. Use File - Save Copy As instead to create a new presentation file from the current state of the embedded Freelance Graphics presentation object.

For a list of presentation file types that you can save a presentation as see, file types. For a list of other formats you can save a file as, see Overview: Export file types.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Freelance Graphics file types

The following is a list of file types directly related to Freelance Graphics.

•	Lotus Freelance 96 Presentation (PRZ)--Displays Freelance Graphics 96 presentation file names.

•	Lotus Freelance 2.x for Windows (PRE)--Displays Freelance Graphics for Windows 1.0 and 2.x presentation file names.

•	Lotus Freelance 2.x for OS/2 (PRS)--Displays Freelance Graphics for OS/2 1.x and 2.x presentation file names.

Note	You can only import PRS files; you cannot save a file in this format.

•	Lotus Freelance SmartMaster Content (SMC)--Displays Freelance Graphics 96 SmartMaster content topic file names.

•	Lotus Freelance SmartMaster look (MAS)--Displays SmartMaster look file names.

•	Lotus Freelance Clip Art (SYM)--Displays clip art library file names.

•	Lotus Freelance Diagram (DGM)--Displays diagram library file names.

•	Freelance (DRW)--Displays Freelance Graphics for DOS draw files.

Note	You can only import DRW files; you cannot save a file in this format.

For information about other file types that you can import, see Overview: Import file types; for other file types you can export, see Overview: Export file types.


Overview: Using DMS dialog boxes

Document Management Systems (DMS) provide sophisticated search capabilities for finding files across a network. Once installed, a DMS integrates with your Windows applications, and displays a DMS dialog box instead of the application's dialog box whenever you have the opportunity to browse for a file.

For example, DOCS Open is a DMS. If DOCS Open is installed on your system, when you choose File - Save As, a DOCS Open dialog box will be displayed instead of the Freelance Graphics dialog box.

Note	When you use a DMS to save a presentation file, the DMS automatically saves the file in a format that can be opened both in Freelance Graphics and in the Mobile Screen Show Player.

The Help provided for a DMS dialog box is the DMS application's Help rather than Freelance Graphics Help. If you need additional information on how to use these dialog boxes or on using a DMS, contact your system administrator.

Saving or opening files on a local hard disk

When you need to save or open a presentation file on your local hard disk, you need to disable the DMS.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	Select "Disable Document Management System (DMS)."

3.	Click OK.

Displaying a presentation's DMS profile

Once you have saved the current presentation, you can display its DMS profile in Freelance Graphics.

1.	Choose File - Presentation Properties.

2.	Click DMS Doc Info.

Note	The file name displayed in the DMS profile is a temporary file name used by the system. The file will be saved with the file name you specify.


Opening bitmap files

To find bitmap files on your system, follow these steps.

1.	Under Files of type, select Windows/PM Bitmap (BMP) or the type of file you want.

Note	If you are running a DMS, it displays its own dialog box rather than the Freelance Graphics dialog box. See Overview: Using DMS dialog boxes.

2.	Under Look in, select the folder (directory) you want.

Tip	To see a list of folders you have looked in recently, click the arrow next to "Recent directories."

3.	Select the file name in the file list box.

4.	Under Store in presentation, select whether to embed or link the file.

5.	Click Open.

Tip	Click the "Up one level" icon in the dialog box to go to a higher level folder. Click the icon repeatedly to get to all your drives.

Note	Click Lotus Notes to open a file stored in a Notes database. Click Internet to open a file from a host server on the Internet.


Opening files

1.	Under Files of type, select the file type you want.

Note	If you import files other than Freelance Graphics files, such as .BMP files, see Details: Importing objects and files.

If you are running a DMS, it displays its own dialog box rather than the Freelance Graphics dialog box. See Overview: Using DMS dialog boxes.

2.	Under Look in, select the folder (directory) containing the file you want.

3.	Select the file name in the file list box.

4.	Click Open.

Tip	Click the "Up one level" icon in the dialog box to go to a higher level folder. Click the icon repeatedly to get to all your drives.

Note	Click Lotus Notes to open a file stored in a Notes database. Click Internet to open a file from a host server on the Internet.


Opening movie files

To find movie files on your system, follow these steps.

1.	Under Files of type, select the file type you want.

Note	If you are running a DMS, it displays its own dialog box rather than the Freelance Graphics dialog box. See Overview: Using DMS dialog boxes.

2.	Under Look in, select the folder (directory) you want.

Tip	To see a list of folders you have looked in recently, click the arrow under "Recent directories."

3.	Select the file name in the file list box.

4.	Under Store in presentation, select whether to embed or link the file.

Tip	To see the movie, click Preview.

5.	Click Open.

Tip	Click the "Up one level" icon in the dialog box to go to higher level folder. Click the icon repeatedly to get to all your drives.


Opening 1-2-3 named charts

To find 1-2-3 named charts files on your system, follow these steps.

1.	Under Files of type, select the 1-2-3 file type you want.

2.	Under Look in, select the folder (directory) you want.

Tip	To see a list of folders you have looked in recently, click the arrow next to "Recent directories."

3.	Select the file name in the file list box.

4.	Click Named Charts.

5.	Select the chart you want and click OK.

6.	Click Open.

Tip	Click the "Up one level" icon in the dialog box to go to a higher level folder. Click the icon repeatedly to get to all your drives.


Opening sound files

To find sound files on your system, follow these steps.

1.	Under Files of type, select the file type you want.

2.	Under Look in, select the folder (directory) you want.

Tip	To see a list of folders you have looked in recently, click the arrow next to "Recent directories."

3.	Select the file name in the file list box.

4.	Under Store in presentation, select whether to embed or link the file.

Tip	To hear the sound, click Play.

5.	Click Open.

Tip	Click the "Up one level" icon in the dialog box to go to a higher level folder. Click the icon repeatedly to get to all your drives.


Opening .TXT files

1.	Under Files of type, select ASCII Text (TXT).

2.	Under Look in, select the directory containing the file you want.

3.	Select the file name in the file list box.

4.	(Optional) Under Character Set, select a code page.

5.	Click Open.

Tips

If you want Freelance Graphics to close the current file before opening another one, select "Replace current file." If you want to display multiple files, each in its own window, deselect "Replace current file."

Click the "up one level" icon in the dialog box to go to a higher level folder. Click the icon repeatedly to get to all your drives.

Note	Click Lotus Notes to open a file stored in a Notes database. Click Internet to open a file from a host server on the Internet.


Saving a palette

1.	Choose a folder (directory) and type the new file name.

2.	Click Save.


Overview: Fonts

When you install Freelance Graphics, TrueType fonts are automatically installed in the appropriate directory. SmartMaster looks are specifically designed to use the fonts listed in the table below, as well as the fonts that come with the operating system.

Freelance Graphics TrueType fonts

Font name	TTF file name
Brush Script	BRS_____TTF
Gill Sans	GIL_____TTF
Gill Sans Bold	GNB_____TTF
Gill Sans Bold Italic	GNBI____TTF
Gill Sans Italic	GNI_____TTF
Letter Gothic	LC______TTF
Letter Gothic Bold	LCB_____TTF
Letter Gothic Bold Italic	LCBI____TTF
Lydian	LY______TTF
News Gothic	NEGR____TTF
News Gothic Bold	NGOB____TTF
News Gothic Condensed	NGOC____TTF
News Gothic Italic	NGOI____TTF
Perpetua	PER_____TTF
Perpetua Bold	PERB____TTF
Perpetua Italic	PTI_____TTF
Perpetua Bold Italic	PTBI____TTF
Photina Casual Black	PHOTCABL TTF
Note	If you open a presentation created in an earlier release of Freelance Graphics that used ATM fonts, these fonts are mapped to the nearest TrueType font as soon as you make a change to the presentation.


bitmap (defined)
bitmap

A raster graphics file that forms images from a series of dots or pixels. Bitmaps look more like objects than metafiles. However, when a bitmap is a pictorial representation of an object, it does not contain information about the object it represents.

Notes

A bitmap cannot be ungrouped.

Changing the scale of a bitmap may distort the image.


cell margin (defined)
cell margin

The space on the left and right sides of text in a cell.


Clipboard (defined)
Clipboard

The Windows area that stores the contents of an Edit - Cut or Edit - Copy command until you overwrite it with another Edit - Cut or Edit - Copy command or you exit Windows. You can paste the Clipboard contents into Freelance Graphics or another Windows application.


collection (defined)
collection

A group of selected objects that may include text, drawn objects, connectors, or any other objects in a presentation. To select more than one object, press the SHIFT key and click additional objects.


color libraries (defined)
color libraries

The full range of 256 colors available in Freelance Graphics. A color library consists of 240 defined colors and 16 open slots for you to create your own custom colors.


color palettes (defined)
color palettes

A set of complementary colors that set the tone and mood for a presentation. Each SmartMaster look has a black-and-white and a color palette associated with it.


draft mode (defined)
draft mode

In Outliner view, the mode that displays text without any formatting.


embedded or linked files (defined)
embedded or linked files

Use embedded files to create a presentation that is easily portable. For example, if you embed movies and sounds in your presentation and then send your presentation to someone using the  mobile screen show player or TeamReview, you can send the presentation complete with its movies and sounds. Embedding a file makes it part of a presentation and increases the size of the presentation.

Use linked files when you want to create a link from the presentation to another file. Freelance Graphics stores only the path and name of the file. Linking files keeps the size of your presentation to a minimum, but all the files must be available when you run the presentation.

Caution	If you choose to link your files, deselect "Prepare for Mobile Screen Show Player" when you save your file the first time, or Freelance Graphics will convert the linked files to embedded files.


TeamReview: Author's desktop


TeamReview: Reviewer's desktop

The four icons below are:

1 - Freehand tool

2 - Arrow tool

3 - Line tool

4 - Circle tool


Example: Current Page view


Example: Outliner view


Example: Page Sorter view


grouped objects (defined)
grouped objects

Objects composed of many parts that have been grouped together.

Note	In general, it is easier to select, size, and copy grouped objects than it is to work with an ungrouped collection of objects.


Guide Me button (defined)
Guide Me button

Click Guide Me to get guidance on completing different tasks in Freelance Graphics.


handles (defined)
handles

Small boxes that appear around the edges of an object when that object is selected. You can drag a handle to change an object's size.

Tip	To maintain the aspect ratio when you resize an object, press SHIFT and drag a corner handle.


insertion point (defined)
insertion point

When editing text, the location where the text you type is inserted. The insertion point is indicated by a blinking vertical line. As you type, text appears to the left as the insertion point moves to the right.


marker (defined)
marker

A symbol, such as a box or a circle, that you can use to mark the segments of a polyline.


menu bar (defined)
menu bar

The menu bar contains the commands used in Freelance Graphics.


metafile (defined)
metafile

A file in a graphical format that contains a set of generically defined information so that it can be read by all applications that follow the rules for creating and reading metafiles. Metafiles contain objects and can, to some extent, be manipulated. For example, you can resize and ungroup a metafile in Freelance Graphics.

Note	If you ungroup a metafile, it is no longer a metafile. If the metafile was linked, the ungrouped objects are no longer linked.


To move, collapse, or close the InfoBox


To open a content topic

1.	Choose File - Open.

2.	Click the Look in box and select the \LOTUS\SMASTERS\FLG folder (directory) or the folder where the .SMC files are stored.

3.	Under Files of type, select "Lotus Freelance SmartMaster Content (SMC)."

4.	Double-click the name of the content topic you want to open.


To open the InfoBox

Do one of the following:

•	Select an object and choose Properties from the menu for that object.

•	Select an object and click the InfoBox icon.

•	Double-click the object (except for objects that contain text).


backdrop (defined)
backdrop

The design source for a SmartMaster look that controls the background color and graphic components of all page layouts except the Title page.


printable area (defined)
printable area

The area inside the dotted lines in a presentation page. The printable area is what Freelance Graphics prints when you send a page to a printer. The printable area is determined by the output device you selected.


properties (defined)
properties

Characteristics of an object that determine how the object appears in a presentation or a screen show. A property can be a color, the width of a line, a font, the shape of a bullet, or a special effect that is visible only during a screen show. You use the InfoBox to change the properties of an object.


To select an object

•	To select one object, click the object.

•	To select additional objects, press SHIFT and then click the other objects.

When you select an object, Freelance Graphics displays small square handles around the edges of the object.

Note	To select an OLE custom control object, make sure that "Design OLE controls" is selected in the View Menu. If "Design OLE controls" is deselected in the View menu, a single click on the OLE custom control object will run the control.


To select pages

•	In Current Page view, click anywhere on the page so no other object is selected.

•	In Outliner view or Page Sorter view, click the page picture to select it.

Note	To select more than one page in Outliner view or Page Sorter view, hold down the SHIFT key, and click additional pages.


To select pages in Outliner view

•	To select one page, click the page picture.

•	To select several pages, press SHIFT and click each page picture. You can only select adjacent pages.

When a page is selected in Outliner view, Freelance Graphics displays a box around all the text on that page.


To select text

To select a text block:

•	Click the text to select the block in which the text is displayed. Selection handles appear around the selected text.

To select text within a text block, text shape, table, or organization chart:

•	Double-click the text, and drag the mouse over the text you want to select.  A dark highlight displays over selected text.


To select text in Outliner view

•	To select one line of text, click the bullet.

•	To select several lines of text, drag the mouse pointer down the red margin line and across the page to draw a box around several lines of text.


SmartChart (defined)
SmartChart

A chart on a content page with a predefined type, style, attributes, labels, and legends. When you choose a content page that contains a SmartChart, you see a "Click here..." prompt and a small image of the chart. Click the prompt text to enter your own data.


SmartIcons (defined)
SmartIcons

Small pictures that provide single-click access to Freelance Graphics commands.


staff position (defined)
staff position

One entry on an organization chart reporting to the top entry. For example, an assistant may report to the top entry in an organization chart.


status bar (defined)
status bar

At the bottom of the Freelance Graphics window, a bar that contains controls for changing the font and other text properties, switching the presentation from color to black and white, changing the page layout, moving between pages in a presentation, and sending mail.

Some of the options in the status bar change when you change views or select different types of objects.


tabs (defined)
tabs

Display your presentation in different views.

•	Current Page view displays individual pages of a presentation.

•	Page Sorter view displays thumbnail sketches of all the pages in a presentation.

•	Outliner view displays the title text and bulleted lists from your presentation in outline form.


text level (defined)
text level

Levels of indentation for text in a text block or bulleted list. In Freelance Graphics, you can have five levels of indented text.


page pictures (defined)
page pictures

Small samples of your presentation pages that Freelance Graphics displays in Page Sorter view, Outliner view, and in the Presentation Browser. You can select these pictures to move and copy pages within and between presentations.


title bar (defined)
title bar

Displays the name of the application, the name of the current document, and the window control icons at the top of a window. When you highlight a command on a menu, the title bar displays a one-line description of that command.


Windows control buttons (defined)
Windows control buttons

 or

•	Minimize button (1) reduces the Freelance Graphics application or document window to an icon in the Windows 95 task bar.

•	Restore button (2) restores the window to the size before you maximized it.

•	Close button (3) closes the current window.

•	Maximize button (4) enlarges the Freelance Graphics application or document window to fill the entire screen.


window control menu (defined)
window control menu

Click the Freelance Graphics icon in the upper left corner of the window to display the window control menu. These commands allow you to restore, move, size, minimize, maximize, and close the application or document window.


Exporting files

You can export a Freelance Graphics presentation to a file format that other applications can read. Only the current page of the presentation is exported, except for the HTM file type (World Wide Web) which exports the entire presentation as a series of HTM files.

1.	Choose File - Save As.

2.	Under Save as type, select the file type you want to export.

3.	(Optional) If you want to save the file to a folder (directory) other than the default, under Save in, select the folder (directory) where you want to put this file.

4.	Under File name, type the export file name in the File name box.

5.	(Optional) Click Options to modify the export options or to use another profile for the selected file type, then click OK.

See details

6.	Click Save.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Exporting files

The following options are available depending on the format of the file you are exporting.

You can store settings that you frequently use in profiles. For more information, see Overview: Export file profiles.

Background Rectangle

Copies the background color from your presentation. Select this to include a colored background in the export file.

Color Translation

Copies or converts colors.

•	Normal. No translation (colors will be unchanged).

•	Inverse. Converts all colors to opposites.

•	Inverse Grays Only. Converts only black, white, and shades of gray to opposites.

•	Gray Scale. Converts all colors to shades of gray.

•	Inverse Gray Scale. Converts all colors to opposites, then to shades of gray.

Data Compression

Reduces the amount of space required to store the export file.

•	Packbits. A widely supported, general compression technique.

•	Modified Huffman. Best for black-and-white (bi-level) images.

•	Group3. Use only to create CCITT Group 3 faxes.

•	Group4. Use only to create CCITT Group 4 faxes.

•	RLE. Best for simple images (BMP files only).

Notes

Some file formats (EPS, for example) support several data compression techniques. But an application using such a format may support only a subset of the available data compression techniques. Check the other application's documentation for information about what types of data compression it supports.

For Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files, data compression applies to the TIFF-format preview only, not the actual PostScript image.

File Type

(BMP only). Indicates a Windows or OS/2 bitmap file. When you export to a BMP (Windows bitmap) file type, select "Win 3.X" to use the file under Microsoft Windows (Release 3.0 or later and Windows 95), or select "OS2 PM 1.X" to use the file under IBM OS/2 (Version 1.0 or later).

Fill Mode

Controls the conversion of fill patterns.

•	Device. Substitutes fill patterns from the export file type.

•	Stroked. Approximates the Freelance Graphics fill patterns using other capabilities of the export file type (for example, some patterns may become filled polygons).

Stroked provides a more accurate translation and a greater variety of fill patterns, but the file will be larger and the images may take longer to draw in the target application.

Format

Controls how colors are represented.

Format:	Number of colors:
Bi-level	2 (black and white)
8 color	8 colors
16 or 256 gray	16 or 256 shades of gray
16 or 256 color	16 or 256 colors using an optimal palette
16 color palette	16 colors defined in a special palette
16 bit RGB color	5 bits red, 5 bits green, 5 bits blue, one bit unused
24 bit RGB color	8 bits red, 8 bits green, 8 bits blue
32 bit RGB color	8 bits red, 8 bits green, 8 bits blue, 8 bits for color mix mode
Note	For Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files, this option applies to TIFF-format previews only, and not the actual PostScript images.

The format you select for an export file is a major factor in determining the file size. Without data compression, a 32-bit color image takes 32 times as much space as the corresponding bi-level image.

Gradients

Gradients are emulated in a MET file. For example, if a rectangle has a color that goes from red to blue, this gradient has to be emulated by constructing overlaid rectangles.

Include AI Format

Uses only the AI subset of EPS. The AI Format does not support strikeout or underline text attributes, or cell arrays (that is, bitmaps).

Include TIFF Preview

When you select "Include TIFF Preview," a TIFF preview of the EPS file is included in the file, that is, a TIFF image appears on your page. If you do not select this option, you will see nothing on the page until you print it. Adobe recommends a 72 dpi TIFF preview.

Note	Format in the TIFF Preview area determines the color depth of the TIFF preview.

Line Mode/Line Cap Mode

Controls the conversion of line and line-cap (line ending) styles.

•	Device. Substitutes line and line-cap styles from the export file type.

•	Stroked. Approximates the Freelance Graphics line and line-cap styles using other capabilities of the export file type (for example, some lines and line-cap styles may be represented as rectangles and polygons).

Stroked provides a more accurate translation and a greater variety of line and line-cap styles, but the file will be larger and the images may take longer to draw in the target application.

Note	Line Cap Mode applies to EPS files only. Line caps are emulated in EPS files.

Optimize for Color Printer

Uses the printer controls to optimize printing.

Output RGB Direct

If the colors in a MET file are not mapping correctly, select "Output RGB Direct." When you use this option instead of mapping colors using a color table, the actual RGB values are included with the exported file.

Resolution

Sets the resolution (the number of vertical and horizontal dots per inch) for all exported pages.

•	Screen. Uses the current screen resolution for exported images.

•	Printer. Uses the current printer resolution.

•	Source. Lets Freelance Graphics select an optimal resolution, or you can enter the desired horizontal and vertical resolution (from 32 to 400 dpi).

Size

Sets the width and height (in inches) for all exported pages.

•	Screen. Uses the current screen size.

•	Printer. Uses the current printer page size.

•	Source. Lets Freelance Graphics select an optimal size, or you can enter the desired width and height, in pixels per inch.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Export file profiles

What is a profile?

A profile stores the settings that control the resolution, color, and page size of export files. To see the list of profiles, click Options in the Save As dialog box, then click the Profiles box in the Output Filter Setup dialog box.

What are default profiles?

There is at least one default profile for each export file type. For example, for CGM files, there is a default profile for each of several popular applications that support that file type. Each default profile has been tailored to perform the optimal translation from Freelance Graphics to one or more other file types or applications. You can create or delete your own profiles, but you cannot modify the default profiles.

When should I create a new profile?

It may take some experimentation to find the set of export file options that works best for your particular combination of presentation contents, export file type, and target application. If you will be exporting similar presentations to the same target file type or application, you may find it useful to save a new profile. Profiles that you create are flagged with an asterisk in the list of profiles for each export file type.

To create a new profile, select the settings you want in the Output Filter Setup dialog box, then click New, type in a name for the profile, and click OK.

 See related topics


Overview: Export file sizes

Graphics files, particularly those containing bitmaps, can become very large. The amount of space required depends on the options you select (choose File - Save As, then click Options).

Bitmaps

A bitmap treats an image as a rectangular grid of dots, and stores the color of each dot in a fixed number of bits (1 to 32). Bitmaps are sometimes called raster images. BMP, GIF, and TIF files are composed of bitmaps. EPS files can optionally include several types of bitmaps: separate bitmap objects, TIFF-format previews, or Group 3 or Group 4 faxes.

Drawings

A drawing encodes an image by storing information about its constituent objects (lines, fill patterns, and so on). Drawings are sometimes called vector images, because they describe the characteristics of objects in mathematical terms. Some drawings use a procedural language (called a page description language) to describe how to draw the objects.

Size and Resolution

The selections you make for Size (width and height) and Resolution (dots or pixels per inch) determine how many kilobytes each page requires.

Format

The format you select controls how many bits will be used to represent each dot on the page. For each format, the second column below shows the number of bits that will be used to represent each dot, and the third column shows the number of megabytes required to store each VGA-sized (640 x 480 dots) page of your presentation (without data compression).

Format:	Bits/Dot:	MB/Page:
Bi-level	1	0
8 color	2	1
16 gray or color	4	1
256 gray or color	8	2
16 bit color	16	5
16 bit RGB color	16	5
24 bit RGB color	24	7
32 bit RGB color	32	10
Data Compression

When available, you can reduce the file size by selecting from one or more data compression techniques.

Complexity

For drawn images, the primary consideration in determining file size is the number of objects (such as lines, polygons, fill patterns) that need to be drawn.

Line Mode, Line Cap Mode, and Fill Mode

Selecting Stroked for any of these three options can increase the number of drawn objects in an image, which increases the complexity and size of the resulting file.

 See related topics


Overview: Export file types

In most cases, the type of file you export will be determined by the application in which you want to use the file. Consult the documentation for your target application to determine what file types are supported.

Type:	Description:
AI	Native file format for Adobe Illustrator
BMP	A bitmap format used by Microsoft Windows Paintbrush and many other Windows and OS/2 applications
CGM	Computer Graphics Metafile -- A standard (ANSI) drawing format supported by various (primarily DOS) applications
EPS	Encapsulated PostScript, the most commonly used page description language for high-end printing
HTM	World Wide Web presentation. For more information, see Overview: Posting a presentation on the World Wide Web.
MET	OS/2 Metafile, a standard drawing format used by many OS/2 applications
PCX	Native bitmap format for Zsoft PC Paintbrush (can also be read by Microsoft Windows Paintbrush)
TGA	Native bitmap format for Targa
TIF	A standard (Microsoft, Aldus, and others) bitmap format
WMF	Windows Metafile Format, a standard drawing format that can be used by many Windows applications
WPG	Native drawing format for WordPerfect for Windows, DrawPerfect, or WordPerfect Presentation for DOS and Windows

For information about specific Freelance Graphics file types, see Overview: Freelance Graphics file types.

 See related topics


Overview: Import file types

In many cases, the type of file you import will be determined by the application used to create that file. Consult the documentation for that application to determine what file types it creates. Freelance Graphics supports the following import file types:

Type:	Description:
AI	Native file format for Adobe Illustrator
BMP	A bitmap format used by Microsoft Windows Paintbrush and many other Windows and OS/2 applications
CGM	Computer Graphics Metafile -- A standard (ANSI) drawing format supported by various (primarily DOS) applications
DRW	Micrografix Designer 3.0
DXF	Native image format for AutoCAD
EPS	Encapsulated PostScript, the most commonly used page description language for high-end printing
GAL	Native format for Hewlett-Packard Gallery
GIF	Native file format for GIF version 89A
HGL	Hewlett-Packard GL/2 graphics file
JPG	A standard graphic format used on the World Wide Web
MET	OS/2 Metafile, a standard drawing format used by many OS/2 applications
PCD	Kodak Photo CD
PCT	Macintosh drawing format
PCX	Native bitmap format for Zsoft PC Paintbrush (can also be read by Microsoft Windows Paintbrush)
PPT	Native Microsoft PowerPoint 3.0, 4.0, and 7.0
PRS	Harvard Graphics for Windows 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0
RND	Native AutoDesk AutoShade file
TGA	Native bitmap format for Targa
TIF	A standard (Microsoft, Aldus, and others) bitmap format
TXT	8-bit ASCII text file
WMF	Windows Metafile Format, a standard drawing format used by many Windows applications
WPG	Native drawing format for WordPerfect for Windows, DrawPerfect, or WordPerfect Presentation for DOS and Windows.
For information about specific Freelance Graphics file types, see Overview: Freelance Graphics file types.

 See related topics


Importing a 1-2-3 chart

You can import a Freelance Graphics for OS/2 chart (GPH) or a 1-2-3 Named Chart.

1.	Choose Create - 1-2-3 Named Chart.

2.	Under Files of type, select either Freelance for OS/2 (GPH) or 1-2-3 Worksheet (WK?).

3.	Highlight the file you want to work with. If the file you want is not displayed, under Look in, select the drive and folder (directory).

4.	Do one of the following:

•	If you selected a WK? file, click Named Charts and select from the list. If there are no named charts, the Named Charts button will be dimmed.

•	If you selected a GPH file, click Open.

Notes

To import a named chart from 1-2-3 97 Edition (a .123 file), open the 1-2-3 file and then either copy and paste, or drag and drop the chart onto your presentation page.

When you import a 1-2-3 chart, many attributes, such as color and line styles, are not imported. In these cases, Freelance Graphics uses its own chart default settings. In addition, the overall configuration of the chart may differ slightly. For example, Freelance Graphics charts with tables underneath show x-axis labels even when a 1-2-3 chart with tables does not show the x-axis labels.

 See related topics


Importing objects and files

You can import charts, text, pictures, and other objects from other applications. The available options vary depending on the file format.

1.	Choose File - Open.

2.	Select the file type you want to import from the list in "Files of type."

3.	Specify or highlight the file you want to import. If the file name is not displayed, under Look in, select the drive and folder (directory) where it is located.

4.	For certain file types, you have the option of specifying how to import the file.

See details

5.	Click Open to import the file.

Note	Bitmaps imported into Freelance Graphics maintain their original size. If a bitmap is too large for the page, it is reduced by 50% repeatedly, until it fits the page. Scaling a bitmap can cause distortion.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Importing objects and files

File import options

The following options are available depending on the format of the file you are importing.

Embed a copy of the image file

If you select Yes to embed an image with the file, the image is embedded in the presentation. If you select No, the image is referred to, that is, it is not part of the presentation. If you intend to add this image to the clip art or diagram library, you must embed the image.

If you refer to the image and the original file containing the clip art is moved or if the file name is changed, the reference to the file will have to be updated. If you save your presentation to a diskette, you will have to copy the bitmaps to the diskette.

If you have not updated the reference to the file, you get a warning message notifying you that Freelance Graphics could not locate the referenced file. In place of your clip art, you will see a rectangle with an "x" inside with the path that it could not locate displayed.

For more information, see Why embed or refer to clip art in a presentation?

Create a Freelance Graphics group object (EPS and AI files only)

If you import an image that is an EPS or AI file (AI data is a superset of EPS data), one of the following happens, depending on what the image file contains and whether you make the image a Freelance Graphics group object.

If the imported image contains:	Make group object = Yes:	Make group object = No:
Only EPS print data	The message "No displayable data" appears and nothing is placed on the page. When the presentation is printed, nothing from the imported image is printed.	A rectangle is displayed onscreen as a PostScript object. If the presentation is printed on a PostScript printer, the EPS data is printed. If sent to a non-PostScript printer, a rectangle is printed.
EPS data and a TIFF preview image	The message "No displayable data" appears and nothing is placed on the page. When the presentation is printed, nothing from the imported image is printed.	The TIFF preview image is visible on the screen. If the presentation is printed to a PostScript printer, the EPS data is printed. If sent to a non-PostScript printer, the TIFF image is printed.
EPS data and WMF data	The WMF data is placed on the page as a group of objects. When the presentation is sent to a printer, the WMF data is printed.	A rectangle is displayed onscreen as a PostScript object. If the presentation is printed on a PostScript printer, the EPS data is printed. If sent to a non-PostScript printer, a rectangle is printed.
EPS data, a TIFF preview image, and WMF data	The WMF data is displayed as a group of objects. When the presentation is sent to a printer, the WMF data is printed.	A TIFF preview image is visible on the screen. If the presentation is printed on a PostScript printer, the EPS data is printed. If sent to a non-PostScript printer, the TIFF image is printed.
Notes

WMF, a Windows metafile format, is a standard drawing format. It is a vector file format, not a bitmap file format.

If an AI image is vector based, you get a vector image when you bring it into Freelance Graphics.

Use current Freelance Graphics background

If you click No, the PowerPoint or Harvard Graphics template overrides the Freelance Graphics SmartMaster look. It also adds the background as a page layout to the page layout list.

Importing ASCII files in Current Page view

In Current Page view, you can use File - Open to import an ASCII file into a new or existing "Click here..." text block.

•	If you are editing text in a text block, the text in the ASCII file is placed at the insertion point, wrapped to fit the width of the text block, and given the attributes in effect at the insertion point.

•	If you are not editing text, a new text block is created with the text in the ASCII file using the default text attributes for Level 1 Text.

In either case, Freelance Graphics creates a new paragraph when it encounters a carriage return in the file and keeps the tabs that are in the file.

Note	To import an ASCII file that is stored in a character set other than ANSI, change the code page setting. See your operating system documentation for further information.

Bitmap's original size maintained

Bitmaps (files that have a BMP, TIF, GIF, TGA, or PCX extension) that are imported into Freelance Graphics maintain their original size. If a bitmap is too large to fit on the page, Freelance Graphics scales the bitmap by 50% repeatedly, until it fits on the page. To edit a bitmap's attributes, see Changing the properties of bitmaps.

Note	Scaling bitmaps may distort their clarity.

Color bitmaps

Color bitmaps are displayed in color and, if you are printing to a color device other than a plotter, they are printed in color. If you print a color bitmap to a black-and-white device, the colors are automatically mapped to gray scales during printing. To display the bitmap as it will appear when printed to a black-and-white printer, make sure the command View - Display in Color is deselected.

Note	Bitmaps are less subject to color change due to palette switching than metafiles.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: PostScript objects

What is PostScript?

PostScript is a graphics language used to produce high-quality images. PostScript images can be resized with minimal distortion, and can be reproduced on devices that support the PostScript language, most commonly a printer.

Imported PostScript objects

When you import PostScript images (files with the extension AI or EPS), you have the option of creating an imported PostScript object. If you are going to print or display your presentation on a PostScript device, importing as a PostScript object means that all of the lines, curves, and other drawn items will be optimized by the PostScript interpreter resident in that device. For more information, see Create a Freelance Graphics group object.


Image properties for bitmaps

Use the settings on the Image tab to change properties for bitmaps.

Choose a task

Changing the properties of bitmaps

 See related topics


Screen show properties for bitmaps

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for bitmaps.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Alignment properties for "Click here..." blocks

Use the settings on the Alignment tab to change the alignment and spacing of text in "Click here..."  blocks.

Note	When you change settings in "Click here..." blocks on a page layout, every page or content page that uses the page layout will reflect this change.

Choose a task

Aligning text

Spacing text

 See related topics


Basic properties for "Click here..." blocks

Use the settings on the Basics tab to change "Click here..." block properties.

Note	When you change settings in "Click here..." blocks on a page layout, every page or content page that uses the page layout will reflect this change.

Choose a task

Creating a "Click here..." block for graphics

Changing the ID of a "Click here..." block

Changing the placement order of "Click here..." blocks

Customizing "Click here..." prompts

Attaching a script to a "Click here..." block

 See related topics


Bullet properties for "Click here..." blocks

Use the settings on the Bullets tab to change properties for bulleted text in "Click here..." blocks.

Note	When you change settings in "Click here..." blocks on a page layout, every page or content page that uses the page layout will reflect this change.

Choose a task

Creating a numbered list

Creating a bulleted list

Specifying a starting number for a numbered list

Turning bullets on or off

Changing the bullet type, size, or color

Using clip art for bullets

Modifying the space between the bullet and text

 See related topics


Text format properties for "Click here..." blocks

Use the settings on the Text Format tab to change the properties for text in "Click here..." blocks.

Note	When you change settings in "Click here..." blocks on a page layout, every page or content page that uses the page layout will reflect this change.

Choose a task

Changing properties for selected text

Adding a drop shadow to text

Adding a border around text

 See related topics


Line and color properties for "Click here..." blocks

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to add or change colors, lines, shadows, and patterns for text in "Click here..." blocks.

Note	When you change settings in "Click here..." blocks on a page layout, every page or content page that uses the page layout will reflect this change.

Choose a task

Adding a border around text

Changing the background color of text

 See related topics


Named style properties for "Click here..." blocks

Use the settings on the Named Styles tab to work with named styles and "Click here..." blocks.

Note	When you change settings in "Click here..." blocks on a page layout, every page or content page that uses the page layout will reflect this change.

Choose a task

Creating a named style

Applying a named style

Redefining a named style

Deleting a named style

Restoring an original named style

 See related topics


Screen show properties for "Click here..." blocks

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for "Click here...' blocks.

Note	When you change settings in "Click here..." blocks on a page layout, every page or content page that uses the page layout will reflect this change.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

Making bulleted items appear progressively

 See related topics


Frame properties for charts

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change the frame around the chart, and colors and patterns inside the chart frame. The frame is selected when you see handles around the entire chart.

Choose a task

Changing colors and patterns

Using a static color

 See related topics


Screen show properties for charts

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for charts.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Line and color properties for circles

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to add or change colors, lines, shadows, and patterns.

Choose a task

Changing colors and patterns

Using a static color

 See related topics


Screen show properties for circles

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for the selected object.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Line and color properties for connectors

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change properties for connectors.

Choose a task

Changing colors and patterns

Using a static color

 See related topics


Offset properties for connectors

Use the settings on the Offset tab to change properties for connectors.

Choose a task

Offsetting a connector from an object

 See related topics


Screen show properties for connectors

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for the selected object.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Line and color properties for lines, arrows, arcs, and curves

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change properties for the selected object(s).

Choose a task

Changing colors and patterns

Using a static color

Details: Drawing lines and arrows

 See related topics


Screen show properties for lines, arrows, arcs, and curves

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for the selected object(s).

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Screen show properties for metafiles

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for metafiles.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Screen show properties for movies

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to set effects for movies.

Choose a task

Controlling when a movie begins playing

Attaching movies to objects or text

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Sequencing objects

 See related topics


Basic properties for OLE objects

The Basic tab provides basic information about the selected OLE object.

 See related topics


Screen show properties for OLE objects

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for OLE objects.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Alignment properties for organization charts

Use the settings on the Alignment tab to change alignment of text in an organization chart.

Choose a task

Aligning text

Changing properties of an organization chart

 See related topics


Properties for connecting lines in an organization chart

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change the style, width, or color for connecting lines in organization charts.

Choose a task

Changing properties of an organization chart

Using a static color

 See related topics


Text format properties for organization charts

Use the settings on the Text Format tab to change text properties in organization charts.

Choose a task

Changing properties for selected text

Changing properties of an organization chart

 See related topics


Layout properties for organization charts

Use the settings on the Layout tab to change the organization chart style.

Choose a task

Changing the layout of an organization chart

Changing properties of an organization chart

 See related topics


Line and color properties for organization charts

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change line styles and colors in organization charts.

Choose a task

Changing colors and patterns

Using a static color

Changing properties of an organization chart

 See related topics


Screen show properties for organization charts

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for an organization chart.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Color and fill properties for presentation backdrops

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change color and fill patterns for backdrops.

Choose a task

Changing properties

Customizing the backdrop

 See related topics


Color and fill properties for pages

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change the background color and fill pattern for the current page.

Choose a task

Changing properties

 See related topics


Layout properties for pages

Use the settings on the Layout tab to change the layout and name for pages in your presentation.

Choose a task

Details: Changing a page layout

Renaming pages

 See related topics


Screen show properties for pages

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to set page effects for a screen show.

Choose a task

Setting visual effects for pages

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Triggering the appearance of pages

Skipping a page during a screen show

Sequencing objects

 See related topics


Page properties for page layouts

Use the settings on the Layout tab to change page properties.

Choose a task

Renaming pages

 See related topics


Color properties for page layouts

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change colors for the selected page layout.

Changing properties

 See related topics


Screen show properties for page layouts

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for page layouts.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for pages

Triggering the appearance of pages

Skipping a page during a screen show

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

 See related topics


Line and color properties for polygons

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change properties for the selected object.

Choose a task

Changing colors and patterns

Using a static color

 See related topics


Screen show properties for polygons

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for the selected object.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Line and color properties for rectangles

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change properties for rectangles.

Choose a task

Changing colors and patterns

Using a static color

 See related topics


Screen show properties for rectangles

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for rectangles.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

 See related topics


Basic properties for content page layouts

Use the settings on the Basics tab to change properties for page layouts.

Choose a task

Adding descriptive information to a content topic

Overview: Attaching scripts

 See related topics


Screen show properties for SmartMaster content pages

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for the SmartMaster page.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for pages

Triggering the appearance of pages

Skipping a page during a screen show

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

 See related topics


Alignment properties for tables

Use the settings on the Alignment tab to change the alignment and spacing of text in a table.

Choose a task

Changing the properties of a table

Changing how text looks in a table

 See related topics


Bullet properties for tables

Use the settings on the Bullets tab to change the properties of bullets in tables.

Choose a task

Changing how text looks in a table

 See related topics


Columns and row properties for tables

Use the settings on the Column & Row tab to change columns and rows in a table.

Choose a task

Inserting columns and rows in tables

Sizing columns and rows in tables

 See related topics


Text format properties for tables

Use the settings on the Text Format tab to change text properties in a table.

Choose a task

Changing how text looks in a table

 See related topics


Layout properties for tables

Use the settings on the Layout tab to change the table style.

Choose a task

Changing the style of a table

 See related topics


Line and color properties for tables

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change lines, colors, and patterns in tables.

Choose a task

Changing table borders, colors, and patterns

Using a static color

 See related topics


Screen show properties for tables

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects in a table.

Choose a task

Overview: Object and text effects

Changing the properties of a table

Attaching an action to objects and text

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

 See related topics


Bullet properties for text blocks (all levels)

Use the settings on the Bullets tab to change properties of bullets.

Choose a task

Creating a numbered list

Specifying a starting number for a numbered list

Turning bullets on or off

Changing the bullet type, size, or color

Using clip art for bullets

Modifying the space between the bullet and text

 See related topics


Text format properties for text blocks (all levels)

Use the settings on the Text Format tab to change properties for text.

Choose a task

Changing properties for selected text

Adding a drop shadow to text

 See related topics


Line and color properties for text blocks (all levels)

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change properties for text.

Choose a task

Adding a border around text

Changing the background color of text

 See related topics


Named style properties for text blocks (all levels)

Use the settings on the Named Styles tab to work with text.

Choose a task

Creating a named style

Applying a named style

Redefining a named style

Deleting a named style

Restoring an original named style

 See related topics


Screen show properties for text blocks (all levels)

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for text.

Choose a task

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Sequencing objects

Attaching an action to objects and text

Making bulleted items appear progressively

 See related topics


Basic properties for text shapes

Use the settings on the Basics tab to change properties for text shapes.

Choose a task

Changing the attributes of text shapes

Displaying prompt text in a text shape

Fitting text inside text shapes

 See related topics


Bullet properties for text shapes

Use the settings on the Bullets tab to change properties for bulleted text.

Choose a task

Creating a numbered list

Specifying a starting number for a numbered list

Turning bullets on or off

Changing the bullet type, size, or color

Using clip art for bullets

Modifying the space between the bullet and text

 See related topics


Text format properties for text shapes

Use the settings on the Text Format tab to change properties of text in text shapes.

Choose a task

Changing properties for selected text

Adding a drop shadow to text

 See related topics


Line and color properties for text shapes

Use the settings on the Lines & Colors tab to change colors, patterns, and text in text shapes.

Choose a task

Changing colors and patterns

Using a static color

 See related topics


Named style properties for text shapes

Use the settings on the Named Styles tab to work with named styles.

Choose a task

Creating a named style

Applying a named style

Redefining a named style

Deleting a named style

Restoring an original named style

 See related topics


Screen show properties for text shapes

Use the settings on the Screen Show tab to create screen show effects for text shapes.

Choose a task

Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

Attaching an action to objects and text

Sequencing objects

Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

 See related topics


Alignment properties for text blocks (all levels)

Use the settings on the Alignment tab to change the alignment and spacing of text.

Choose a task

Aligning text

Indenting text

Spacing text

 See related topics


Alignment properties for text shapes

Use the settings on the Alignment tab to change the alignment and spacing of text.

Choose a task

Aligning text

Indenting text

Spacing text

 See related topics


Overview: Posting a presentation on the World Wide Web

You can save a Freelance Graphics presentation so that it can be posted on the World Wide Web as a Web presentation (Freelance Graphics uses hypertext markup language--HTML). Freelance Graphics generates an HTM and a GIF file for each page in the presentation.

What Freelance Graphics exports with a Web presentation

Freelance Graphics exports the following with each HTM file:

•	A GIF file that contains an image of the presentation page

•	A link from the HTM file to the corresponding GIF file

•	A link to the next HTM file in the Web presentation

•	A link to the previous HTM file in the Web presentation

•	(Optional) A link to a copy of the presentation (PRZ) file

•	(Optional) An email address at the bottom of each page

•	(Optional) Movie and sound files

•	Screen show actions

•	(Optional) A link to the Lotus Development Corporation home page, where users can download the Freelance Graphics Mobile Screen Show Player

•	(Optional) Speaker note text

•	(Optional) Table of contents

Adding a link from your home page to your Web presentation

You can create a link from your home page to your Web presentation. If you do not have a home page, you must create one, then add a link to its URL in your Web presentation.

The simplest way to add a link from your home page to a Web presentation that you created is to enter the following at an appropriate place in your home page:

<A HREF="/mydir/mypres.htm">My latest Web presentation</A>

Home pages differ and are a matter of individual preference. For more information, consult an HTML reference document or http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/MarkUp/MarkUp.html.

Setting up a Web browser with Freelance Graphics

If readers of the HTM files that you create have access to Freelance Graphics locally or through a network, they can set up a Web browser to work with Freelance Graphics to open PRZ (and PRE) files.  Making this association allows readers to launch Freelance Graphics by clicking the presentation icon in the Web presentation.

Downloading the Mobile Screen Show Player

Users of your Web presentation can download a copy of the Freelance Graphics Mobile Screen Show Player from the Lotus Development Corporation home page (http://www.lotus.com).

Once the Mobile Screen Show Player is installed, users can make an association in their Web browser to PRZ (and PRE) files and use the Mobile Screen Show Player to show the original presentation that you made a link to in your Web presentation.


Saving to the Internet

You can choose the folder (directory) on your Web server in which you want to save the Web presentation files that Freelance Graphics creates.

1.	Under FTP Servers, select a host domain name address or description.

Note	See your Internet administrator if you are unsure what host domain to select.

2.	Click Connect to connect to the host.

3.	Under Save in, select the folder you want to save your files in.

4.	Select the file type.

5.	Specify the file you want to save.

See details.

6.	Click Save.

 See related topics


Overview: Freelance Graphics and the Internet

Freelance Graphics has a number of features that allow you to make use of the Internet.

Internet-specific features

With Freelance Graphics, you can

•	Save files directly to an Internet server.

•	Open files directly from an Internet server.

•	Add an Internet-specific SmartIcon set to your desktop. Click an icon, and you can open from or save to the Internet, go to the Lotus home page, go to Lotus customer support, publish a presentation to the World Wide Web, search for specific text on the Internet, or go to the SmartSuite Internet Library.

•	Include sound and movie files in a presenation on the Internet.

•	Include an Internet address in a screen show as an object effect. Click the object during a screen show, and you jump to the location.

World Wide Web-specific features

With the World Wide Web and Freelance Graphics, you can:

•	Publish a presentation on the Web (in HTML and GIFformats).

 See related topics


Saving HTML files
HTML Files Saved dialog box

Your file has been saved as an HTML file. You can now do one of the following:

•	Choose Launch a browser to view your HTML files to launch the Web browser you have on you system and view the HTML files on your local hard drive.

•	Choose Save HTML files to an Internet server to step through a series of dialog boxes to save the HTML and GIF files of your presentation to an Internet server.

•	Choose Return to Freelance Graphics to continue working on your presentation.


Verifying your password

Freelance Graphics prompts you for a password whenever you connect to an FTP site by choosing File - Internet and then choosing Open from Internet. See your Internet administrator if you are unsure what password to use.

1.	Type the password for the FTP site host.

2.	Click OK.


Creating WWW presentations

You can save a presentation as a set of HTM files and associated GIF files that you can use on the World Wide Web.

1.	Choose File - Internet - Publish as Web Page(s).

2.	Click OK after you have read the information in the Publish to Web Instructions dialog box.

Note	If you do not want this dialog box to come up again, select "Do not show me this message again."

3.	Select the options you want.

See details

4.	Type the file name in the File name box.

5.	(Optional) Indicate the folder (directory) where you want to put your Web presentation.

Note	 All the HTML and GIF files are placed in this folder; a good way to store the HTML files is to create a directory for each Web presentation.

6.	Click Save.

Note	You can also create a WWW presentation by choosing File - Save As, selecting World Wide Web Presentation (HTM) as the file type, clicking Graphic Options, and then following steps 3 through 6.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating WWW presentations

Movie and sound files

If you have media and/or sound files in your presentation, you can include them when you publish your presentation to the Web. Then, if you have Freelance Graphics or the Mobile Screen Show Player loaded, you can launch a screen show from the Web, and the screen show will play, complete with sound and movies. Additionally, if your browser is configured to play movie and sound files, you can play them from your browser.

Link to a copy of the presentation

To make it possible to run the presentation in Freelance Graphics, in the Mobile Screen Show Player, or copy the presentation to a local directory, select "A link to a copy of the presentation." The file will be saved in the same folder (directory) as the rest of the Web presentation.

When you link to a copy of the presentation, Freelance Graphics adds a button to the Web presentation that jumps the user to the Lotus Development Corporation home page on the World Wide Web (http://www.lotus.com).

The link option is contingent on users setting up their Web browser to launch Freelance Graphics or the Freelance Graphics Mobile Screen Show Player.

Note	The Freelance Graphics Mobile Screen Show Player can be downloaded from the Lotus Development Corporation home page.

Link to the Lotus Home Page

Include a link to the Lotus Home Page. The Freelance Graphics Moble Screen Show Player can be downloaded from the Lotus Development Corporation home page.

Add a table of contents

To add a table of contents to the Web presentation, select "A table of contents with links to each page." The table of contents page lists all of the presentation pages with jumps to those pages (each page has a jump back to the table of contents).

Append speaker notes

To include your speaker notes, select "Speaker notes appended below each page." This brings in all of the speaker notes that you have written for each page in a presentation and places them at the bottom of the HTM page that corresponds to the actual page that they appeared on in the presentation.

Include an e-mail address

Fill in the name and address fields in the Publish to Internet Options dialog box, and Freelance Graphics appends the name and address to every page. A mail icon and navigation buttons appear at the top of each page.

Output format

You can choose resolution and file type output when you publish your presentation to the Web.

Resolution

Depending on your screen driver, Freelance Graphics offers up to four different screen resolutions. The resolution you pick determines the output size of the .GIF file for each page.Choose a size for the .GIF files that you create for each presentation page that you think best suits your audience. Choosing a lower resolution ensures that the .GIF files are sized to fit smaller screens, and that the time it takes to download them from the Web site is relatively faster.

File Type

Choose HTML 2.0 to create pages that can be viewed by most Web browsers. Choose Netscape-enhanced (recommended) to create more flexible layouts that use Netscape frames which can take advantage of features in newer Web browsers. Choose both formats for the widest-possible viewing audience.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Screen show actions in Web presentations

When you publish a presentation to the World Wide Web, screen show actions for pages and objects are converted to equivalent HTML commands whenever possible. For example, if you have added "Go to URL" as a screen show object action, you can click that object in a Web presentation and go to that location on the Web.

This screen show action	Becomes this in HTML
Go to Page... Next Previous First Last A specific page	Go to Page... Next Previous First Last A specific page
Go to last page displayed	Go to previous page
Go to URL	Go to URL
Go to Page - List	Go to Table of Contents
Go to Page - Quit	No HTML equivalent
Go to Page - Pause/Resume	No HTML equivalent
Run Application	No HTML equivalent
Play a sound file (.wav or .mid)	Play a sound file
Play a movie file (.avi)	Play a movie file
Sound and movie files

When you publish your presentation to the Web, sound and movie files are converted to clickable areas that contain URL references to the sound and movie files. If you haven't already, you need to set your user preferences in your Web browser to associate an executable file with the .wav, .mid, and . avi files so they can play. For example, for Windows 95, mplayer.exe is the executable file that plays .wav, .avi, and .avi files.

 See related topics


Overview: What a Web presentation looks like

Because Netscape frames allow for partitioning of pages, Freelance Graphics takes advantage of frames in order to lay out a presentation, including a frame with navigation buttons.

Netscape frames

Freelance Graphics automatically uses the following frames:

•	Table of contents

•	Presentation page

•	Speaker notes

•	Navigation

•	URL (Uniform Resource Locator)

Navigation buttons

Freelance Graphics automatically adds buttons to your presentation which you can use to do the following:

•	Go to the Lotus home page (http://www.lotus.com)

•	Go to the Table of Contents page (HTML only)

•	Go to the previous presentation page

•	Go to the next presentation page

•	Place a presentation page at the top of the screen

•	Place a speaker note at the bottom of the screen

•	Launch Freelance Graphics if it is on your hard drive; otherwise, download the Freelance Graphics Mobile Screen Show Player

•	Send e-mail to the publisher if the publisher's e-mail address is included


Backdrop menu

Modify the backdrop

Page Properties

View and modify the page properties

Copy Pages from Other Files

Find and add pages from other Freelance Graphics presentations


Bitmap menu

Manipulate bitmaps

Bitmap Properties

View and modify the bitmap properties

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

Make the selected object extra-large sized

Crop Bitmap

Crop a bitmap image

Group

Group objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Flip

Flip selected objects

•	Left-Right

Flip selected objects left to right

•	Top-Bottom

Flip selected objects top to bottom

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Chart menu

Modify chart data

Chart Type

Choose a chart type

Chart Style

•	Apply

Apply a chart style

•	Create

Create a chart style

•	Set Default Chart

Set a default chart type and style

•	Change Path

Change the path of the chart style

Chart Properties

View and modify the chart properties

Title

View and modify title properties

Legend

View and modify legend properties

Axes & Grids

View and modify axis and grid properties

•	X-Axis & Grids

View and modify x-axis and grid properties

•	Y-Axis & Grids

View and modify y-axis and grid properties

•	2nd Y-Axis & Grid

View and modify second y-axis and grid properties

•	Z-Axis

View and modify z-axis and grid properties

Series

View and modify series properties

Series Labels

View and modify series labels properties

Plot

View and modify plot properties

Note

View and modify note properties

Table

View and modify table properties

Edit Data

Open the Edit Data window

Import Data

Find and add data

Convert to SmartChart*

*Available only when editing a content topic

Change an existing chart to a chart with content

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


"Click Here" menu
"Click here" menu*

*Layout/Backdrop Editing view only

Control the appearance of text in a "Click here..." block

"Click here" Properties

View and modify the "Click here" properties

Text Properties by Level

View and modify the properties by text level

•	All Levels

View and modify the properties for all text levels

•	Level 1

View and modify the properties for level 1 text only

•	Level 2

View and modify the properties for level 2 text only

•	Level 3

View and modify the properties for level 3 text only

•	Level 4

View and modify the properties for level 4 text only

•	Level 5

View and modify the properties for level 5 text only

Edit "Click here" Prompt

Modify prompt text

Fill in "Click here" Block*

*Available only when editing a content topic

Add content to a "Click here" block

SmartChart*

*Available only when editing a content topic

Create a chart with content for a content topic

•	Create

Create a chart

•	Edit Data

Edit data in a chart

•	Delete

Delete the selected chart

•	SmartChart Properties

View and modify chart properties

Font & Color

View and modify fonts and colors of the selected text

Bullets & Numbers

View and modify the bullet style or numbering sequence of the selected text

Named Styles

Define, create, apply, and delete named styles

•	Create

Create named style

•	Redefine

Edit named style

•	Apply

Apply named style

•	Manage

Delete named style

•	Reset to Style

Return the selected text to original style

Normal

Remove all emphasis from the selected text

Attributes

Change the emphasis of the selected text

•	Bold

Bold

•	Italic

Italic

•	Underline

Underline

•	Other

View and display properties of selected text

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected text 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected text 20% smaller

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Alignment

Control text alignment

•	Left

Align to the left

•	Center

Center text

•	Right

Align to the right

•	Full Justify

Space text evenly between left and right sides of text block

•	Indent

Move selected text in a level

•	Outdent

Move selected text out a level

Curved Text

Choose the shape to curve text

Group

Group objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Bullet Build

Set, view, and modify bullet build effects

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties for selected text


Collection menu
Collection menu (without text)

Manage groups of different types of objects

Collection Properties

View and modify the collection properties

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

Make the selected object extra-large sized

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach connectors from selected objects

Align

Align selected objects

Flip

Flip selected objects

•	Left-Right

Flip selected objects left to right

•	Top-Bottom

Flip selected objects top to bottom

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Collection (with text) menu
Collection menu (with text)

Edit and modify groups of different types of objects

Collection Properties

View and modify the collection properties

Edit

Edit the selected text block

Font & Color

View and modify fonts and colors of selected text

Bullets & Numbers

View and modify the bullet style or numbering sequence of the selected text

Normal

Remove all emphasis from the selected text

Attributes

Change the emphasis of the selected text

•	Bold

Bold

•	Italic

Italic

•	Underline

Underline

•	Other

View and display properties for selected text

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected text 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected text 20% smaller

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Alignment

Control text alignment

•	Left

Align to the left

•	Center

Center text

•	Right

Align to the right

•	Full Justify

Space text evenly between left and right sides of text block

•	Indent

Move selected text in a level

•	Outdent

Move selected text out a level

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

Make the selected object extra-large sized

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach connectors from objects

Align

Align selected objects

Flip

Flip selected objects

•	Left-Right

Flip selected objects left to right

•	Top-Bottom

Flip selected objects top to bottom

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Connector menu

Connect and modify objects

Connector Properties

View and modify the connector properties

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

•	Make the selected object extra-large sized

Switch Connector Type

Display a gallery of connector types; choose a connector

Group

Group objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Flip

Flip selected objects

•	Left-Right

Flip selected objects left to right

•	Top-Bottom

Flip selected objects top to bottom

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Create menu

Create a new page or add an object to the page

Page

Start a new page

Speaker Note

Add a speaker notes to this page

Chart

Create a new chart

1-2-3 Named Chart

Add a named chart from a 1-2-3 spreadsheet

"Click Here" Block*

*Layout/Backdrop editing view

Create a "Click here..." text block on a page layout

Organization Chart

Create an organization chart

Table

Add a table

Text

Create a text block

Drawing/Diagram

Add a ready-made diagram or open the Drawing & Text palette

Add Clip Art

Open the Clip Art library

Add Bitmap

Find, select, and add a bitmap

Add Movie

Find, select, and add a movie

Add to Library

Add selected object to the Clip Art or Diagram library

•	Clip Art Library

Add selected object to the Clip Art library

•	Diagram Library

Add selected object to the Diagram library

Object

Create an OLE object


Drawing menu

Modify and manage drawn objects

Drawing Properties

View and modify the properties of the drawn object

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make  The Selected Object Smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

Make the selected object extra-large sized

Group

Group objects

Disconnect

Ungroup objects

Align

Align selected objects

Flip

Flip selected objects

•	Left-Right

Flip selected objects left to right

•	Top-Bottom

Flip selected objects top to bottom

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Convert

Convert selected objects to lines or polygons

•	To Lines

Convert selected objects to lines

•	To Polygons

Convert selected objects to polygons

Connect Lines

Connect two or more lines to form one object

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Edit menu

Edit the file

Undo

Undo the last command or action

Cut

Cut to the Clipboard

Copy

Copy to the Clipboard

Paste

Paste the Clipboard contents

Clear

Delete

Replicate

Replicate

Paste Special

Paste with special options

Select

Select objects

•	All

Select all objects

•	None

Deselect all objects

•	Cycle

Select or deselect objects one at a time

•	Like

Select objects with matching properties

•	Inside

Drag to select all objects inside the dragged box

•	Touching

Drag to select all objects that touch the dragged box

Go To

Go to a specific page

Check Spelling

Check spelling

Points Mode

Toggle on/off edit points mode

Edit Points

Add or delete points; break apart an object

•	Add Point

Add a point

•	Delete Points

Delete a point

•	Break at Points

Break object apart at selected points

Manage Links

Edit, delete, or update links to data in other Windows applications

Script

Create and use a script

•	Run

Run an existing script

•	Show Script Editor

Open the script editor

•	Show TransScript Window

Toggle between displaying and hiding the LotusScript TransScript window


File menu

Open, save, print and close files; use Team tools to share information

New Presentation

Create a new file

Open

Open an existing file

Close

Close the current file or active window

Update Lotus Notes*

*Notes/FX only

Update the Notes document connected to this file

Save

Save the current file

Save As

Specify how to save the file

TeamMail

Create a mail message or route this presentation using your mail system

TeamReview

Distribute presentation for review; read and write comments; end the review session

•	Distribute for Review

Specify distribution method for the file

•	End Review

End the review session

•	Consolidate Comments

Display review comments and combine them

•	Merge Comments into Parent

Merge comments into original file

•	Send to Next Stop/Return to Originator*

*Available for routing only

Send presentation to next reviewer/Return presentation to original sender

•	Update Route*

*Available for routing only

Add or delete reviewers from routing list

•	Done Commenting - Notify Author*

*Available only when you are a reviewer

Notify presentation author that you are finished commenting on it

TeamShow

Initiate or terminate a screen show with a remote computer

•	Send

Prepare to run a screen show on a remote computer

•	Receive

Prepare to receive a screen show from a remote computer

•	Disconnect

Terminate the current connection with the remote computer

Internet

Save and open files on the Internet

•	Publish as Web Page(s)

Convert a presentation to HTML and GIF files that can be posted on the Web (World Wide Web)

•	Open from Internet

Open any document from an FTP (File Transport Protocol) or a WWW (World Wide Web) server via the Internet

•	Save to Internet

Save a presentation to an FTP server

•	Connection Setup

Set auto connect, auto save, and host options for using the Internet

Copy Pages from Other Files

Copy pages from other Freelance Graphics files

Presentation Properties

Update information for this file

User Setup

Customize Freelance Graphics with your preferences

•	Freelance Preferences

Set default options for startup, save, undo, and other options

•	SmartIcons Setup

Modify and set options for SmartIcons sets

•	Network Options

Set the network reservation options for this presentation

Print

Print

Print Preview

Preview the print selection

Page Setup

Set headers, footers, and page orientation

Exit Freelance Graphics

End the Freelance Graphics session

(List of most recently used files)

Open one of the last five files opened


Group menu (without text)

Modify and manage a grouped object

Group Properties

View and modify the group properties

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

•	Make the selected object extra-large sized

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Flip

Flip selected objects

•	Left-Right

Flip selected objects left to right

•	Top-Bottom

Flip selected objects top to bottom

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Group (with text) menu
Group menu (with text)

Modify grouped objects with text

Group Properties

View and modify the group properties

Font & Color

View and modify fonts and colors for selected text

Bullets & Numbers

View and modify the bullet style or numbering sequence for the selected text

Normal

Remove all emphasis from the selected text

Attributes

Change the emphasis of the selected text

•	Bold

Bold

•	Italic

Italic

•	Underline

Underline

•	Other

View and display properties for selected text

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected text 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected text 20% smaller

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Alignment

Controls text alignment

•	Left

Align to the left

•	Center

Center text

•	Right

Align to the right

•	Full Justify

Space text evenly between left and right sides of text block

•	Indent

Move selected text in a level

•	Outdent

Move selected text out a level

Object Size

Changes the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

Make the selected object extra-large sized

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Flip

Flip selected objects

•	Left-Right

Flip selected objects left to right

•	Top-Bottom

Flip selected objects top to bottom

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

Manage the screen show effects


Help menu

Help Topics

Display online Help window

Guide Me

Display Guide Me

Lotus Internet Support

Access Lotus Internet Sites

•	Lotus Home Page

Go to Lotus home page

•	Lotus Customer Support

Go to Lotus Customer Support home page

•	Lotus FTP Site

Go to Lotus Customer Support FTP site

Tour

Start the Freelance Graphics Tour

About Freelance Graphics

Display release and copyright information


Layout menu

Page properties

View and modify the page properties

New Page

Add a new page

Duplicate Page

Copy one or more pages

Copy Pages from Other Files

Find and add pages from other Freelance Graphics presentations

Delete Page

Delete one or more pages

Next Page

Display the next page

Previous Page

Display the previous page

Go to Page

Display the specified page

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Overview: Freelance Graphics menus

Freelance Graphics has dynamic, or selection-sensitive, menus. As you work with your presentation, the menus change to reflect your current selection. For example, when you select text, you see the Text menu; if you select a drawing, you see the Drawing menu. If you do not see what you want on the menu, check to see what you have selected.

The menus that change are always in the same location on your menu bar--the sixth menu from the left.

Constant Menus

These menus are always available. Click any menu below to see a brief description of each command on that menu.

File menu

Edit menu

View menu

Create menu

Presentation menu

Presentation menu (editing a content topic)

Presentation menu (editing view)

Window menu

Help menu

Selection-sensitive menus

The following list shows the menus for the different objects you can select in Freelance Graphics.

Backdrop menu

Bitmap menu

Chart menu

"Click here" menu

Collection menu (without text)

Collection menu (with text)

Connector menu

Drawing menu

Group menu (without text)

Group menu (with text)

Layout menu

Metafile menu

Movie menu

OLE <short name> menu

Organization chart menu

Page menu

PostScript Object menu

Table menu

Text menu (Tables)

Text menu

Text shape menu

Menu shortcuts

In addition to choosing a command directly from the menu, you can also use these methods:

•	Shortcut menus. Click the right mouse button over selected objects to display context-sensitive commands.

•	Shortcut key sequence. Every menu and command has a shortcut key sequence. To use a shortcut, hold down the ALT key while pressing the letter that corresponds to the command.

•	SmartIcons. Many commands have corresponding SmartIcons. Clicking the appropriate icon completes the command. See Overview: Using SmartIcons.


Metafile menu

Manipulate metafile objects

Metafile Properties

View and modify the metafile properties

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

Make the selected object extra-large sized

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

Manage the screen show effects


Movie menu

Play a movie; manipulate the movie icon

Movie Properties

View and modify the movie properties

Play

Play the selected movie

Group

Group objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


OLE <object> menu
OLE <short name> menu

Manipulate OLE objects

<short name> Properties

View and modify the properties

Edit <object>

Edit the object in its original application

<Commands supplied by OLE object>

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

Make the selected object extra-large sized

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show effects


Organization chart menu

Modify an organization chart

Org Chart Properties

View and modify the organization chart properties

Box Properties

View and modify box properties

•	Current Box

View and modify the current box properties

•	Current Box & Peers

View and modify the properties of the current box and its peers

•	Current Box & Subordinates

View and modify the properties of the current box and its subordinates

Frame

View and modify organization chart frame properties

Connecting Lines

View and modify properties of connecting lines

Edit Data

Add to or change entries in the organization chart

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Page menu

Add and copy pages; display different pages; switch or unlink page layouts; add, edit, or delete speaker notes

Page Properties

View and modify the page properties

New Page

Add a new page

Duplicate Page

Copy one or more pages

Copy Pages from Other Files

Find and add pages from other Freelance Graphics presentations

Delete Page

Delete one or more pages

Next Page

Display the next page

Previous Page

Display the previous page

Go to Page

Display the specified page

Switch Page Layout

Assign a page layout to one or more selected pages

Unlink Page Layout

Disassociate the page layout from one or more selected pages

Create Speaker Note

Add a speaker notes to this page

Delete Speaker Note

Delete speaker notes for this page

Make Second Column*

*Outliner view

Create an additional column

Bullet Build

Set, view, and modify bullet build effects

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


PostScript Object menu

Manipulate PostScript objects

PostScript Object Properties

View and modify the properties of the PostScript object

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

Make the selected object extra-large sized

Group

Group objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Presentation menu

Modify a presentation; set up, run, or rehearse a screen show

Choose a Different SmartMaster Look

Use a different SmartMaster look

Change the Typeface Globally

Use one font for all text

Add a Logo to Every Page

Place a logo on every page of the presentation

Switch Palette

Choose a palette

Edit Palette

Edit a palette

Edit Backdrop

Edit the backdrop

Edit Page Layouts

Edit page layouts

Return to Presentation Pages*

*editing view

Edit presentation pages

SmartMaster Content

Create a presentation using a topic-specific SmartMaster with content; stop using content pages

•	Select a Topic

Choose a SmartMaster content topic

•	Stop Using

Stop using content pages

Run Screen Show

Run a screen show

•	From Beginning

Start the screen show from the first page

•	From Current Page

Begin the screen show with this page

Rehearse

Practice a screen show; display rehearsal summary

•	Start

Begin rehearsing

•	Summary

Display rehearsal summary

Sequence Objects on Page

Specify the order in which you want objects with effects to appear

Set Up Screen Show

Manage the screen show effects


Presentation menu (editing view)

Edit SmartMaster page layouts; choose or edit a palette

Choose a Different SmartMaster Look

Use a different SmartMaster look

Change Typeface Globally

Use one font for all text

Add a Logo to Every Page

Place a logo in the presentation

Switch Palette

Choose a palette

Edit Palette

Edit a palette

Edit Backdrop

Edit the backdrop

Edit Page Layouts

Edit page layouts

Return to Presentation Pages

Edit content pages


Presentation menu (editing a content topic)

Modify a presentation; set up, run, or rehearse a screen show

Choose a Different SmartMaster Look

Use a different SmartMaster look

Change the Typeface Globally

Use one font for all text

Add a Logo to Every Page

Place a logo in the presentation

Switch Palette

Choose a palette

Edit Palette

Edit a palette

Edit Backdrop

Edit the backdrop

Edit Page Layouts

Edit page layouts

Return to Presentation Pages*

*Layout/Backdrop editing view only

Edit presentation pages

SmartMaster Content Setup

Name and describe a content page'; use LotusScript

•	Title & Description

Name a content page, enter its description

•	Startup Script

Open the LotusScript IDE Editor

Run Screen Show

Run a screen show

•	From Beginning

Start the screen show from the first page

•	From Current Page

Begin screen show with this page

Rehearse

Practice a screen show; display rehearsal summary

•	Start

Begin rehearsing

•	Summary

Display rehearsal summary

Sequence Objects on Page

Specify the order in which you want objects with effects to appear

Set Up Screen Show

View and modify screen show properties


Table menu

Customize a table

Cell Properties

View and modify the cell properties

Table Properties

View and modify the table properties

Lines & Fill Color

Choose properties for cell background and borders

Size Row/Column

Change the size of selected row or column

Move Row/Column

Modify table layout

Insert

Add columns and rows

•	Row

Add one row below the cursor location

•	Column

Add one column to the right of the cursor location

•	Row/Column

Add a specified number of columns or rows to a table

Delete

Remove a portion or all of the table from the page

•	Row/Column

Choose the column or row you want to delete

•	Entire Table

Remove the entire table from the page

Group

Group objects

Ungroup

Ungroup objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Text menu (Tables)

Change the properties for the selected table text

Text Properties

View and modify the table text properties

Edit

Edit the text

Font & Color

View and modify fonts and colors for selected text

Bullets & Numbers

View and modify the bullet style or numbering sequence for the selected text

Normal

Remove all emphasis from the selected text

Attributes

Change the emphasis of the selected text

•	Bold

Bold

•	Italic

Italic

•	Underline

Underline

•	Other

View and display properties for selected text

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected text 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected text 20% smaller

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Alignment

Control text alignment

•	Left

Align to the left

•	Center

Center text

•	Right

Align to the right

•	Full Justify

Space text evenly between left and right sides of text block


Text Shape menu

Manage the placement and appearance of text shapes

Text Shape Properties

View and modify the properties of text shapes

Text Properties by Level

View and modify the properties by text level

•	All Levels

View and modify the properties for all text levels

•	Level 1

View and modify the properties for level 1 text only

•	Level 2

View and modify the properties for level 2 text only

•	Level 3

View and modify the properties for level 3 text only

•	Level 4

View and modify the properties for level 4 text only

•	Level 5

View and modify the properties for level 5 text only

Edit

Edit the text

Font & Color

View and modify fonts and colors for selected text

Bullets & Numbers

View and modify the bullet style or numbering sequence for the selected text

Named Styles

Create, redefine, apply, and delete named styles

•	Create

Create named style

•	Redefine

Edit named style

•	Apply

Apply named style

•	Manage

Delete named style

•	Reset to Style

Return the selected text to original style

Normal

Remove all emphasis from the selected text

Attributes

Change the emphasis of the selected text

•	Bold

Bold

•	Italic

Italic

•	Underline

Underline

•	Other

View and display properties for selected text

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected text 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected text 20% smaller

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Alignment

Control text alignment

•	Left

Align to the left

•	Center

Center text

•	Right

Align to the right

•	Full Justify

Space text evenly between left and right sides of text block

•	Indent

Move selected text in a level

•	Outdent

Move selected text out a level

Object Size

Change the size of the selected object

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected object 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected object 20% smaller

•	Equal

Make two or more selected objects proportionally equal in size

•	Extra Small

Shrink the object to its smallest size

•	Small

Make the selected object smaller

•	Medium

Make the selected object medium-sized

•	Large

Make the selected object large-sized

•	Extra Large

•	Make the selected object extra-large sized

Switch Text Shape Type

Display a gallery of shapes with text from which you can choose

Group

Group objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Flip

Flip selected objects

•	Left-Right

Flip selected objects left to right

Top-Bottom

•	Flip selected objects top to bottom

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties


Text menu

Change the properties for the selected text

Text Properties

View and modify the text properties

Text Properties by Level

View and modify the properties by text level

•	All Levels

View and modify the properties for all text levels

•	Level 1

View and modify the properties for level 1 text only

•	Level 2

View and modify the properties for level 2 text only

•	Level 3

View and modify the properties for level 3 text only

•	Level 4

View and modify the properties for level 4 text only

•	Level 5

View and modify the properties for level 5 text only

Edit

Edit a text block

Font & Color

View and modify fonts and colors for selected text

Bullets & Numbers

View and modify the bullet style or numbering sequence for the selected text

Named Styles

Create, redefine, apply, and delete named styles

•	Create

Create named style

•	Redefine

Edit named style

•	Apply

Apply named style

•	Manage

Delete named style

•	Reset to Style

Return the selected text to original style

Normal

Remove all emphasis from the selected text

Attributes

Change the emphasis of the selected text

•	Bold

Bold

•	Italic

Italic

•	Underline

Underline

•	Other

View and display properties for selected text

•	Enlarge 20%

Make the selected text 20% larger

•	Reduce 20%

Make the selected text 20% smaller

Fast Format

Pick up and apply attributes of one object to another

•	Pick Up Attributes

Copy the selected object's properties

•	Apply Attributes

Apply copied properties

Alignment

Control text alignment

•	Left

Align to the left

•	Center

Center text

•	Right

Align to the right

•	Full Justify

Space text evenly between left and right sides of text block

•	Indent

Move selected text in a level

•	Outdent

Move selected text out a level

Curved Text

Curve text

Group

Group objects

Disconnect

Detach a connector from an object

Align

Align selected objects

Priority

Set the drawing priority of selected objects

•	Bring to Front

Bring to front

•	Send to Back

Send to back

•	Bring Forward One

Move forward one

•	Send Back One

Move back one

Rotate

Rotate

Space

Evenly space objects horizontally and/or vertically

Make Second Column*

*Outliner view

Create another column

Bullet Build

Set, view, and modify bullet build effects

Screen Show Effects

View and modify screen show properties for selected text


View menu

See and use the pages in a presentation

Current Page

Switch to Current Page view

Page Sorter

Switch to Page Sorter view

Outliner

Switch to Outliner view

Zoom to Full Page

Show whole page

Zoom to Output Size

Show the page at its output size based on output selected in Print Setup

Zoom

Zoom in and out

•	Zoom In

Zoom In on page

•	Zoom Out

Zoom Out from page

•	Last

Go back to previous zoom

Redraw

Redraw the page

Expand All*

*Outliner view

Expand to show page titles and other text

Collapse All*

*Outliner view

Collapse to show page titles only

Expand*

*Outliner view

Expand to show page titles and other text for selected pages

Collapse*

*Outliner view

Collapse to show page titles only for selected pages

Show Ruler

Toggle between showing and hiding the drawing ruler

Show SmartIcons

Toggle between showing and hiding the SmartIcons

Show Internet Tools

Toggle between showing and hiding the Internet SmartIcons

Show in Color

Toggle between color and black-and-white palettes

Show OLE Objects

Toggle between showing and hiding OLE objects

Show Text Attributes*

*Outliner view

Display the text with formatting

Show Pictures of Pages*

*Outliner view

Toggle between showing and hiding page thumbnails

Page Size*

*Outliner view

Change the size of the page thumbnail

•	Small

Display a small page thumbnail

•	Medium

Display a medium-sized page thumbnail

•	Large

Display a large page thumbnail

Design OLE Controls

Turn on edit mode for OLE Controls

Reviewing Tools

Turn on/off commenting tools for authors or reviewers

•	Author

Turn on/off commenting tools for authors

•	Reviewer

Turn on/off commenting tools for reviewers

Set Units & Grid

Specify units of measurement; show/hide grid and set grid options

Set View Preferences

Specify view preferences


Window menu

Control the display of windows

Tile

Arrange open windows side by side

Cascade

Arrange open windows diagonally

(List of open windows)

Select the window to display


Keyboard shortcuts

Freelance Graphics provides many keyboard shortcuts for commands, functions, and navigation.

Function key shortcuts

The function keys are the keys labelled F1, F2, and so on.

Key:	Does this:
F1	Opens a window containing context-sensitive Help.
F2	Lets you edit the text in a selected text block.
F4	Same as choosing Edit - Select - All.
F7	Same as choosing Create - Page.
F8	Same as choosing the menu for the selected object and then choosing Drawing - Priority - Send Back One.
F9	Same as choosing View - Redraw.
F10	Activates the menu bar.
SHIFT keyboard shortcuts

Use the SHIFT key in combination with other keys for additional shortcuts.

Shortcut:	Does this:
SHIFT+F4	When a drawing tool is selected, this is the same as choosing View - Set View Preferences to toggle between different crosshair sizes.
SHIFT+F6	Same as choosing Edit - Points Mode.
SHIFT+F7	Same as choosing View - Set Units & Grid and selecting or deselecting "Snap to grid."
SHIFT+F8	Same as choosing the menu for the selected object and then choosing Priority - Bring Forward One.
SHIFT+F9	Same as choosing Presentation - Edit Page Layouts or Presentation - Return to Presentation Pages.
SHIFT+INSERT	Same as choosing Edit - Paste.
SHIFT+DELETE	Same as choosing Edit - Cut.
SHIFT+TAB	In a bulleted list, moves the item one level to the left.
CTRL keyboard shortcuts

Use the CTRL key in combination with other keys for additional shortcuts.

Shortcut:	Does this:
CTRL+A	Same as choosing Edit - Select - All.
CTRL+B	Sets selected text to bold.
CTRL+C	Same as choosing Edit - Copy.
CTRL+E	In text, centers a paragraph.
CTRL+G	Same as choosing Edit - Go To.
CTRL+I	Sets selected text to italic.
CTRL+J	Justifies text left and right in a text block.
CTRL+L	In text, left-justifies a paragraph.
CTRL+N	Removes formatting from selected text.
CTRL+O	Same as choosing File - Open.
CTRL+P	Same as choosing File - Print.
CTRL+R	In text, right-justifies a paragraph.
CTRL+S	Same as choosing File - Save.
CTRL+U	Underlines selected text.
CTRL+V	Same as choosing Edit - Paste.
CTRL+W	Same as choosing File - Close.
CTRL+X	Same as choosing Edit - Cut.
CTRL+Z	Same as choosing Edit - Undo.
CTRL+F2	Same as choosing Edit - Check Spelling.
CTRL+F3	When an object is selected, this is the same as choosing Edit - Replicate.
CTRL+F6	Activates the next open Freelance Graphics window.
ALT keyboard shortcuts

Use the ALT key in combination with other keys for additional shortcuts.

Shortcut:	Does this:
ALT+F1	Allows you to use numeric sequences to enter characters that you cannot enter directly from the keyboard.
ALT+F4	Same as choosing File - Exit Freelance Graphics.
ALT+F7	Same as choosing Page - Duplicate Page.
ALT+F9	Toggles between displaying the presentation in color or in black & white.
ALT+F10	Same as choosing Presentation - Run Screen Show.
ALT+underlined letter of a menu title	Displays the menu.
ALT+ - (keypad minus)	Displays the Control menu for the active window.
ALT+BACKSPACE	Same as choosing Edit - Undo.
ALT+SPACEBAR	Displays the Control menu for the active application.
Other keyboard shortcuts

Use other keys for additional shortcuts.

Shortcut:	Does this:
INSERT	In Edit Points mode, same as choosing Edit - Edit Points - Add Point.
DELETE	Same as Edit - Clear. In Edit Points mode, same as choosing Edit - Edit Points - Delete Points.
TAB	In a bulleted list, when your I-beam pointer is at the beginning of the line, moves the item one level to the right.


Using the keyboard in a dialog box

You can use the keyboard to navigate and select options in a dialog box.

Key:	Does this:
TAB	Moves the dotted box to the next option.
SHIFT+TAB	Moves the dotted box to the previous option.
SPACEBAR	When the dotted box is on a check box, selects or deselects the option.
ENTER	Accepts the settings in a dialog box and closes it.
ESC	Cancels the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
↑, ↓, →, or ←	In a group of option buttons, selects another choice.
↑, ↓, PAGE UP, HOME, END, or first letter	In a list box, highlights an item.
ALT + an underlined letter	In a list box, selects the first item that starts with the letter (unless the list contains user-defined names).


Using the keyboard in a menu

You can use the keyboard to navigate and choose items in a menu.

Key:	Does this:
F10, ALT, or /	Activates the menu bar.
ALT+ - (keypad minus)	Displays the Control menu for the active window.
ALT+SPACEBAR	Displays the Control menu for the active application.
ALT+underlined letter of a menu title	Displays the menu.
→ or ←	If the menu bar is active, highlights the next or previous menu title.
↓ or ↑	If a menu is displayed, highlights the next or previous menu item.
ENTER	If a menu title is highlighted, displays the menu. If a menu item is highlighted, chooses it.
ESC	If the menu bar is active, cancels a highlighted menu item.


Navigating in text in speaker notes

You can use the keyboard to navigate in the text of speaker notes.

Key:	Does this:
← or →	Moves the insertion point one character to the left or right.
CTRL+← or →	Moves the insertion point to the beginning or end of the previous or next word.
↑ or ↓	Moves the insertion point to the corresponding location in the line above or below.
HOME	Moves the insertion point to the beginning of the line.
CTRL+HOME	Moves the insertion point to the beginning of the speaker note.
END	Moves the insertion point to the end of the speaker note.
PAGE UP	Moves the insertion point to the beginning of the speaker note.
PAGE DOWN	Moves the insertion point to the end of the speaker note.
 See related topics


Navigating in a text block

When you are editing text (when you see a flashing I-beam pointer), you can use the keyboard to navigate in text blocks.

Key:	Does this:
← or →	Moves the insertion point one character to the left or right.
CTRL+← or →	Moves the insertion point to the beginning or end of previous or next word.
↑ or ↓	Moves the insertion point to the corresponding location in the line above or below.
CTRL+↑ or ↓	Moves the insertion point to the beginning of the paragraph or to the end of the paragraph.
HOME	Moves the insertion point to the beginning of the line.
CTRL+HOME	Moves the insertion point to the beginning of the text block.
END	Moves the insertion point to the end of the line.
CTRL+END	Moves the insertion point to the end of the text block.
PAGE UP	Moves the insertion point to the first text block on the previous page.
PAGE DOWN	Moves the insertion point to the last text block on the next page.


Moving objects by dragging

1.	Click an object.

To select additional objects, press SHIFT as you click them.

2.	Drag it to another location.

Tip	To create a copy of the object, press CTRL as you drag the object.

 See related topics


Aligning objects

You can align objects horizontally or vertically, center them, or evenly space them across the page.

 Show me a demo

1.	Select the objects you want to align.

2.	Click the right mouse button over one of the selected objects and choose Align.

Note	For text shapes, choose Text Shapes - Align.

3.	Select how to align the objects and click OK.

Tip	You can use the following icons to align selected objects along their left, right, top, or bottom edges, or centered in a column. For more information, see Adding an icon to a set of SmartIcons.

 See related topics


Aligning objects on a grid

You can set up a grid on your page so that objects you draw or drag automatically lock, or "snap," to the nearest grid points.

1.	Choose View - Set Units & Grid.

2.	Select "Display grid" and "Snap to grid."

3.	Click OK.

4.	Drag the objects you want to move.

As you drag the objects, they will snap to the nearest grid point.

Note	The grid does not print.

 See details


Details: Aligning objects on a grid

Icon shortcuts

You can display and hide the grid, and turn on and turn off grid snapping, by using the following icons.

 Grid on

 Grid off

 Snap to grid

 Grid snapping off

For more information, see Adding an icon to a set of SmartIcons.

Snapping objects without displaying the grid

If you have a grid with very small grid spacing and consequently a lot of dots, redrawing a page can take longer. You can turn off the display of the grid to speed up the redrawing process. You do not need to display the grid to snap objects to it.

 Go to procedure


Flipping objects

You can flip selected objects over a horizontal or vertical axis that extends through the middle of the objects.

1.	Select the objects you want to flip.

2.	Choose Drawing - Flip - Left-Right or Top-Bottom.

 Flip left to right

 Flip right to left

Note	If the selection contains a connector, the command will be Collection - Flip. If a grouped object is selected, the command will be Group - Flip.

Note	You cannot flip a metafile, chart, organization chart, table, text block, or OLE object.


Grouping and ungrouping objects

It is sometimes useful to group objects so you can treat them as one object. This lets you easily select it, size it, change its attributes, or save it as clip art.

1.	Select two or more objects you want to group.

2.	Click the right mouse button over one of the selected objects and choose Group.

Note	To ungroup a grouped object, click the right mouse button over the object and choose Ungroup.

 See details


Details: Grouping and ungrouping objects

Clip art images as grouped objects

Clip art images in Freelance Graphics are all grouped objects. You can ungroup them to size or edit their individual components. If a grouped object is composed of other grouped objects, you will have to use Group - Ungroup more than once until all the objects are ungrouped.

Changing the attributes of a group of objects

You can change the attributes of a group of objects by clicking the right mouse button over the group and choosing Group Properties. See Details: Changing properties of objects.

Grouped objects in "Click here..." blocks

When a chart or clip art is in a "Click here..." block, such as "Click here to create chart," you cannot ungroup it. To remove it from the "Click here..." block, click it, then choose Edit - Cut, then Edit - Paste. Now you can ungroup it.

Objects you cannot ungroup

You cannot ungroup bitmapped objects, such as .BMP or .TIF files.

Ungrouping a chart

When you ungroup a chart, the chart components become individual objects. A chart still looks the same, but is no longer connected to its data. You cannot select the individual objects and group them back into an editable chart.

Ungrouping metafiles

For information about ungrouping metafiles, see Overview: Metafiles and bitmaps.

Splitting an ungrouped object into parts

Even when an object is a single object (and not part of a group of objects), you can break it into two or more objects with Edit - Edit Points - Break at Points. See Splitting an object into parts.

 Go to procedure


Rearranging overlapping objects

You can rearrange overlapping objects to achieve the effect you want. For example, if a newly drawn object covers a previously drawn object, you can move the new object behind the other object.

1.	Click the object you want to rearrange.

2.	Choose Drawing - Priority, then choose a position.

See details

 Bring to Front

 Send to Back

 Bring Forward One

 Send Back One

 See details


Details: Rearranging overlapping objects

What is drawing priority?

The drawing priority is the order in which Freelance Graphics will overlap objects on the page. Usually, this is the order in which you add objects to the page.

Drawing priority does not affect the order in which objects are displayed in a screen show. For more information, see Sequencing objects.

Priority options

This option	Moves the selected object here in the pile of overlapping objects
Bring to Front	To the top and assigns it a priority order of 1.
Send to Back	To the bottom.
Bring Forward One	One step closer to the top.
Send Back One	One step closer to the bottom.
 Go to procedure


Rotating objects

Rotating turns an object around its center point, or two or more objects around their collective center point.

1.	Select the objects you want to rotate.

2.	Choose Drawing - Rotate, Collection - Rotate, or Text Shape - Rotate.

Note	To rotate text, choose Text - Rotate.

The mouse pointer changes to a curved shape.

3.	Hold down the left mouse button as you move the mouse in either direction.

The angle of rotation appears in the status bar.

4.	Release the mouse button to complete the action.

 See details


Details: Rotating objects

Hold down SHIFT while rotating the selected objects to constrain the rotation to 45-degree increments.

You cannot rotate charts, tables, or organization charts.

You can rotate bitmaps in 90-degree increments only.

Move the mouse further from the object for finer degrees of rotation.

Editing rotated text

When you edit rotated text, Freelance Graphics temporarily positions the text block horizontally, then returns the text to its rotated position when you finish editing it.

 Go to procedure


Spacing objects horizontally and vertically

You can evenly space objects horizontally, vertically, or in both directions.

1.	Select the objects (at least three) that you want to space.

2.	Choose Drawing - Space, Collection - Space, or Text Shape - Space.

3.	Select the spacing options you want and click OK.

Tip	You can also use the following icons to space objects horizontally or vertically.

 See related topics


Changing the shape of objects by adding points

In edit points mode, you can add points to an existing line, arrow, arc, curve, or polygon.

1.	Choose Edit - Points Mode.

2.	Click an object.

3.	Press INS or choose Edit - Edit Points - Add Point.

4.	Click the perimeter of the object where you want to add a point.

Freelance Graphics adds the point where you clicked. You can reposition the new point.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add another point.

6.	To leave edit points mode, choose Edit - Points Mode.

Note	Before you can add points to grouped objects, such as a symbol you created from individual objects, you must first use Group - Ungroup to ungroup the object.

 See related topics


Changing the shape of curves by dragging points

You can change the shape of a curve by editing the vertices of the curve. Because Freelance Graphics creates Bézier curves, each point on a curve also has two control points. You can edit these control points for even finer control of the shape of the curve.

1.	Choose Edit - Points Mode.

2.	Click a curve.

3.	Click a point on the curve that you want to edit, other than the endpoints.

The two control points for the selected point lie on a straight line through the selected point, one on either side. The points and the connecting line are shaped like a barbell.

4.	Drag one of the two control points in any direction.

A dashed outline shows the shape of the curve. See details

5.	Release the mouse button.

6.	To leave edit points mode, choose Edit - Points Mode.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing the shape of curves by dragging points

Think of the control point as a magnet that pulls the curve: the longer the arm of the control point, the farther the curve is pulled. Note that the opposite side of the barbell stays in line with the one you are dragging, but remains at a fixed distance from the vertex. This gives you more control over individual curve segments.

If you press SHIFT while dragging a control point, both control points move equidistant from the vertex. This effect creates smoother curves.To add a cusp to the curve, press CTRL as you drag one control point, angling the half of the barbell you are dragging.

 Go to procedure


Changing properties of objects

You can change the properties of objects, including clip art and bitmaps, in Current Page view.

1.	Click the right mouse button over an object and choose its Properties command.

Freelance Graphics displays the InfoBox for the selected object type.

2.	Change the properties as you like.

3.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing properties of objects

To change the properties of two or more objects, select the objects, then click the right mouse button over one of the selected objects and choose All Selected Objects Properties.

If the selected objects are all of the same object type--for example, all rectangles or all text blocks--Freelance Graphics displays the InfoBox for the selected object type.

If the selected objects are of different types, the InfoBox displays the common attributes for all selected object types. You can narrow the scope to objects of a single object type by making a selection under "Properties for."

 Go to procedure


Connecting lines

You can connect any combination of two or more lines, freehand lines, arrows, curves, or arcs to form a single object.

1.	Select the lines that you want to connect.

2.	Choose Drawing - Connect Lines.

Freelance Graphics searches for the closest start or endpoints of the selected lines, and adds a straight line segment between them.

Notes

If you connect arrows, arrowheads appear only on the ends of the resulting arrow.

Choose Edit - Undo to undo Drawing - Connect Lines.


Copying properties from one object to another

You can copy the properties of one object to another.

1.	Click the object whose properties you want to copy.

2.	Choose Connector/Drawing/Group/Text/Text Shape - Fast Format - Pick Up Attributes.

3.	Click the object you want to receive the attributes.

4.	Choose Connector/Drawing/Group/Text/Text Shape - Fast Format - Apply Attributes.


Cropping a bitmap

You can display a portion of a bitmap by cropping it.

1.	Click the bitmap you want to crop.

2.	Choose Bitmap - Crop Bitmap.

3.	To size the cropping rectangle, drag a handle to frame only that portion of the bitmap you want to use.

4.	To move the cropping rectangle, drag it.

5.	Click OK when you are satisfied with the way you have cropped the bitmap.

 See related topics


Changing default properties of the drawing tools

You can customize the drawing tools so that the objects you draw have specific attributes (for example, blue lines or red rectangles).

1.	Click the right mouse button over an object (for example, a line), then choose the Properties command.

2.	Change the attributes in the InfoBox.

3.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

4.	Click the right mouse button over the object and choose Change Default Properties.

5.	Click OK to verify the change.

Notes

When you change the default attributes for a drawing tool, Freelance Graphics uses the new defaults when you next draw an object with that drawing tool in the current presentation. Existing objects are not affected when you change defaults.

You cannot save default attributes for text shapes or connectors.

When you save a presentation, these defaults are saved along with it. The defaults for new presentations or other existing presentations are not affected.


Changing the shape of objects by deleting points

You can delete points from a polyline, curve, or polygon to change its shape.

1.	Choose Edit - Points Mode.

2.	Click an object.

3.	Click a point. To select additional points, press SHIFT as you click them.

4.	Press DELETE.

Freelance Graphics redraws the object as determined by the remaining points.

5.	To leave edit points mode, choose Edit - Points Mode.

Note	You can delete a line, arrow, arc, curve, or polygon in edit points mode by first selecting all the points on the object and then pressing DELETE.

 See related topics


Converting lines to polygons

You can convert a multi-segmented line to a polygon to create a filled object, or change a polygon to a line.

1.	To change a multi-segmented line to a polygon, click the right mouse button over the line and choose Convert - To Polygons.

Note	Freelance Graphics fills the polygon.

2.	To change the fill of the polygon, click the right mouse button over the object, choose Polygon/Shape Properties, and select a fill.

Note	To change a polygon to a line, click the right mouse button over the polygon and choose Convert - To Lines.

 See details


Details: Converting lines to polygons

Why convert a line to a polygon?

The main reason to convert a line to a polygon is so you can add a fill pattern. Converting a multi-segmented line (or curve or arc) to a polygon connects the start and endpoints of the object, which becomes a closed and filled object. The converted object takes on the default area color and pattern for polygons.

Converting a line with arrowheads to a polygon

When you convert a line with arrowheads to a polygon, Freelance Graphics removes the arrowheads.

Finding the endpoints of a polygon converted from a polyline

After you convert a polygon to a polyline, the start and endpoints are on top of each other and difficult to distinguish. You can separate these by dragging one point away in edit points mode.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Working in edit points mode

In edit points mode, you can change the shape of an object by adding, moving, or deleting the individual points that comprise the object.

1.	Choose Edit - Points Mode.

2.	Click an object.

Note	You cannot edit the points of connectors, text shapes, or grouped objects.

3.	Click the point you want to work with.

4.	Add, move, or delete any points on the object.

5.	To leave edit points mode, choose Edit - Points Mode.

Tips

To select several points at once (on the same object or on different objects), drag a box around the points you want to move, or press SHIFT and click the points.

To deselect a point, press SHIFT while clicking the point.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Working in edit points mode

When you are working in edit points mode:

•	The pointer changes to [image].

•	Instead of the usual eight handles displayed when an object is selected, a selected object has a handle between each segment and at its start and endpoints.

•	Click to select the points you want to work with.

•	Selected points appear as filled squares; unselected points as unfilled squares.

•	Freelance Graphics remains in edit points mode until you choose Edit - Points Mode again.

•	To change the shape of a single line segment, add points to the segment and then move the added points.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Objects

Objects are text and graphic shapes that you add to the page. Examples of objects include lines, circles, charts, shapes with text, connectors, clip art, tables, organization charts, and OLE objects.

Open vs. closed objects

A closed object is an object whose starting point and endpoint are connected, or are the same, such as a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon. The interior of a closed object can be filled with a color or a pattern.

An open object is an object whose starting point and endpoint are not connected, such as a line or an arc. An open object has no interior and cannot be filled with a color or a pattern.

Creating custom SmartIcons sets

To suit the task you are working on, you can add SmartIcons to the current set, or create your own custom sets for different tasks. For more information, see Adding an icon to a set of SmartIcons and Creating a new SmartIcons set.

Working with a grid

You can set up a grid on your page so that objects you draw, move, or size automatically lock, or "snap," to the nearest grid points. For more information, see Displaying the drawing grid.

Changing the shape of objects

You can change the shape of an object by adding, moving, or deleting the individual points that comprise the object. See Working in edit points mode.

 See related topics


Changing the shape of objects by moving points

You can change the shape of an object by dragging one or more points.

1.	Choose Edit - Points Mode.

2.	Click the object.

To move several points at once (on the same object or on different objects), press SHIFT and click the additional points.

3.	Drag a point.

A dashed outline shows the shape of the object.

4.	Release the mouse button when you see the shape you want.

5.	To leave edit points mode, choose Edit - Points Mode.

Tip	To move points with the keyboard, after step 2 press an arrow key to move it in the direction you want, then press ENTER.

 See related topics


Sizing objects with the mouse

You can size an object by dragging a handle on the object's perimeter.

 Show me a demo

1.	Click the object you want to size.

2.	Drag a handle to size the object.

A dashed outline shows the size of the object.

3.	Release the mouse button.

Tips

To size several objects at once, drag a handle of any one of the selected objects.

To size ready-made diagrams--especially pyramid charts--press the SHIFT key as you drag. Otherwise, the text may spill over the borders of the diagram or become jumbled.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Sizing objects with the mouse

Changing an object's size and proportions

When you size an object, you can change both its size and proportions, as described in the following table. If you are sizing an object with the keyboard, hold down an arrow key instead of dragging the object with the mouse.

To change:	Do this:
An object's width without changing its height	Drag a middle handle on the left or right side of the object.
An object's height without changing its width	Drag a middle handle on the top or bottom of the object.
Both an object's width and height	Drag a corner handle.
An object's size without changing its proportions	Drag a corner handle while holding down the SHIFT key.
Sizing objects by fixed amounts

You can use menu commands to size an object by fixed amounts. Click the right mouse button over the object, choose Object Size, and then choose a size option.

•	Enlarge 20% and Reduce 20% make an object larger or smaller in small incremental amounts each time you issue the command.

•	Equal makes two or more selected objects the same size. Freelance Graphics chooses an average size based on the size of all the selected objects.

•	Extra Small, Small, Medium, Large, and Extra Large size the selected objects by fixed amounts.

 Go to procedure


Sizing objects with the keyboard

It is usually easier to size objects with the mouse, but the keyboard offers a finer level of control.

1.	Select the object you want to size.

2.	Press . (period).

A cross appears on a handle of the box around the selected object or group. Press . (period) again to move to the next handle. In this way, you can select any handle around the perimeter of the object.

3.	Press ↑, ↓, →, or ← to size the object.

4.	Press ENTER to complete the sizing operation.

Tip	Choose Edit - Undo to undo up to 10 sizing operations.

 See related topics


Splitting an object into parts

You can split an object into two or more objects. This is useful when you want to create a new object using part of an existing object.

1.	Click the object you want to break apart.

2.	Choose Edit - Points Mode.

Freelance Graphics displays handles on the object's points.

3.	Select the points on the object where you want to break the object. You must select at least one point on an open object and two non-consecutive points on a closed object.

To select a single point, click the point; to select several points, press SHIFT and click each additional point.

4.	Choose Edit - Edit Points - Break at Points to break the object into two or more objects.

Because the resulting objects abut each other, the original object may not appear to be split. To verify that the object has been split, drag the individual objects apart.

5.	To leave edit points mode, choose Edit - Points Mode.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Splitting an object into parts

Closed vs. open objects

A closed object is an object whose starting point and endpoint are connected, or are the same, such as a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon. The interior of a closed object can be filled with a color or a pattern.

An open object is an object whose starting point and endpoint are not connected, such as a line or an arc. An open object has no interior; it cannot be filled with a color or a pattern.

You can break apart both closed and open objects. When you break apart a closed object, you create two or more closed objects. (Freelance Graphics adds lines to the objects to close them.) When you break apart an open object, you create two or more open objects.

•	If you split an object that has an arrowhead, Freelance Graphics removes the arrowhead.

•	If you close a line with markers, Freelance Graphics removes the markers.

•	To split a circle or rectangle, you must first convert it to a polygon (a closed object) or a polyline (an open object). To do this, click the right mouse button over the object and choose either Convert - To Polygons or Convert - To Lines.

•	You can break a line, polyline, polygon, curve, arc, or shape at any of its points.

Breaking lines and polygons

You must select at least one point on a line or two non-consecutive points on a polygon. As long as the selected points and the points between them define an area, Freelance Graphics can split the polygon. If you select more than one point, the points you choose must define an area. That is, you cannot choose two adjacent points.

Breaking an object on a new point

To break an object where there are no points, first add points by choosing Edit - Edit Points - Add Point.

Undoing a broken object

To reverse the effects of Edit - Edit Points - Break at Points, choose Edit - Undo.

Breaking an object versus ungrouping an object

The difference between breaking an object apart and ungrouping an object is that Edit - Edit Points - Break at Points splits a single object into two or more objects, while Group - Ungroup separates a grouped object into its component objects.

Connectors, text shapes, and grouped objects

Because you cannot edit the points of connectors, text shapes, or grouped objects, you cannot break these object types.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Organization charts

An organization chart graphically illustrates how people are organized within a department or a business. Freelance Graphics provides several different styles of organization charts. An organization chart is composed of the following parts:

•	One top-level position, such as a CEO, manager, or project or team leader.

•	One staff support position, such as an administrative assistant, who reports to the top entry in the chart.

•	Multiple levels representing the organization.

Creating organization charts

The easiest way to create an organization chart is to use a page layout for an organization chart. You can choose what you want the organization chart to look like, fill in information about each person in the organization, and automatically size the text to fit in the boxes. See Creating an organization chart and Adding entries to an organization chart.

Many content topics include an organization chart. For information about content topics, see Overview: What is a content topic?

Modifying organization charts

Once you have created an organization chart, you can:

•	Add entries. See Adding entries to an organization chart.

•	Add one support staff position that reports to the top entry. See Adding a staff position to an organization chart.

•	Remove entries. See Deleting entries from an organization chart.

•	Change the order of the entries. See Changing the position of entries in an organization chart.

•	Edit the text of entries. See Editing entries in an organization chart.

Changing properties of an organization chart

You can change properties for the whole organization chart or any of its parts. Properties include the color and width of the lines, the background color and pattern in the boxes, and the size and color of text. See Changing properties of an organization chart.


Adding entries to an organization chart

You can update an organization chart by adding entries to it as needed.

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Edit Data or click here [image].

3.	Type entries in the Organization Chart Entry List.

•	To add an entry at the same level, press ENTER.

•	To create a subordinate entry, press TAB to indent the name.

•	To create a superior entry, press SHIFT+TAB to outdent the name.

•	To add a staff position (such as an administrative assistant), choose Edit - Staff from the dialog box menu, then enter the text and click OK. This position reports to the top entry.

•	To force line breaks in the text, move the insertion point between words and press CTRL+ENTER.

4.	Click OK.

Tip	Click Preview to preview the organization chart as you add entries.

 See related topics


Adding a staff position to an organization chart

You can add one support staff position per organization chart. It appears below the top entry box.

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Edit Data or click here [image].

3.	Choose Edit - Staff from the dialog box menu.

4.	Type the entry in the Organization Chart Staff dialog box, then click OK.

5.	Click OK.

Note	The support staff entry is not visible in the Organization Chart Entry List. Click Preview to preview the organization chart as you add entries.

 See related topics


Creating an organization chart

1.	Click the New Page button.

Note	If you are using a content topic, also click the Page Layouts tab.

2.	Select the Organization Chart page layout and click OK.

3.	Click the "Click here..." organization chart block.

4.	Select the style you want for the organization chart, then click OK.

See details

5.	Type the first entry in the Organization Chart Entry List.

6.	Press ENTER to move to a new line, start a new entry, or to skip titles or comments.

7.	Type the remaining entries.

8.	To add a staff position (such as an administrative assistant), choose Edit - Staff from the dialog box menu.

9.	(Optional) Click Preview to preview the organization chart as you are creating it.

10.	Click OK.

Note	You can create an organization chart on any page layout by choosing Create - Organization Chart.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating an organization chart

Style options

•	The organization chart styles shown in the Organization Chart Gallery provide a sample of the style of the boxes. They do not reflect the number of entries permitted in an organization chart.

•	Under "Show lowest level of chart as," select an option.

•	Select "Automatically size entry text" if you want Freelance Graphics to fit the text inside each block. If you select this option, you can still manually resize the text. For information on how to control the size of text in organization charts, see Overview: Sizing text in organization charts.

Working with complex organization charts

When you create a complex organization chart, the text can become quite small. You may want to preview the chart and experiment with style choices to find the layout that works best for your chart. But keep in mind that what appears to be too small onscreen may be quite legible when printed.

Text in organization charts

You cannot change the attributes of text in the Organization Chart Entry List. This window is for editing the content of individual lines of text in each box.

Changing the appearance of organization charts

Use the InfoBox to make changes to an organization chart, such as choosing another chart style or modifying lines or the typeface. See Changing properties of an organization chart.

 Go to procedure


Deleting entries from an organization chart

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Edit Data or click here [image].

3.	To delete an entire entry and its subordinates, click the bullet beside the first line of the entry, then press DEL..

4.	To delete part of an entry (for example, a name or title), drag to select the text you want to delete, then press DEL.

5.	To delete the support staff position, choose Edit - Staff from the Organization Chart Entry List, and click Remove.

6.	Click OK.

Notes

You can delete adjacent entries all at once. Hold down the SHIFT key as you click the bullets. Each bullet you click adds to the selection. Then press DEL to remove all the entries at once.

To delete an empty box, click the bullet next to the first line of the gray prompt text, then press DEL.


Editing entries in an organization chart

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Edit Data or click here [image].

3.	Edit the text.

4.	To edit the support staff entry, choose Edit - Staff from the dialog box menu, edit the text, and click OK.

5.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Editing entries in an organization chart

Editing text directly in a box

You can edit a text entry in a box directly by double-clicking it. Here, you can add, copy, paste, and delete text. You cannot highlight characters and set text attributes. To change text attributes, see Changing properties of an organization chart.

Creating line breaks

You can change the line breaks using the Organization Chart Entry List. To force line breaks in the text, move the insertion point between words and press CTRL+ENTER.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Edit Menu (organization charts)

Cut

Deletes selected text and places it on the Clipboard.

Copy

Copies selected text to the Clipboard without removing the original text from its location.

Paste

Copies text that has been placed on the Clipboard at the insertion point.

Clear

Removes selected text permanently without affecting the contents of the Clipboard.

Promote

Changes the current organization chart entry and its subordinates to a superior level.

Demote

Changes the current organization chart entry and its subordinates to a subordinate level.

Staff

Creates a staff entry reporting to the top position on an organization chart.

Copy Whole Chart

Copies the text entries in the entire organization chart.


Organization Chart Entry List

The Organization Chart Entry List makes it easy to create and modify an organization chart.

Choose a task

Creating an organization chart

Adding entries to an organization chart

Adding a staff position to an organization chart

Deleting entries from an organization chart

Editing entries in an organization chart

Changing the position of entries in an organization chart

Changing the layout of an organization chart

 See related topics


Changing the position of entries in an organization chart

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Edit Data or click here [image].

3.	Click the bullet beside the entry you want to promote or demote. A box appears around the entry.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	To promote the entry, choose Edit - Promote.

•	To demote the entry, choose Edit - Demote.

5.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Changing the position of entries in an org chart
Details: Changing the position of entries in an organization chart

For an alternative to the menu commands in the Organization Chart Entry List:

•	Click the entry you want to promote and press SHIFT+TAB.

•	Click the entry you want to demote and press TAB.

Promoting or demoting multiple entries

In the Organization Chart Entry List, you can select adjacent entries so that you can work with them as a single unit. Select the first item by clicking it; add to the selection by holding down the SHIFT key as you click the bullets. Each bullet you click adds that entry to the selection. Then press TAB or SHIFT+TAB to promote or demote the entire selection.

 Go to procedure


Changing properties of an organization chart

You can change properties of text, boxes, connecting lines, and frames in an organization chart.

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Edit Data or click here [image].

3.	Under Properties for, select what you want to modify.

4.	Click the appropriate tab in the InfoBox to make the changes you want.

5.	Make selections in the InfoBox.

See details

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing properties of an organization chart

What you can change

You can change individual components of an organization chart. These include:

•	Frame

•	Connecting lines

•	Boxes (Current box: <name>; Current box subordinates; Current box peers)

•	Text

Layout

To change the layout of an organization chart after you have created it, click the Layout [image] tab in the organization chart InfoBox and choose a new layout style. If the Layout tab is not visible, choose Organization chart under "Properties for."

Color

•	Under Border, select a style, width, and color for the selected objects.

•	Under Interior, select a pattern and colors for the selected objects.

 Go to procedure


Sizing text in an organization chart

You can let Freelance Graphics size text automatically or control the sizing yourself.

To let Freelance Graphics size the text automatically

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Org Chart Properties or click here [image].

3.	Click the Layout tab in the InfoBox.

Note	If the Layout tab is not visible, choose Organization chart under "Properties for."

4.	Select "Automatically size entry text."

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

To control the text size yourself

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Org Chart Properties or click here [image].

3.	Click the Layout tab in the InfoBox.

Note	If the Layout tab is not visible, choose Organization chart under Properties for.

4.	Deselect "Automatically size entry text."

5.	On the page, click the organization chart box whose text size you want to change and click the Text format tab.

6.	Choose a new text size.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Sizing text in an organization chart

If you do not want a line of text to split, add one or more blank lines after that line in the Organization Chart Entry List. Adding blank lines increases the vertical size of the entry and forces Freelance Graphics to use a smaller text size.

 Go to procedure


Changing the layout of an organization chart

1.	Click the organization chart.

2.	Choose Org Chart - Org Chart Properties or click here [image].

3.	Click the Layout tab in the InfoBox.

Note	If the Layout tab is not visible, choose Organization chart under Properties for.

4.	Under Layout, select the style you want to use.

5.	Under Lowest level, select a style for the bottom level of your entries.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details


Details: Changing the layout of an organization chart

Which style should you choose?

Freelance Graphics offers several different styles for organization charts. Experiment to see which combinations best suit your needs. For example, a laddered list using the automatic sizing feature may be more legible (but use more vertical space) than the row of boxes.

Zooming in and out

If your organization chart is large or complex, the text may become difficult to read, especially onscreen. Choose View - Zoom In from the Freelance Graphics menu in Current Page view to enlarge the boxes and entries. You can choose this command multiple times until the text is the size you want.

Choose View - Zoom Out when you want to see a wider section of the organization chart. Choose View - Zoom to Full Page to return to the original page size. Zoom makes it easier to work with the text on the screen; it does not affect the output such as printing or screen shows.

Selecting the organization chart component you want to change

You can select different components of an organization chart by clicking on the component you want to change. For example, to change the style of a single box in an organization chart, click on the edge of the box, and then choose Org Chart - Org Chart Properties. The Properties for box at the top of the InfoBox displays Current box. Click Properties for to choose a different component. For more information, see Changing properties of an organization chart.

Returning to the Organization Chart Entry List

If you are working in the Layout panel [image] of the InfoBox and want to edit organization chart entries, click the Edit Data button.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Sizing text in organization charts

When you select "Automatically size entry text" in the Organization Chart Gallery dialog box or the Layout panel of the InfoBox, Freelance Graphics changes the size of all the text in the organization chart uniformly to make it fit within the boxes of the organization chart. Freelance Graphics may split lines of text in order to use the largest text size possible. In general, this produces well-composed, legible organization charts.

Occasionally, you may want to turn the automatic sizing option off. For example, you may want to change the text size in just one box, or in all the boxes at one level in the organization chart. By deselecting "Automatically size entry text," you can control the size of the text in individual boxes or in all boxes at the same level. See Sizing text in an organization chart.

When you deselect the automatic sizing option, the text size is recomposed and may overflow the edges of boxes. One way to remedy this is to use an organization chart layout without boxes. See Details: Changing the layout of an organization chart.

Note	You cannot highlight text in the Organization Chart Entry List and change the attributes of highlighted text.


View Menu (organization charts)

These choices affect only the display of the Organization Chart Entry List. They do not affect the appearance of the organization chart itself.

Names Only

Displays just the first line of each entry in the Organization Chart Entry List.

Names and Titles

Displays the first and second lines of each entry in the Organization Chart Entry List.

All

Displays all three lines of each entry in the Organization Chart Entry List.


Adding pages in Outliner view

You can add pages in Outliner view and enter title text and bulleted lists, but you must change to Current Page view to add other elements such as tables, charts, and clip art to the page.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Determine where in the outline you want to add a new page, and click in that text.

3.	Choose Create - Page.

4.	(Optional) Choose a page layout.

•	If you are using a content topic, you can choose from a list of page layouts with or without content.

•	If you are not using a content topic, Freelance Graphics automatically adds a page with a Bulleted List page layout. Click the Page Layout button to choose a different page layout.

.

Notes

If you outdent text that is already at Level 1, you create a new page and the bulleted text becomes the page title.

You can also add pages by copying them from other presentations.

 See related topics


Adding text in Outliner view

You can start working on a presentation in Outliner view, or you can add text to an existing presentation.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	To add text to a blank page, click to the right of a page picture and begin typing.

•	If this is the first page in a presentation, you will probably be creating the title page.

•	If this is the first paragraph on a page, you will be entering text for the title.

3.	To begin a new line of text, press ENTER.

You can continue entering text and creating new pages in Outliner view, or switch to Current Page view to see one page at a time.

 See related topics


Changing text levels in Outliner view

Outliner view can display a title and up to five levels of indented or bulleted text for each page. These correspond to the text levels in text blocks.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Select the text you want to change.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	To indent text one level, press TAB.

•	To outdent text one level, press SHIFT+TAB.

Tip	You can also click the arrows to change the level of text. The level of the current text is displayed between the arrow icons.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing text levels in Outliner view

Changing text levels

You can click these arrows to change text levels.

Each time you click an arrow, the selected text moves to the next level. The bar between the arrows indicates the current level for the text, for example, Title text or Level 1.

•	The left arrow outdents text one level (moves text one level to the left). This changes the text level, for example, from Level 2 to Level 1. If you outdent text that is already at Level 1, you create a new page and the bulleted text becomes the page title.

•	The right arrow indents text one level (moves text one level to the right). This changes the text level, for example, from Level 2 to Level 3.

Note	Changing the text level often changes the style of the bullet and the text.

You can see the effects of changing the levels of indentation by looking at the page samples in Outliner view or by clicking the Current Page tab to display the page in Current Page view.

How many levels of indentation?

In Freelance Graphics, you can have up to five levels of indented and bulleted text for each page, in addition to the page title. The levels of indentation in Outliner view correspond to the text levels for any text block.

 Go to procedure


Changing page layouts in Outliner view

You can change page layouts and work with text in Outliner view. However, to add elements such as a chart, a table, or clip art, click the Current Page tab to work in Current Page view.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Select the page you want to change.

3.	Click the Page Layout button.

4.	Select a page layout.

5.	Click OK.

Notes

To change a 1-column bulleted list to a 2-column bulleted list in Outliner view, you can use the following icon. The current paragraph becomes the first paragraph in the second column.

In Outliner view, Freelance Graphics displays the following symbols next to text to indicate that you are using a page that contains a 2-column bulleted list.

 See related topics


Expanding and collapsing text in Outliner view

You can collapse the entire Outliner view to display just your page titles or you can collapse the selected page.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Click one of these icons in Outliner view:

•	To expand or collapse text in the entire view, click the first or second icon.

•	To expand or collapse text in the current page, click the third or fourth icon.

When you collapse a page, Freelance Graphics displays a plus sign (+) next to the page number, and displays only the page title.


Overview: Icon shortcuts in Outliner view

You can use these icons in Outliner view to complete common tasks quickly.

Click:	To:
	Show or hide pictures of pages.
	Change the size of page pictures.
	Display formatted or unformatted text.
	(1) Expand or (2) collapse the text in the entire view, or (3) expand or (4) collapse the text in the current page.
	Outdent or indent text to five levels in a bulleted list.
	Change a 1-Column bulleted list to a 2-Column bulleted list.
	Create or edit speaker notes.


Copying an outline from Word Pro

You can paste text from a Word Pro outline directly into Outliner view.

1.	Open both your Freelance Graphics and Word Pro files.

2.	In a Word Pro outline, select the paragraphs you want to copy.

3.	Choose Edit - Copy.

4.	In Freelance Graphics, click the Outliner tab.

5.	Move to the page to which you want to add the text.

6.	Choose Edit - Paste.

The top level in a Word Pro outline creates a new page in Outliner view. The next level in the outline creates a bulleted list of up to 5 levels.

 See related topics


Importing ASCII text in Outliner view

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Move to the page where you want to import text or pages or press ENTER to start a new line.

3.	Choose File - Open.

4.	Under Files of type, select ASCII Text (TXT).

5.	Under Look in, select the folder (directory) containing the file you want.

6.	Select the file you want to import in the File box.

7.	Click Open.

When you import an ASCII file into Outliner view, Freelance Graphics creates the pages and text entries based on the leading tabs in the ASCII file.

•	Text that is not indented creates a new page and becomes the page title.

•	If all text is indented the same amount, all lines are imported as Level 1 paragraphs.

•	Text with leading tabs becomes bulleted text which may be indented up to five levels, depending on the number of leading tabs.

 See related topics


Overview: Keyboard shortcuts in Outliner view

You can use the following keys to work in Outliner view.

Press:	To:
ENTER	Start a new paragraph.
CTRL+ENTER	Create a line break in the same paragraph.
Gray +	Expand the selected page(s) to display titles and text.
Gray -	Display only the title text for selected page(s).
SHIFT+TAB	Outdent a paragraph one level to the left. If the paragraph is already at Level 1, creates a new page.
TAB	Indent a paragraph one level to the right.
Press:	To move:
END	To the end of the current line.
HOME	To the beginning of the current line.
CTRL+HOME	To the beginning of the outline.
CTRL+END	To the end of the outline.
PAGE UP	Up one screen.
PAGE DOWN	Down one screen.
↑	Up one line.
↓	Down one line.
←	Left one character.
→	Right one character.
CTRL + ←	Left one word.
CTRL + →	Right one word.
CTRL+PAGE UP	To the beginning of the preceding page.
CTRL+PAGE DOWN	To the beginning of the next page.


Rearranging text in Outliner view

You can move bulleted text one line at a time or you can move several lines of adjacent text to a new location in Outliner view.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Select the paragraph you want to move.

3.	Drag the bullet to a new location.

As you drag the bullet, Freelance Graphics displays a short, thick line to indicate where the text will go when you release the mouse button.

4.	Release the mouse button to move the text to the new location.


Pasting text in Outliner view

You can paste text into Outliner view from another presentation file or from other Windows applications.

1.	Open both applications and files.

2.	Select the text you want to copy.

3.	Choose Edit - Copy.

4.	In Freelance Graphics, click the Outliner tab (if you are not already in Outliner view).

5.	Move to the page to which you want to add the text.

6.	Choose Edit - Paste.

 See details


Details: Pasting text in Outliner view

For a single line of text

If you copied a single line of text, Freelance Graphics pastes the text at the insertion point. If you highlighted text in Outliner view, Freelance Graphics replaces the highlighted text with the pasted text.

For multiple lines of text

•	If you copied text from a Word Pro outline document, Freelance Graphics uses the outline levels from that text but does not maintain indentation for tabs.

•	If you copied text from another Windows application, Freelance Graphics attempts to maintain the line breaks and indent levels in effect when you cut or copied the text.

 Go to procedure


Rearranging pages in Outliner view

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Select one or more pages.

3.	Drag the page pictures or the page icons to a new location.

As you drag the pages, Freelance Graphics displays a short, thick line to indicate where the pages will go when you release the mouse button.

4.	Release the mouse button to move the pages to the new location.

Freelance Graphics inserts the pages in the new location and automatically renumbers the pages in Outliner view.

 See related topics


Overview: Selecting text and pages in Outliner view

You can select lines of adjacent text or pages when you are working in Outliner view.

To select:	Do this:
Text within a line	Drag the mouse across the text to highlight it.
One paragraph	Click the bullet.
Several paragraphs	Move the mouse pointer to the red margin line and drag a box around the paragraph you want to select.
One page	Click the page picture.
Several consecutive pages	Press SHIFT and click each page picture.
To deselect:	Do this:
Pages or text	Click anywhere in Outliner view other than on a page icon.


Overview: Working with text in Outliner view

When you click the Outliner tab, Freelance Graphics displays text in titles, subtitles, and bulleted lists from your presentation in outline format. Outliner view displays text from several pages at a time, so you can see how your ideas flow in your presentation.

You can also see a picture of each page including text, graphics, tables, and charts. As you add text to a page, the page picture also is updated so you can actually see how your presentation looks as you work on it.

 Example: Outliner view

Note	When you want to view or add other elements to the page, such as a chart, table, clip art, or organization chart, you can double-click the sample page to display that page in Current Page view.

Although Outliner view displays only the text from page titles, subtitles, and bulleted lists, you can quickly see other kinds of text in your presentation by clicking a tab to switch between Outliner view and other views in Freelance Graphics.

Formatting text in Outliner view

You can use the InfoBox to format text in Outliner view and use the following button to toggle between displaying formatted and unformatted text.

Outliner view can display different fonts with the following formatting: emphasis such as bold, italics, underlining, strikethrough, superscript, and subscript. However, if you want to see all formatted text,  change to Current Page view. When you deselect View - Show Text Attributes, Outliner view displays all text in the same font and without emphasis.

 See related topics


Showing or hiding pictures of pages

By default, Freelance Graphics displays small pictures of each presentation page in Outliner view. If you hide these pictures, you will see page icons that represent different types of page layouts.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Choose View - Show Pictures of Pages to show or hide the pictures.

 or

3.	(Optional) Choose View - Page Size to change the size of these pictures.

If you hide these pictures, Outliner view displays the following page icons to indicate that a page contains just text or objects other than text, such as a chart, clip art, or an organization chart.

This icon:	Means the page contains:
	No illustrations,                       only text
	Clip art, diagram,                     drawings, or a bitmap
	Chart
	Organization chart
	Table


Displaying unformatted or formatted text in Outliner view

Outliner view can display different fonts with the following formatting: emphasis such as bold, italics, underlining, strikethrough, superscript, and subscript. You can also display all text in the same font and without emphasis.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Choose View - Show Text Attributes to display unformatted text or to display simple formatting.

Note	To display all text in the same font without emphasis, choose View - Show Text Attributes again to de select this choice.

Tip	To see all formatted text, change to Current Page view.


Overview: Page layouts

Each SmartMaster look has 12 standard page layouts and one blank layout. The same names (such as Title, Bulleted List, Organization Chart) are used for the page layouts in each look. This uniform design means that you can switch to another look to change the overall design of your presentation without changing its content or basic structure.

For example, all looks have a page layout named Bulleted List. When you switch looks, the bulleted list text you entered remains the same, but assumes the format and location specified in the new look.

Each look contains the following page layouts:

•	Title

•	Bulleted List

•	2-Column Bullets

•	1 Chart

•	2 Charts

•	4 Charts

•	Bullets & Chart

•	Bullets & Clip Art

•	Organization Chart

•	Table

•	Diagram

•	Basic Layout (a page with just a "Click here..." title block)

•	[Blank Page]

All of the page layouts in a look have the same graphic style to ensure consistency among pages in a presentation. For information about each page layout, see Details: Changing a page layout.

Page layouts and "Click here..." blocks

Each page layout, except [Blank Page], contains "Click here..." blocks in which you can add text, data charts, organization charts, tables, diagrams, and clip art.

When you add text to a "Click here..." text block, the text assumes the properties defined for the "Click here..." text block, including the typeface, size, color, and bullets. When you add a data chart, organization chart, table, diagram, or clip art to a "Click here..." block, its size and position is determined by that block.

For information on page layouts and how they work with SmartMaster looks, see Overview: What is a SmartMaster?


Adding pages in Current Page view

Freelance Graphics adds a new page immediately after the current page.

 Show me a demo

1.	Click the New Page button.

2.	Select a content page, or click the Page Layouts tab and select a page layout.

Note	If you are not using a content topic, select a page layout.

3.	Click OK.

Tip	If you are using a content topic, you can click Choose Multiple Content Pages to add more than one page at once.

 See related topics


Adding pages in Page Sorter view

Freelance Graphics adds a new page immediately after the current page. This new page becomes the current page.

1.	Choose Create - Page or click here [image].

2.	Select a content page, or click the Page Layouts tab and select a page layout.

Note	If you are not using a content topic, select a page layout.

3.	Click OK.

Tip	If you are using a content topic, you can click Choose Multiple Content Pages to add more than one page at once.

 See related topics


Changing a page layout

1.	Click the Page Layout button in the status bar.

2.	Select a page layout.

See details

You see a sample of the page layout when you highlight its name.

3.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing a page layout

Guide to page layouts

Use the following table as a guide to choosing the page layout that works best for the type of visual you want.

Visual:	Benefits:	Page layouts:
Bulleted lists	Ideal format for presenting a list of points or topics. Concise and easy-to-read, lists can help lead you and your audience through a presentation.	Bulleted List 2-Column Bullets Bullets & Chart Bullets & Clip Art
Tables	Organize textual and/or numerical information into rows and columns for clarity and simplicity. Help your audience compare and contrast alternatives.	Table
Charts	Increase the power of your message by presenting raw data in an appealing, easy-to-grasp format.	1 Chart 2 Charts 4 Charts Bullets & Chart
Diagrams,  symbols, and other graphics	Illustrate complex concepts that are often difficult to explain. Improve the appearance of your presentation by adding appealing visual effects.	Bullets & Clip Art Organization Chart Diagram Basic Layout [Blank Page]
Verifying which page layout a page uses

To see which page layout the current page uses, click the Page Layout button at the bottom of the window. The name of the current page layout is highlighted.

Changing multiple pages to the same page layout

You can assign the same page layout to multiple pages at once in Page Sorter view. Select the pages you want to change, click the Page Layout button, and choose the new page layout.

 Go to procedure


Copying pages

Copying pages in Current Page view

1.	Click a blank area of the page.

2.	Choose Page - Duplicate Page.

Copying pages in Page Sorter view

1.	Click the Page Sorter tab.

2.	Select the page(s) you want to copy.

3.	Choose Edit - Copy.

4.	Go to where you want to put the page(s) and choose Edit - Paste.

Tip	If you do not want to overwrite the contents of the Clipboard, you can choose Page - Duplicate Page.

Note	Freelance Graphics places duplicate pages after original pages. In Current Page view, the duplicate page becomes the current page and in Page Sorter view, the duplicate of the first page selected becomes the current page and all duplicate pages are selected.

 See related topics


Displaying the printable area of a page

1.	Click the Current Page tab.

2.	Choose View - Set View Preferences.

3.	Under Show page borders, select Printable area.

4.	Click OK.

Note	The printable area--anything inside the dashed lines--is what Freelance Graphics prints when you send a page to your output device. The printable area depends on which output devices you specify in Windows.


Renaming pages

In Current Page view

1.	Click a blank area of the page.

2.	Choose Page - Page Properties.

3.	Under Page name, edit the text to change the name of the page.

4.	Press ENTER.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

In Page Sorter view and Outliner view

1.	Click the page.

2.	Choose Page - Page Properties.

3.	Under Page name, edit the text to change the name of the page.

4.	Press ENTER.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details


Details: Renaming pages

How Freelance Graphics uses and assigns page names

When you click the Page Number box at the bottom of the window, Freelance Graphics displays the names of the pages in your presentation. These names, which make it easier to identify the pages, are given as follows:

•	If there is a title in the title block, Freelance Graphics displays this name.

•	If you edited or typed a new name in the Page panel of the InfoBox, Freelance Graphics displays this name. (The pages in content topics have been named this way.)

•	If neither of these things is true, Freelance Graphics displays the word Unnamed.

Freelance Graphics also uses these names in Page Sorter view, Outliner view, the Go To Page dialog box, the Preview Pages dialog box, and the List Pages dialog box.

 Go to procedure


Copying pages from another Freelance Graphics presentation

1.	Choose File - Copy Pages from Other Files or click here [image].

2.	Do one of the following:

•	If you are copying pages from another Freelance Graphics presentation for the first time, select the file you want to browse and click Open.

•	If you have already copied pages from another Freelance Graphics presentation during this session but you would like to use a different one, click File, select the file you want to browse, then click Open.

3.	Select the page(s) you want to copy.  See details

Tip	For a close-up of any page, click it and then click Preview Page. Click OK to return to the dialog box.

4.	Click Add.

5.	Select the location for the new page(s) and click OK.

6.	Click Close.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Copying pages from another Freelance Graphics presentation

You can select pages a number of ways:

•	Click the thumbnail sketch of the page.

•	Click the check box below the thumbnail sketch.

•	To select all the pages at once, click Select all pages.

Three pages display at a time. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see any other pages in the presentation you are browsing.

Dragging pages into a presentation

You can also drag pages into your current presentation. When you drag a page into your presentation, that page becomes the current page. If you drag a collection of pages, the first page in the collection becomes the current page, and the other pages in the collection are placed behind it in sequence.

If you drag pages into a presentation when it is in Page Sorter view or Outliner view, a gray bar appears which you use to position the pages.

Copying pages with speaker notes

If a page has a speaker note, the speaker note icon displays below the page.

Note	When you copy pages into a presentation, the copied pages use the SmartMaster look of the presentation into which you copy them.

 Go to procedure


Deleting pages

A presentation must have at least one page in it.

In Current Page view

Choose Page - Delete Page.

In Page Sorter view

1.	Click the Page Sorter tab.

2.	Select the page(s) you want to delete.

3.	Choose Edit - Cut.

In Outliner view

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Select the page(s) you want to delete.

3.	Choose Edit - Cut.

Notes

If you use Edit - Cut to delete a page, the page is copied to the Clipboard. Choose Edit - Paste to restore a deleted page.

If you use the DELETE key, Edit - Clear, or Page - Delete Page, the page is not copied to the Clipboard. You can use Edit - Undo to restore the page if you have not executed any other commands in the meantime.


Selecting and deselecting pages in Page Sorter view

You must select pages before you can work with them. Selected pages in Page Sorter view display with an outline around them.

Selecting one or more pages

1.	Click the Page Sorter tab.

2.	Click a page to select it.

3.	To select additional pages, hold down the SHIFT key and click each page.

Note	To select adjacent pages, drag a box around the pages.

Selecting all pages

1.	Click the Page Sorter tab.

2.	Choose Edit - Select - All.

Deselecting pages when two or more pages are selected

Hold down the SHIFT key and click each page you want to deselect.

Deselecting all pages

To deselect all selected pages, choose Edit - Select - None.

 See related topics


Moving to different pages in a presentation

Click the Page Number box and select the page you want to move to.

Tips

In any view, choose Page - Go to Page, select the page you want to go to from the list of page titles in the dialog box, then click OK.

In Page Sorter view, click the thumbnail sketch of the page you want to go to.

In Outliner view, use the scroll bars to move up or down the outline, then click the icon or thumbnail sketch to the left of the text to move to that page.


Rearranging pages in Page Sorter view

 Show me a demo

1.	Click the Page Sorter tab.

2.	Click the page you want to move.

Tip	To select additional pages, press SHIFT as you click them.

3.	Drag the page to a new position.

Tip	To create a copy of the page, press CTRL as you drag the page.

As you drag, you see a dotted outline of the selected page(s). A vertical insert bar shows where the page(s) will be placed once you release the mouse. If you selected and moved multiple or non-contiguous pages, they form a group of adjacent pages.

Tip	To select adjacent pages, you can drag a box around them.

 See related topics


Redrawing the page

To redraw the page or screen, choose View - Redraw.

Note	You cannot redraw in Outliner view.

Stopping the page from redrawing

To halt Freelance Graphics from redrawing, press ESC.

 See details


Details: Redrawing the page

When you are working on a page that has a complex image, the time required to redraw the screen can be lengthy. For example, if you are editing a single object on a screen with several complex pieces, Freelance Graphics redraws portions of the screen each time you complete an edit.

To save time, you can stop Freelance Graphics from redrawing by pressing ESC. This action does not delete objects. To complete redrawing, choose View - Redraw.

 Go to procedure


Viewing multiple pages in a presentation

1.	Click the Page Sorter tab.

2.	If your presentation has more pages than fit in the window, do one of the following:

•	Choose View - Zoom Out to shrink the thumbnail sketches so that more pages fit on the screen.

•	Use the scroll bar to scroll through the pages.

Notes

You can zoom out a maximum of three times.

Choose View - Zoom In to enlarge the thumbnail sketches.

 See related topics


Zooming in and out

Zoom commands are available on the View menu in Current Page and Page Sorter views.

1.	Choose View - Zoom In.

2.	Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to see different parts of the screen.

3.	To zoom out, choose View - Zoom Out.

Note	You can zoom in a maximum of seven times.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Zooming in and out

Choose this...	To do this:
View - Zoom In	Enlarge the center portion of the current page to fill the window
View - Zoom Out	Reduce the current page to see the area beyond it, or to reverse the previous zoom in
View - Last Zoom	Return to the previous zoom in or zoom out
View - Zoom to Full Page	Restore the current page to its standard size
View - Zoom to Actual Size	See the size the page will be when it prints out
 Go to procedure


Overview: Printing

You can print your presentation:

•	With one or more pages on each printed page. See Printing a presentation.

•	As an outline. See Printing an outline of your presentation.

•	Along with your speaker notes, or with one full presentation page on each sheet of paper. See Printing training or reference materials and Printing speaker notes for a formal presentation.

•	With blank lines to allow room for note taking. See Printing materials for meetings.

•	With a border. See Printing a border around pages.

•	To a file. See Printing to a file.

Print options

Freelance Graphics lets you:

•	Select a printer. See Selecting a printer.

•	Select printer properties. See Selecting printer properties.

•	Add headers and/or footers to your printed pages. See Adding headers and footers to pages.

•	Select one page, all pages, or a range of pages, such as pages one through ten, or non-contiguous pages, such as pages two, seven, and eleven, to print.  See Selecting pages to print.

•	Preview your work to see your presentation pages, including the headers and footers. See Previewing a presentation.

•	Collate the pages you print. See Collating copies when printing.

•	Enhance your printed output by choosing an alternate output library. See Enhancing printed output.

•	Print your presentation pages vertically or horizontally. See Printing pages vertically or horizontally.

•	Print without the SmartMaster look background, to save printing time. See Printing without the SmartMaster look background.

•	See how your presentation will look in black and white. See Switching a presentation between color and black and white.


Print dialog box

Use the Print dialog box to control how you print your presentation.

Choose a topic

Overview: Printing

Printing a presentation

Selecting a printer

Selecting pages to print

Printing an outline of your presentation

Collating copies when printing

Previewing a presentation

Printing a border around pages

Creating 35mm slides

Selecting printer properties

Adding headers and footers to pages


Printing a border around pages

You can print a border around pages with handouts, speaker notes, and audience notes.

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Under Print, select Handouts, Speaker notes, or Audience notes.

3.	Under Print, select "Print with border."

4.	Under Print, click Border Styles.

5.	Select the style of page border you want to print, then click OK to return to the Print dialog box.

6.	Click Print.


Collating copies when printing

Collating lets you print more than one copy of your presentation with pages in each copy in the correct order.

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Under Copies, specify the number of copies you want to print.

3.	Under Copies, select "Collate."

4.	Click Print.

Note	If you are printing more than one copy and "Collate" is selected, copies are collated when printed. If you deselect this setting, Freelance Graphics prints all the page 1's from the copies you are printing, then all page 2's, and so forth.


Enhancing printed output

When you print a presentation to certain printers, the printed version may not precisely match the colors or shades of gray displayed onscreen. Use this procedure to see if you get better results.

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Click Options.

3.	Make sure that "Adjust output library for printing" is selected.

See details.

4.	Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.

5.	Click Print.

 See details


Details: Enhancing printed output

What does the "Adjust output library for printing" setting do?

To ensure the best possible printed output, Freelance Graphics automatically prints using alternate output libraries designed specifically for the following output devices:

•	Canon BubbleJet BJC-800

•	HP Color® LaserJet®

•	HP DeskJet® 500C

•	HP DeskJet 550C

•	HP DeskJet 560C

•	HP DeskJet 1200C

•	HP PaintJet® XL

•	HP PaintJet XL300

•	IBM Color Jetprinter PS 4079

•	Kodak Colorese PS Printer

•	NEC® Super-VGA Screen

•	QMS® ColorScript 100 Model 10

•	QMS ColorScript 100 Model 30

•	QMS ColorScript 230

•	Seiko ColorPoint PS

•	Tektronix Phaser II SDX

•	Tektronix Phaser II 200i

•	Xerox® 5775 Digital Color Copier

Freelance Graphics automatically uses a default color PostScript output library for output devices that do not appear on this list.

Why turn off this setting?

While this setting is on by default, there may be times when you want to deselect "Adjust output library for printing."  For example, you might do this when:

•	You prefer the way your presentation prints when this setting is turned off.

•	You are creating 35mm slides.  In this case, Freelance Graphics turns off this setting automatically. See Creating 35mm slides.

•	You edited a color library to produce custom colors for a particular output device.

•	Freelance Graphics does not offer an alternate output library for your particular device and you want to adjust the colors yourself.

 Go to procedure


Printing graduated fill patterns

Use this procedure if your printer runs out of memory or you want to quickly print your presentation.

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Click Options.

3.	Select "Print graduated fills as solid."

4.	Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.

5.	Click Print.

Note	Since graduated fill patterns are complex graphical objects, some output devices do not have enough memory to print them. Printing graduated fill patterns as solids will allow you to print, even though the results may not be as good.

You can also use this procedure to quickly print your presentation if it includes objects with graduated fill patterns.


Adding headers and footers to pages

Headers and footers can include text, the current date and time, page numbers, and the file name. Headers and footers appear when you preview or print the presentation; they do not display on the screen or during a screen show.

1.	Choose File - Page Setup.

2.	Type up to two lines of text for each left-, center-, and right-justified header and/or footer. Press ENTER to wrap the text and begin a second line.

3.	To enter the page, file name, date, or time, click in a header or footer box and then click the appropriate button.

4.	(Optional) Click Format to select a date and/or time format. Then click OK to return to the Page Setup dialog box.

5.	Click OK.

Note	When you click the Page, File name, Date, or Time buttons, the presentation does not display the actual page, file name, date, or time in the Page Setup dialog box. This information displays in the header or footer when you print your presentation.

 See details


Details: Adding headers and footers to pages

Adding text for headers and footers

To have one continuous line of header or footer text across the page, type all the text for the header or footer in one of the header or footer boxes. The paper size determines how long the header or footer can be. If you are printing two or more presentation pages on a page, the page borders also affect how long the header or footer can be.

To have header or footer text print left-, right-, or center-justified, type the text in the appropriate box.

If you add header or footer text to more than one of the boxes, use File - Print Preview to check that none of the header or footer text overlaps on the page.

If you see overlapping text, this means you have typed too much text in one of the header or footer boxes. To fix this, reduce the number of characters in the headers or footers, or force the text in the boxes to wrap to two lines by pressing ENTER.

Date and time formats

Freelance Graphics offers a selection of standard international date and time formats.

Format of page numbers in headers and footers

You can have a simple page number (1, 2, and so forth) in your headers and footers.

Page numbering

The [Page] button inserts sequential page numbers on your printed pages, starting with page one. You can also begin page numbering with a number other than one.  For example, to begin page numbering with page 25, in one of the header or footer boxes, click the [Page] button and type #25, as follows:

[PAGE]#25

Typefaces in headers and footers

You can choose one font to use for the headers and footers in a presentation; the default font is Arial. Freelance Graphics prints the font you choose in 10 point type.

 Go to procedure


Switching a presentation between color and black and white

You can display a color presentation in black, white, and shades of gray to see how it will look when printed on a black-and-white device.

1.	Click the Current Page tab.

2.	Click the Color/B&W button in the status bar.

3.	Click the Color/B&W button again to redisplay your presentation in color.

Tip	You can also choose View - Show in Color to switch between displaying your presentation in color or black and white.


Printing materials for meetings

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	To print multiple presentation pages on a sheet of paper, under Print, select "Handouts" and the number of pages on each sheet.

3.	To print blank lines under the presentation pages, under Print, select "Audience notes" and the number of pages on each sheet.

4.	Select what you want to print.

5.	(Optional) Select a border style to print. See Printing a border around pages.

6.	Click Print.

 See details


Details: Printing materials for meetings

Support materials can keep your meetings focused.

•	Printing your presentation pages with blank lines gives participants room to take notes.

•	Printing one or more presentation pages on a sheet of paper lets you distribute these pages to meeting participants, or to individuals who are unable to attend the meeting.

 Go to procedure


Printing without the SmartMaster look background

You can print a presentation's text and graphics without its background design. You can do this to reduce the printing time when you just need to review the presentation's content.

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Click Options.

3.	Select "Print with blank background (no look)."

4.	Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.

5.	Click Print.


Options dialog box

You can specify options for printing.

Choose a task

Enhancing printed output

Printing graduated fill patterns

Printing without the SmartMaster look background


Printing an outline of your presentation

You must be in Outliner view to print an outline of your presentation.

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

3.	Under Print, select Outline.

4.	(Optional) Select other print options you want.

5.	Click Print.

Notes

To print other types of pages from Outliner view, select that option in step 3.

The outline prints in a default font, not necessarily the font used in your presentation. Certain text attributes, such as underlined text, and any thumbnail sketches of your presentation pages displayed in Outliner view, will not print.


Page Setup dialog box

Use the Page Setup dialog box to set up headers and footers and to change the page orientation for your presentation.

Choose a task

Printing pages vertically or horizontally

Adding headers and footers to pages


Selecting pages to print

You can select the current page, one page, all pages, or a range of ranges to print.

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Under Pages, select the pages you want to print.

3.	Click Print.

Note	In Page Sorter view, you can also select non-contiguous pages in a presentation, such as pages two, seven, and eleven, to print. See details.

 See details


Details: Selecting pages to print

In Page Sorter view, you can select non-contiguous pages to print. Click the Page Sorter tab. Then press SHIFT, and at the same time click one or more pages to select them. Choose File - Print. To print the selected pages, under Pages select "Pages selected in sorter" and click Print.

 Go to procedure


Printing pages vertically or horizontally

You can choose whether to print all the pages in your presentation vertically (portrait) or horizontally (landscape).

1.	Choose File - Page Setup.

2.	Under Orientation, select Portrait or Landscape.

3.	Click OK.

Note	Most SmartMaster looks are designed to print horizontally, and a few are designed to print vertically. To get the best results for your presentation, choose a SmartMaster look with the page orientation you want. This way, you will not need to change the page orientation.


Printing to a file

1.	In Windows, choose Start - Settings - Printers.

2.	Click the current printer to select it and choose File - Properties.

3.	Click the Details tab.

4.	Under Print to the following port, select "FILE: (Creates a file on disk.)" and click OK.

5.	In Freelance Graphics, choose File - Print.

6.	Under Where, make sure that FILE: is the specified port for your printer and click Print.

7.	In the Print to File dialog box, type the name of the file in "File name."

8.	In "Save file as type," select the file type you want (Printer files).

9.	To specify the path, click the folder (directory) you want to save the file to.

10.	Click OK to print to the file and return to Freelance Graphics.

 See details


Details: Printing to a file

Why print to a file?

Sometimes, you may need to print to a file rather than to a printer or other output device. For example, you may be working at home and not have the same printer as at the office, or your computer may not be connected to the printer you want to use. You may also want to produce a file to give to a slide service to produce transparencies or other output media for your presentation.

Getting printed output

Once you have printed to a file, you can use the Windows Explorer to drag the file to a printer.

 Go to procedure


Printing a presentation

You can print the current page, a range of pages, or your entire presentation.

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Select what you want to print.

3.	Click Print.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Printing a presentation

Seeing how your printed presentation will look

You can preview your presentation pages to see how they will appear when printed. See Previewing a presentation.

Making sure the contents of your pages print

You can set Freelance Graphics to delineate the suggested area to keep your work within the page. This is useful if you change output devices frequently and you want to ensure that your work continues to fit on the printed page. Choose View - Set View Preferences, and under Show page borders select "Recommended drawing area."

 Go to procedure


Printing one presentation page per sheet of paper

You can print a full presentation page on each sheet of paper to use as presentation handouts or to distribute at meetings.

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Under Print, select "Full page."

3.	Select what you want to print.

4.	Click Print.

Note	You cannot add a border to pages when you print a full presentation page on each sheet of paper.


Previewing a presentation

You can preview the pages in your presentation to see how your printed pages will look before you print them.

1.	Choose File - Print Preview.

2.	Select where to start previewing.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Click Next or Previous to preview other pages in the presentation.

5.	When you are done, do one of the following:

•	Click Print to display the Print dialog box and print your presentation.

•	Click Quit to quit preview and return to your presentation.

•	Press ESC to display a list of presentation pages. You can choose another page to preview or click Quit Preview to return to your presentation.

 See details


Details: Previewing a presentation

Previewing shows how your presentation will appear when printed. Regardless of what you chose to print in the Print dialog box-- such as handouts with two pages on each sheet of paper--previewing displays one full presentation page at a time. It displays each presentation page, including headers and footers, exactly as it will print. (Any white areas at the edges of the page indicate the area that the printer cannot print.)

Previewing shows your presentation pages in color or black and white, depending on whether you have a color or black-and-white printer.

 Go to procedure


Selecting printer properties

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Click Properties.

3.	Select the properties you want for the current printer.

4.	Click OK to close the Properties dialog box for the current printer.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Click Print to accept the changes you made and print the presentation.

•	Click Close to accept the changes you made and close the Print dialog box without printing the presentation.

Note	The Properties dialog box is for the current printer only and is controlled by Windows.


Selecting a printer

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Under Print to, select the printer you want to use.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Click Print to print the presentation to the new printer.

•	Click Close to accept the new printer and close the Print dialog box without printing the presentation.

 See details


Details: Selecting a printer

Setting up the selected device

In the Print dialog box, click Properties to display a dialog box that lets you set up the selected output device. See Selecting printer properties.

List of printers

In the Print dialog box, all installed output devices are listed under Print to, including slide drivers. In addition, Freelance Graphics includes a screen show choice at the bottom of the list. This choice is not recommended for general use. Select it only if you are designing a screen show that needs to make full use of the screen. See Making more screen space available for screen show.

What happens to presentation pages when you change output devices?

When you choose another output device, or open a file that was saved with a different device, Freelance Graphics checks if all objects that printed on the previous device will print within the printable page of the new device.

If all objects print, no changes are made to the objects on the page.

If any objects on the page will not print on the new device, Freelance Graphics displays a message that gives you the option to:

•	Not modify anything. As a result, the objects in question may not print completely.

•	Fit the objects on the page by scaling down everything on the presentation page the amount necessary to print the objects in question.

Click OK to accept the default and not modify anything. This means that objects that fall outside of the printable area will not print completely.

Notes

If, at some point, you choose "Screen Show" under Print to and later choose a printer to print your presentation, Freelance Graphics may display this message. In this case, always select "Do not modify" when you see this message.

If you choose not to modify anything, you can manually move the objects that fall outside the printable page closer into the page so that they will print. See Moving objects by dragging.

Scaling objects to fall within the printable page permanently scales them. In other words, the objects do not return to their original positions if you print to the original output device again.

 Go to procedure


Printing speaker notes for a formal presentation

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Under Print, select "Speaker notes" and the number of pages on each sheet.

3.	(Optional) Select a border style to print. See Printing a border around pages.

4.	Select what you want to print.

5.	Click Print.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Printing speaker notes for a formal presentation

Using speaker notes for a formal presentation

You can print notes alongside your presentation pages to use when you deliver a presentation. Speaker notes let you jot down points you want to make for each page in your presentation.

If your speaker notes are not large enough to read when delivering your presentation, you can make the font size larger than the default 20 point size or you can change the default point size. See Changing attributes for speaker note text and bullets and Changing default attributes for all speaker note text and bullets.

When speaker notes are too long for the printing area

When there is more text in your speaker notes than will fit on the printed page, Freelance Graphics gives you three scaling options. You can:

•	Scale all speaker notes uniformly to fit the page.

•	Scale oversized speaker notes only (which scales each oversized speaker note just enough to fit on the page).

•	Not scale any speaker note text.

Click Print to continue printing your presentation.

 Go to procedure


Printing training or reference materials

1.	Choose File - Print or click here [image].

2.	Do one of the following:

•	To print one presentation page on a sheet of paper, under Print, select "Full page."

•	To print multiple presentation pages and your speaker notes on each sheet of paper, under Print, select "Speaker notes" and the number of pages on each sheet.

•	To print blank lines under the presentation pages, under Print, select "Audience notes" and the number of pages on each sheet.

3.	Select what you want to print.

4.	(Optional) If you are printing speaker notes or audience notes, select a border style to print. See Printing a border around pages.

5.	Click Print.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Printing training or reference materials

You can use Freelance Graphics to produce training or reference materials.

•	Printing one presentation page on a sheet of paper lets you provide all the details in the text of the actual presentation.

•	Printing your presentation pages with speaker notes lets you provide information that elaborates on the points made in the presentation. This additional information is useful for individuals who might not be present when the presentation is delivered.

Printing speaker notes

To allow more room for you to add text to your speaker notes, you can make the font size smaller for speaker notes than the default 20 point size or you can change the default point size. See Changing attributes for speaker note text and bullets and Changing default attributes for all speaker note text and bullets.

You can also make the text in the Speaker Note dialog box larger while you work. See Zooming in or out of speaker notes.

When speaker notes are too long for the printing area

When there is more text in your speaker notes than will fit on the printed page, Freelance Graphics gives you three scaling options. You can:

•	Scale all speaker notes uniformly to fit the page.

•	Scale oversized speaker notes only (which scales each oversized speaker note just enough to fit on the page).

•	Not scale any speaker note text.

Click Print to continue printing your presentation.

 Go to procedure


Overview: The InfoBox tabs

Each tab represents a group of settings for a selected object.

The tab	Tab name
	Alignment
	Basics
	Bullets
	Columns and rows
	Image
	Color, pattern, and line style
	Named styles
	Offset
	Organization chart layout
	Page layout
	Screen Show
	Table layout
	Font, attribute, and color
 See related topics


Changing properties

1.	Select what you want to change.

2.	Open the InfoBox.

3.	Change a setting on one or more tabs.

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Tip	Many objects have an associated icon you can click to open the InfoBox. Look for the following symbol to identify icons that open the InfoBox for the selected object.

 See related topics


Overview: Properties and the InfoBox

Properties are characteristics of an object that determine how the object appears in a presentation or a screen show. The property can be a color, the width of a line, a font name, the shape of a bullet, or a special effect that is visible only during a screen show. Each object in Freelance Graphics has a set of properties associated with it.

You use the InfoBox to change the properties of a selected object or any of its parts, for example, text, clip art, a table, selected cells in a table, and so on. Each panel of the InfoBox, identified by a different tab, displays a group of settings you can change for the object(s) you selected.

Opening the InfoBox

You can open the InfoBox by:

•	Selecting an object and choosing Properties from the menu for that object.

•	Selecting an object and clicking the InfoBox icon.

Note	Many objects have an associated icon you can click to open the InfoBox. Look for the following symbol to identify icons that open the InfoBox for the selected object.

•	Double-clicking the object (except for objects that contain text).

How the InfoBox works

The following illustration shows how to use the InfoBox.

When you open the InfoBox, you see the settings for the selected object. If no object is selected, the InfoBox displays the settings for the current page.

•	You can leave the InfoBox open and select different objects on a page.

•	The InfoBox always displays settings for the selected object(s). The tabs and settings change as you select different objects.

•	If you change a visible property, like a color, the property changes immediately in the selected object(s).

For example, if a blue rectangle is selected when you open the InfoBox, the properties of the rectangle are displayed in the InfoBox. If you change the color of the rectangle to green, the color of the rectangle changes immediately. If you then select text on the page, the InfoBox displays the settings for that text.

 See related topics


Overview: TeamReview

TeamReview allows authors to get feedback from others (reviewers) about a presentation.  Authors can post a presentation to a Notes database, on a network (public directory), by e-mail routing, or distribute it on a floppy disk.

Reviewers can add text note comments, which look like yellow sticky notes, and mark up the presentation using lines, circles, arrows, and freehand drawings. Reviewers can edit or delete only their own comments.

Authors can give reviewers the ability to edit the presentation content, by assigning a password to the distributed presentation.

Once reviewers finish commenting and "return" their comments (how comments are "returned" depends on how the presentation was distributed), the author updates the presentation and ends the review process. This ends the TeamReview cycle.

Distributing a presentation for review

An author can post a presentation in a Notes database and inform reviewers of where to locate the database through electronic mail. If a presentation is posted to a Notes database for review, all of the reviews appear as responses to the original document (presentation). See Distributing a presentation by posting it in a Notes database.

An author can post a presentation on a network directory and inform reviewers of where to locate the file through electronic mail. See Distributing a presentation by posting it in a public directory.

An author can send a presentation for review through e-mail routing. See Distributing a presentation by routing it via e-mail.

An author can distribute a presentation for review by saving it to a floppy disk. See Distributing a presentation by saving it to a floppy disk.

In general, anyone can comment on a presentation that was not specifically sent out for TeamReview by choosing View - Reviewing Tools - Reviewer. An author can review a presentation that received spontaneous comments by choosing View - Reviewing Tools - Author.

The TeamReview desktop

When you are commenting on a presentation that has been sent out for review, the Freelance Graphics desktop changes: there is a streamlined menu; and, on the left-hand side of the desktop there is a set of reviewer's tools. For a view of the desktop, see Reviewer's desktop.

When you open a presentation as an author, the Freelance Graphics desktop changes to add authoring tools and controls to edit presentations that contain reviewers' comments in addition to the standard Freelance Graphics menu and tools. For a view of the desktop, see Author's desktop.

 See related topics


Adding a comment

A comment can be text, a line, an arrow, a freehand drawing, a circle, or a combination of these.

1.	Click Add a Comment.

2.	Type the text you want to add.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Drag the comment to position it.

5.	(Optional) Add an arrow, circle, line, or freehand drawing to clarify your comment.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Adding a comment

Moving comments

Anyone can move any comment by dragging it to a new location.

Using markup tools

Use the arrow, circle, line, and freehand tools to add clarity or emphasis. For example, the arrow tool in combination with a comment can indicate precisely what part of the presentation your comment refers to.

Deleting comments

Reviewers can delete their own comments. Authors can delete all comments.

Color coding of comments

Each reviewer's comments are in a color that is unique to them. For example, all comments, lines, circles, and arrows added by reviewer A are in red, reviewer B's are in blue, and so on. In addition, a reviewer's name and the date is automatically attached to any "yellow sticky" text the reviewer types.

 Go to procedure


Adding a Quick Comment

Quick Comments are generic or pre-written comments that come with Freelance Graphics.

1.	Click Quick Comments.

2.	Select the comment you want to add.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Drag the comment to position it.

Tip	Add your own comments to the list. See Creating a Quick Comment.

 See related topics


Creating a Quick Comment

You can create your own Quick Comments.

1.	Click Quick Comments.

2.	Type the comment you want to add in the "Type your own Quick Comment" box.

3.	Click Add To List to include your comment on the list of Quick Comments.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each Quick Comment you want to add to the list.

5.	Select the Quick Comment you want to add to the page.

6.	Click OK.

Notes

You can only delete Quick Comments that you have added to the list.

You can edit Quick Comments that you have added to the list by highlighting the comments, editing them, then clicking Update Comment.

 See related topics


Drawing arrows in TeamReview

1.	Click the Arrow tool.

See Reviewer's desktop.

2.	Position the crosshair pointer at the end point of the arrow, and drag to the beginning point.

3.	Release the mouse button to complete the arrow.

4.	(Optional) Move the arrow by dragging it.

Note	You cannot change the attributes of any of the TeamReview drawing tools: color, thickness of line, and arrowhead size cannot be changed. The drawing color is assigned automatically; each reviewer is assigned a different color.

 See related topics


Choose Database dialog box

1.	Type the server name or select it from the list.

2.	Click Open Server.

3.	Select the title of the database or type the database path and file name.

4.	Click OK.


Reviewing a distributed presentation

1.	Open the presentation you want to review.

2.	If your name does not appear in the name field or in the drop-down list, type your full name.

3.	Select "Add comments using the TeamReview commenting tools" or "Edit the Presentation content" (if available).

4.	(Optional) If you selected  "Edit the Presentation content," type the password that the author assigned to the presentation.

5.	Click OK.

You can use the commenting tools to add text note comments, which look like yellow sticky notes, and to draw lines, circles, arrows, and freehand drawings. You can read the comments of other reviewers, but can edit or delete only your own comments. Additionally, you can copy objects from other presentations and paste them as comments.

Note	If you selected  "Edit the Presentation content" when you opened the presentation, the reviewing tools do not appear. Instead, you can directly edit the presentation's content.

 See related topics


Drawing circles in TeamReview

1.	Click the Circle tool.

See Reviewer's desktop.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	To draw an ellipse, position the crosshair pointer at the starting point of the ellipse and drag to size the ellipse.

•	To draw a circle, press SHIFT as you drag.

3.	Release the mouse button to complete the drawing.

4.	(Optional) Move or size the circle by dragging it.

Note	You cannot change the attributes of any of the TeamReview drawing tools: color, thickness of line, and arrowhead size cannot be changed. The drawing color is assigned automatically; each reviewer is assigned a different color.

 See related topics


Consolidate Comments dialog box

1.	Choose File - TeamReview - Consolidate Comments.

2.	Type the path and file name of the commented presentation, or click Browse to find the file.

3.	Click OK.

Note	Once the comments have been consolidated, save the current presentation.


Deleting all of a reviewer's comments

You must have a distributed presentation open that you sent out for TeamReview before you follow these steps.

1.	Click Delete Comments.

2.	Select the reviewer(s) to delete, or choose "Select all reviewers."

3.	Click Delete.

Note	Once you delete a reviewer's comments, they cannot be restored.

 See related topics


Displaying or hiding other reviewers' comments

You must have a presentation open that was distributed for TeamReview before you follow these steps.

Hiding and showing comments

To display or hide the comments of all the selected reviewers, click Show Comments/Hide Comments.

Selecting which reviewer's comments to see

1.	To select which reviewer's comments to see, click Select Reviewers.

2.	Click the names in the list that you want to see.

3.	Click OK.


Distribute for TeamReview dialog box

There are several ways to make a presentation available to reviewers.

Distributing a presentation by posting it in a Notes database

Distributing a presentation by posting it in a public directory

Distributing a presentation by routing it via e-mail

Distributing a presentation by saving it to a floppy disk

 See related topics


Distributing a presentation by saving it to a floppy disk

1.	Choose File - TeamReview - Distribute for Review.

2.	Select "Save to a floppy disk(s)."

3.	To allow reviewers to add comments to the presentation, select "Commenting only." To give reviewers the choice to either add comments or edit the presentation directly, select "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)."

4.	Click OK.

5.	If you selected  "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)," enter and verify a password in the Set Password for Editing dialog box, and click OK.

6.	Fill out the Distribute Presentation on Floppy Disk dialog box and click OK.

7.	Follow prompts to make one or more copies of the presentation. Click OK as necessary.

8.	Select "Save and close the presentation,"  and click OK.

Note	If you select "Save and close the presentation," the file will close and the standard Freelance Graphics window will be restored (the TeamReview buttons disappear). This is the recommended course of action.

Note	If you continue editing the presentation after you distribute it, you risk the possibility that the merge functionality may not work properly, particularly if you add or delete pages.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Distributing a presentation by saving it to a floppy disk

The TeamReview cycle

When you distribute a presentation by saving it to a floppy disk, keep the following process in mind:

•	Reviewers will return disks to you when they are done commenting.

•	Open the returned presentation, answer Yes to "Merge now?" This will merge the comments on this floppy disk into your original presentation.

Note	If a reviewer sends a second set of comments, you may not want to merge the new set because they will replace the first set. You can review the second set of comments separately.

•	After you have merged all the reviewers' comments into your presentation, open the presentation and edit it to incorporate reviewers' comments.

•	When you are done, choose File - TeamReview - End Review. This ends the TeamReview cycle. You can go through the review cycle as many times as you want to.

 Go to procedure


Distribute Presentation on Floppy Disk dialog box

1.	Type the drive (for example A: or B:).

2.	Type a file name.

3.	Insert the floppy disk.

4.	Click OK.

Note	The file extension, PRZ, is added automatically.


Distributing a presentation by routing it via e-mail

1.	Choose File - TeamReview - Distribute for Review.

2.	Select "Routing via e-mail."

3.	To allow reviewers to add comments to the presentation, select "Commenting only." To give reviewers the choice to either add comments or edit the presentation directly, select "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)."

4.	Click OK.

5.	If you selected  "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)," enter and verify a password in the Set Password for Editing dialog box, and click OK.

6.	Fill out the TeamMail dialog box and click Send.

Note	You can choose serial or parallel routing.

7.	Select "Save and close the presentation,"  and click OK.

Note	If you select "Save and close the presentation," the file will close and the standard Freelance Graphics window will be restored (the TeamReview buttons disappear). This is the recommended course of action.

Note	If you chose parallel routing and you continue editing the presentation after you send it out, you risk the possibility that the merge functionality may not work properly, particularly if you add or delete pages.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Distributing a presentation by routing it via e-mail

The TeamReview cycle

When you distribute a presentation by routing it via e-mail (serial or broadcast), keep the following in mind.

Serial distribution:

•	When you get the presentation back by e-mail, double-click the icon and click Detach.

•	Open the presentation to see the comments and edit the presentation.

•	When you are done, choose File - TeamReview - End Review. This ends the TeamReview cycle. You can go through the review cycle as many times as you want to.

Broadcast distribution:

•	When you receive e-mail back, double-click the icon and choose Launch. Answer Yes to "Merge now?" This merges the reviewers' comments into your original presentation.

Note	If a reviewer sends a second set of comments, you may not want to merge the new set because they will replace the first set. You can review the second set of comments separately.

•	Edit the presentation to incorporate reviewers' comments.

•	When you are done, choose File - TeamReview - End Review. This ends the TeamReview cycle. You can go through the review cycle as many times as you want to.

 Go to procedure


Distribution Complete dialog box

It is recommended that you choose "Save and close the presentation." Closing the presentation is recommended because if you continue editing the presentation, it will become out-of-synch with the copy you distributed and comments reviewers add may no longer be relevant.


Editing a comment

You can only edit your own comments.

1.	Click the comment that you want to edit, then click it again.

2.	Edit the text.

3.	Click outside the box when you finish editing.

Notes

Anyone can move a comment.

Only authors can delete comments that are not their own.


End Review

Authors should follow this procedure to delete all the reviewers' comments from the presentation and restore the standard Freelance Graphics window (the TeamReview buttons do not display).

1.	Choose File - TeamReview - End Review.

2.	Click OK.

Notes

If you posted the presentation to a public drive, you may want to copy it back to your computer. It is up to you whether you want to copy over the original, or rename it so you have both the original and the revised copy.

If you posted the presentation to a Notes database, you'll be given the option to save the presentation back to disk. The Notes documents that contain the presentation and the comments will remain. You can delete them as you would delete any Notes documents.


Enter Your Name dialog box

In most cases, you will not see this dialog box because Freelance Graphics determines your name from your e-mail system or from Notes.

If you do see this dialog box, you may want to check with your system administrator to determine why Freelance Graphics had to ask you your name.

If you do not have an e-mail system, and you have to type your name, remember exactly how you typed it because you will need to type that exact name again to gain access later on.


Drawing freehand in TeamReview

The Freehand tool makes the mouse function like an electronic pen or pencil.

1.	Click the Freehand tool.

See Reviewer's desktop

2.	Position the crosshair pointer at the starting point of the drawing, and hold down the left mouse button as you draw, as if you were drawing with a pencil.

3.	Release the mouse button when you are through with your drawing.

4.	(Optional) Move or size the drawing by dragging it.

Tip	Press BACKSPACE to stop drawing temporarily while you move the crosshair pointer to a new location.

Note	You cannot change the attributes of any of the TeamReview drawing tools: color, thickness of line, and arrowhead size cannot be changed. The drawing color is assigned automatically; each reviewer is assigned a different color.

 See related topics


Drawing a line in TeamReview

You can use the Line tool to point to or call out an object on the page or underline some text.

1.	Click the Line tool.

See Reviewer's desktop

2.	Position the crosshair pointer at the beginning point of the line and drag to the end point.

3.	Release the mouse button to complete the line.

4.	(Optional) Move the line by dragging it.

Notes

To constrain the line to the horizontal orientation or a 45-degree angle, press SHIFT while drawing the line.

You cannot change the attributes of any of the TeamReview drawing tools: color, thickness of line, and arrowhead size cannot be changed. The drawing color is assigned automatically; each reviewer is assigned a different color.

 See related topics


Merge Comments into Parent dialog box

1.	Type in the path and file name of the parent presentation, or click Browse.

2.	Click OK.

Note	This process automatically updates and saves the parent presentation.


Distributing a presentation by posting it in a public directory

1.	Choose File - TeamReview - Distribute for Review.

2.	Select "Posting in a public directory."

3.	(Optional) Deselect "Notify reviewers by e-mail" if you do not want to notify reviewers through electronic mail.

See details

4.	To allow reviewers to add comments to the presentation, select "Commenting only." To give reviewers the choice to either add comments or edit the presentation directly, select "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)."

5.	Click OK.

6.	If you selected  "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)," enter and verify a password in the Set Password for Editing dialog box, and click OK.

7.	Type in the file name and the directory and path where you want to put the file or click Browse to select directory, path, and name, and click OK.

8.	If, in step 3, you elected to notify reviewers by e-mail, type or select the names of your reviewers, then click Send.

Note	In addition to the generic comments, you can add personalized comments to each reviewer.

9.	Select "Save and close the presentation,"  and click OK.

Note	If you select "Save and close the presentation," the file will close and the standard Freelance Graphics window will be restored (the TeamReview buttons disappear). This is the recommended course of action, because if you continue to edit the presentation, it will be out of synch with what you sent out for review.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Distributing a presentation by posting it in a public directory

Posting a presentation for comment on a network directory

If you have chosen not to notify the reviewers by e-mail, be sure to let your reviewers know the name of the network directory where the presentation is located. Make sure that all reviewers have read and write privileges for that network directory.

Resume editing or close the presentation

If you select "Save and resume editing the presentation," you can continue editing the presentation. However, you will have to re-post the updated presentation, if you want your reviewers to see and comment on any additional changes you make.

The TeamReview cycle

When you distribute a presentation by posting it to a public directory, keep the following in mind.

•	Reviewers have the option to send you notification when they are done reviewing. This will tell you when you should open the posted presentation to see their comments.

•	Reviewers may give you back a copy of the posted presentation that contains only their own comments. You can open the returned presentation and choose File - TeamReview - Merge into Parent to get their comments into the posted presentation.

Note	If a reviewer sends a second set of comments, you may not want to merge the new set because they will replace the first set. You can review the second set of comments separately.

•	 When you are done updating the posted presentation based on the comments you received, choose End Review. You can then copy the presentation back to your computer, either on top of the original presentation or with a new name so that you have a copy of the original before it was sent out to review and after reviews were incorporated.

 Go to procedure


Distributing a presentation by posting it in a Notes database

1.	Choose File - TeamReview - Distribute for Review.

2.	Select "Posting in a Notes database."

3.	Type in the server and database name (use the form "server name !! database name") or click Browse to more easily select server and database names.

4.	(Optional) Deselect "Notify reviewers by e-mail" if you do not want to notify reviewers through electronic mail.

5.	To allow reviewers to add comments to the presentation, select "Commenting only." To give reviewers the choice to either add comments or edit the presentation directly, select "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)."

6.	Click OK.

7.	If you selected  "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)," enter and verify a password in the Set Password for Editing dialog box, and click OK.

8.	If, in step 4, you elected to notify reviewers by e-mail, type or select the names of your reviewers, then click OK.

Note	If you use Notes e-mail, the notification e-mail reviewers receive will contain a link to the posted presentation.

9.	Select "Save and close the presentation,"  and click OK.

Note	If you select "Save and close the presentation," the file will close and the standard Freelance Graphics window will be restored (the TeamReview buttons disappear). This is the recommended course of action.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Distributing a presentation by posting it in a Notes database

Distributing your comments in a Notes database

Freelance Graphics ships with two versions of a Notes database for TeamReview (Presentation Library and Review for Notes 4.x, file name FLPRES4.NSF, and Presentation Library and Review for Notes 3.x, file name FLPRES3.NSF).  Freelance Graphics provides these databases for your convenience, but you can also post to another Notes database if it is set up with the forms and views required for TeamReview.

You can install either of these databases by using the Freelance Graphics custom installation option. You must  have Notes 4.0 (or higher) to use the Notes 4.x version of the Presentation Library and Review database. If you are running a Notes 3.0 server, use the Notes 3.x version of the database.

Note	See your Notes system administrator about setting up the Presentation Library and Review database on your Notes server. Information about setting up the database is available in the "About This Database" topic in the Help menu of the database.

Resume editing or close the presentation

If you select "Save and resume editing the presentation," you can continue editing the presentation. However, you will have to re-post the updated presentation, if you want your reviewers to see and comment on any additional changes you make.

The TeamReview cycle

When you distribute a presentation by posting it in a Notes database, keep the following in mind.

•	Reviewers have the option to notify you when they are done. This will tell you when you should open the posted presentation to see their comments.

•	Reviewers may give you back a copy of the posted presentation that contains only their own comments. To get these comments into the posted presentation, open the posted presentation on the Notes database and choose "Consolidate Comments."

•	When you are done, choose File - TeamReview - End Review. This provides you with the option of saving a copy of the updated presentation to disk with comments removed.

Tip	If you are using the Presentation Library view of the Presentation Library and Review database to store presentations, you can create a new document in that view and embed the updated presentation you saved to disk. For more information, see Overview: The Freelance Graphics Presentation Library and Review database .

 Go to procedure


Notify Author dialog box

When you are done reviewing a presentation that has been posted to Notes, you have the option of choosing "Done Commenting - Notify Author" to let the author know you are finished reviewing. Also, whenever you close a presentation you have been commenting on, you will be asked if you want to notify the author if you have not already chosen "Done Commenting - Notify Author."


Overview: The Freelance Graphics Presentation Library and Review database

The Presentation Library and Review database provides you with two databases in one by providing two main views:

•	The Presentation Library view--Provides all the views and forms of the Presentation Library.

•	The TeamReview view--Provides all the views and forms necessary to carry out TeamReview in Freelance Graphics using Lotus Notes.

For comprehensive orientation to the Presentation Library and Review database, open the database in Notes and choose Help - About This Database. For step-by-step information, choose Help - Using This Database.

Note	See your Notes system administrator about setting up the Presentation Library and Review database on your Notes server. Information about setting up the database is available in the "About This Database" topic in the Help menu of the database.

You install the Presentation Library and Review database by using the Freelance Graphics custom installation option. You must  have Notes 4.0 (or higher) to use the Notes 4.x version of the Presentation Library and Review database. If you are running a Notes 3.0 server, use the Notes 3.x version of the database.

 See related topics


Printing with or without comments

1.	Do one of the following:

•	To print the presentation with comments, click Select Reviewers, and select the reviewers whose comments you want displayed.

•	To print the presentation without comments, click Show Comments/Hide Comments, so that no comments are displayed.

2.	(Optional) Drag comments to move them.

Note	If comments are overlapping, they will print that way.

3.	Choose File - Print.

4.	Click Print.


Selecting which reviewers' comments to see

You have to open a presentation that has been distributed for TeamReview to follow these steps.

Comments consist of text and all lines, arrows, circles, and freehand drawings that a reviewer makes.

1.	Click Select Reviewers.

2.	Select the name of one or more reviewers.

3.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Selecting which reviewers' comments to see

You can select to see or hide all comments by all reviewers.

Reviewers can move the comments and drawings of other reviewers around, but they cannot edit or delete them.

Hiding comments

You can alternate between showing and hiding the comments that you have selected to be displayed by clicking Show Comments/Hide Comments.

 Go to procedure


Setting the Editor Access Password

The Set Password for Editing dialog box lets you assign a password to the presentation you are distributing. This password lets reviewers edit the presentation's content.

1.	Choose Team Review - Distribute for Review.

2.	Choose "Commenting or Editing (requires assigning a password)" in the Distribute for TeamReview dialog box.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Enter and verify the password.

5.	Click OK.

 See related topics


Checking the spelling of a comment

Reviewers can check the spelling of their own comments but not the spelling of the presentation. For authors, the spelling checker works in the standard way; however, it does not check the spelling of the reviewers' comments.

1.	Choose Edit - Check Spelling.

2.	Click OK.

3.	Respond as required.

 See related topics


Selecting and deselecting all objects

If you are not in Current Page view, click the Current Page tab.

To select all objects

Choose Edit - Select - All.

This selects all objects on the page, whether they are visible or not.

Note	This does not select objects on the underlying page layout. See Customizing page layouts.

To deselect all objects

Choose Edit - Select - None.

This deselects all objects on the page, whether they are visible or not.


Selecting and deselecting by clicking or dragging

If you are not already in Current Page view, click the Current Page tab.

To select:	Do this:
Only one object	Click the object.
Additional objects	Press SHIFT while you click the other objects.
Objects inside a box you drag with the mouse	Press and hold the left mouse button and drag a box around the objects you want to select.
Objects touching a box you drag with the mouse	Choose Edit - Select - Touching and drag a box around and touching the objects you want to select.
To deselect:	Do this:
Only one object when several are selected	Press SHIFT while you click the object you want deselected.
All objects	Click outside the selected area.
Note	To select an OLE custom control object, make sure that "Design OLE controls" is selected in the View Menu. If "Design OLE controls" is deselected in the View menu, a single click on the OLE custom control object will run the control.


Selecting and deselecting by cycling through objects

If you are not in Current Page view, click the Current Page tab.

Note Freelance Graphics cycles through objects in the order in which they were added to the page. Only objects that you can see are cycled through.

1.	(Optional) Choose View - Zoom In to enlarge the page that contains the object you want to select.

2.	Choose Edit - Select - Cycle.

You see a dotted rectangle around an object and the object type appears in the Cycle Selection dialog box.

Tip	If you need to move the dialog box to see the dotted rectangle, press and hold the left mouse button as you drag the title bar of the dialog box.

3.	(Optional) Click Select or Deselect to select or deselect the object in the dotted rectangle.

4.	Click Next or Previous to go to the next or previous object on the page.

5.	(Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to continue selecting and deselecting objects.

6.	When you finish selecting and deselecting, click OK.


Selecting similar objects

In Current Page view, you can select objects on the page by matching attributes such as the object type, color, or font.

1.	Select an object you want to match. For example, select a blue rectangle if you want to select other rectangles or blue objects.

2.	Choose Edit - Select - Like and select the attributes you want to match.

3.	Click OK.

All matching objects on the page are selected, whether they are visible or not.


Overview: Selecting objects

Freelance Graphics continually customizes your work area to reflect the currently selected object. For example, the sixth menu from the left is specific to the selected object (text, drawing, and so on), and the InfoBox shows the settings of the selected object.

An object must be selected before you can work with it. An object is selected when it has handles (small squares) around it.

When you are in Current Page view, it is usually easiest to click on an object to select it. See Selecting and deselecting by clicking or dragging.

Menu commands can also help in certain circumstances, particularly when the object you want to select is difficult to see, or when you want to select similar objects.

•	If the object is partially or fully hidden by another object, see Selecting and deselecting by cycling through objects.

•	If the objects you want to select are similar in some way, see Selecting similar objects.

•	If the object is outside of the page area you are viewing, use the commands in the View menu to zoom out or see the full page.

•	If the object is small, magnify the area you want to work with by using the View menu to zoom in.

 See related topics


Selecting a page in Current Page view

A page is selected only when no objects on the page are selected. (When a page is selected, the Page command is displayed in the menu bar.)

To select a page in Current Page view, do one of the following:

•	Click outside the page area.

•	Choose Edit - Select - None.

 See related topics


Selecting text in text blocks and bulleted lists

Use the following techniques to select text when you see a flashing insertion point (for example, when you have double-clicked a text block).

Do this:	To:
Click (over text)	Place the insertion point at the location of the I-beam pointer.
Drag	Select the text from where you press the mouse button to where you release it.
Double-click (over text)	Select the entire word under the I-beam pointer.
Double-click, then drag	Select the entire word under the I-beam pointer, then select subsequent words you drag through.
SHIFT+click	Select all text between the insertion point and the I-beam pointer.
SHIFT+drag	Select all text between the insertion point and the I-beam pointer, then select the text you drag through.
SHIFT+double-click	Select all text between the insertion point and the entire word the I-beam pointer is over.
SHIFT+double-click, then drag	Select words between the insertion point and the word the I-beam pointer is over, then select the words you drag through.
SHIFT+ → or ←	Add or delete one character at a time to or from the selection.
SHIFT+↑ or ↓	Select or deselect all text between the insertion point and the corresponding location in the line above or below.
SHIFT+HOME	Select all the text from the insertion point to the beginning of the line.
SHIFT+END	Select all the text from the insertion point to the end of the line.


Selecting text in speaker notes

Use the following techniques to select text in speaker notes.

Do this:	To:
Click (over text)	Place the insertion point at the position of the mouse pointer.
Drag	Select the text from where you press the mouse button to where you release it.
SHIFT+click	Select all text between the insertion point and the mouse pointer.
SHIFT+drag	Select all text between the insertion point and the mouse pointer, then select the text you drag through.
SHIFT+→ or ←	Add or delete one character at a time to or from the selection.
SHIFT+↑ or ↓	Select all text between the insertion point and the corresponding location in the line above or below.
SHIFT+HOME	Select all text between the insertion point and the beginning of the current line.
SHIFT+END	Select all text between the insertion point and the end of the current line.
SHIFT+PAGE UP	Select all text between the insertion point and the beginning of the speaker note.
SHIFT+PAGE DOWN	Select all text between the insertion point and the end of the speaker note.
 See related topics


Creating a "Click here..." block for graphics

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts.

2.	Select the page layout you want to edit, then click Edit.

3.	Choose Create - "Click here" Block.

4.	Drag a box on the page to add the "Click here..." graphic block.

Freelance Graphics places a "Click here..." text block on the page.

5.	Choose "Click here..." - "Click here" Block Properties.

6.	Click the Basics tab.

7.	Under Type of block, select a block type for graphics.

8.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

9.	Click Done.


Creating a new page layout

You can create a new page layout in a SmartMaster look.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts.

2.	Click Create.

3.	Type a new page name.

4.	Select "Use backdrop" if you want the new page layout to use the backdrop.

5.	Select the number of "Click here..." blocks you want on the page (up to nine).

By default, these are "Click here..." text blocks.

6.	Click OK.

7.	Click Done.

The new page layout will appear in the Page Layouts panel when you create a new page.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating a new page layout

If you choose a different look

If you create a new page layout and then choose a different look, the new page layout will be lost. The text or graphics on the page will be preserved on any presentation pages using that layout, but the page layout will be Basic Layout. If you switch back to the original look, the page layout will revert to the new page layout.

Note	A new page layout is associated with the current presentation only. To use a page layout in another presentation, you must save it in a SmartMaster look file, and then use Presentation - Choose a Different SmartMaster Look to use the look that contains the new page layout. To save a SmartMaster look, see Saving a presentation.

If you want to retain the capability of switching to different SmartMaster looks without losing the new page layout, you will have to add the new page layout to every SmartMaster look that you may want to switch to.

Duplicating a page layout

If you want to create a variation of a page layout (say, one with an additional "Click here..." block), you can duplicate a page layout by choosing Page - Duplicate Page and using that page as the basis of the new page layout.

If you are using a content topic

If you are using a content topic, you cannot add new content pages with Presentation - Edit Page Layouts. Instead, you must edit the content topic by opening it. See Overview: Designing content topics.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Unlinking a page layout

You can break the connection between a page and its page layout. This will be useful only rarely--for example, if you want a particular page in your presentation to keep the same design even if you choose another look.

1.	In Current Page view, display the page you want to unlink.

In Page Sorter view, click the page you want to unlink.

2.	Choose Page - Unlink Page Layout.

Tip	To choose a page layout for a page you have unlinked, make it the current page, then choose Page - Switch Page Layout and choose a page layout. If you unlink a page layout by mistake, choose Edit - Undo to restore the link.

 See details


Details: Unlinking a page layout

In most cases, you will not need to unlink page layouts because you can move, size, and change the attributes of elements on a page layout directly from the backdrop. For example, you can drag a filled-in "Click here..." text block to place it elsewhere on the page.

After choosing Page - Unlink Page Layout, the current page looks the same as other pages using this same page layout. However, because the page layout is no longer associated with this page, the current page will not be updated if you edit the page layout that was originally used for this page.

 Go to procedure


Overview: The "Click here..." block guide

The "Click here..." block guide--the dashed rectangle on the backdrop--controls the size and position of "Click here..." blocks within its borders on all pages that use the backdrop.

If you want to add any text or graphics to the backdrop, place them outside the borders of the "Click here..." block guide, so they won't overlap text, clip art, or charts that a user adds.

Generally, you will not need to resize or reposition the "Click here..." block guide, but SmartMaster look and content topic designers will find it useful. When you size or move the "Click here..." block guide, the "Click here..." blocks controlled by it are also resized or repositioned. See Sizing or moving the "Click here..." block guide.

How Freelance Graphics sizes and positions "Click here..." blocks

Depending on how many "Click here..." blocks are on the page, Freelance Graphics sizes and positions them accordingly. If there are two "Click here..." text blocks, for example, they are placed side by side. If there are three "Click here..." blocks, one is placed on top of the page and two on the bottom, and so on.

The maximum number of "Click here..." blocks allowed in the "Click here..." block guide is nine. If you add or delete a "Click here..." block from a page layout, the remaining "Click here..." blocks within the borders of the guide are automatically resized and repositioned to fill the guide (unless the "Click here..." blocks are set to not use the "Click here..." block guide).

You can override the default scheme for the arrangement of "Click here..." blocks within the guide by changing the "Click here..." block guide order. See Changing the placement order of "Click here..." blocks.

If you want to place "Click here..." blocks in a custom arrangement and do not want Freelance Graphics to size the "Click here..." blocks automatically within the borders of the "Click here..." block guide, you can set "Click here..." blocks so that they do not use the "Click here..." block guide. Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts, select a page layout to edit, then select a "Click here..." block. Choose "Click here" - "Click here" Properties. Click the Basics tab, and then deselect "Use Click here... block."

If you are designing SmartMaster looks, you can change the ID numbers of "Click here..." blocks to ensure that text and graphic "Click here..." blocks are mapped properly when a user switches to a different look. See Changing the ID of a "Click here..." block.


Using a bitmap as a backdrop

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

2.	Choose Backdrop - Page Properties.

3.	Under Pattern, select Bitmap.

4.	Under Bitmap arrangement, choose whether you want to tile or resize the bitmap.

5.	Under Bitmap source, choose whether to use a bitmap you have already placed on the Clipboard, or a bitmap from a file you have on your system.

Note	You can click Browse to look for the file you want to use or you can type the full path name of the file.

6.	Click OK.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

8.	Click Done.


Changing the ID of a "Click here..." block

If you are designing SmartMaster looks, you may need to change the ID numbers of "Click here..." blocks to ensure that "Click here..." blocks are mapped properly when a user switches to a different look.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts.

2.	Select the page layout you want to edit, then click Edit.

3.	Click the "Click here..." block whose ID number you want to change.

4.	Choose "Click here" - "Click here" Block Properties.

5.	Click the Basics tab.

6.	Type a new ID number in the ID number box.

See details

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

8.	Click Done.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing the ID of a "Click here..." block

How the "Click here..." block ID determines the mapping of "Click here..." blocks

The ID number of a "Click here..." block determines where "Click here..." blocks are placed on the page when you switch to a new SmartMaster look. For example, a "Click here..." block on the Bullets & Chart page layout with an ID of 3 is placed in the position of the "Click here..." block with an ID of  3 in the new look's Bullets & Chart page.

All "Click here..." blocks are automatically given an ID number when they are created, with the next available ID in the 1 through 100 sequence.

For all SmartMaster looks shipped with Freelance Graphics, the mapping of "Click here..." blocks is pre-defined. However, you may have to change the ID numbers of "Click here..." blocks for new page layouts you create.

If you create a new look and find that "Click here..." blocks do not map properly with existing SmartMaster looks (that is, their positions move when you switch to a new look), you may have to change the ID numbers.

If you create new page layouts with "Click here..." blocks, observe these conventions.

•	"Click here..." text blocks get ID numbers of 1 through 100. The title block should have an ID of 1, and the first text block should have an ID of 2.

•	"Click here..." graphic blocks get ID numbers of 101 through 999.

When you switch looks and a "Click here..." block does not have a matching ID number in the new look, it remains in its original position on the page.

 Go to procedure


Customizing "Click here..." prompts

When you customize the text in "Click here..." prompts on a page layout, every page or content page that uses the customized page layout will reflect this change. See Overview: Customizing page layouts.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts.

2.	Select the page with the "Click here..." block you want to change, then click Edit.

3.	Double-click the "Click here..." block.

4.	Modify the text in the "Click here..." block.

5.	Click Done to resume working on your presentation.

Note	The "Click here..." title block originates on the backdrop page.


Customizing the backdrop

You can add text and graphics to every page in your presentation (except the title page) by editing the backdrop.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

2.	Add any fixed text or graphics you want to this page, such as clip art images, a company name or logo, or a date.

3.	If you need to create more space for the text or graphics you add, size the "Click here..." block guide (the heavy dashed rectangle).

Tip	Place the logo outside the "Click here..." block guide (the heavy dashed rectangle) to ensure that the logo will not overlap text or graphics in "Click here..." blocks.

4.	Click Done.

Tip	Avoid placing objects within the "Click here..." block guide, where they will overlap other text or graphics.

Note	Only the current presentation is affected by changes to page layouts or to the backdrop. If you switch to a new SmartMaster look after customizing a page layout or the backdrop, you will lose all these changes. To save a SmartMaster look, choose File - Save As and save the file as a SmartMaster look file type.

 See related topics


Overview: Customizing page layouts

Each SmartMaster look contains a standard set of 12 page layouts. These page layouts contain "Click here..." prompts that tell users what to do and control the placement of text and graphic objects on the page. You can customize page layouts, but in general, it is preferable to create a content topic when you need to create a customized presentation. Occasionally, though, you may want to change the text of a "Click here..." block on a page layout, and you can do this by editing a page layout.

If you switch to a new SmartMaster look, you will no longer have access to this page layout (unless the other SmartMaster look also has this page layout). For more information, see Details: Creating a new page layout.

To make your changes to a page layout permanent, you must save the file as a SmartMaster look file type with File - Save As. See Saving a presentation. Even if you save a SmartMaster look file, the page layout you added or edited is associated with that SmartMaster look only.

When you create a content page, any new presentation that uses this content topic will have access to the new content page. For more information, see Overview: Designing content topics.

Customizing the Title page layout

Since the Title page layout is not affected by the backdrop, you must make changes to the Title page layout itself. Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts, double-click the Title page, and make any changes you want. Now, any presentation page that uses the Title page layout will reflect the changes you made (for the current presentation only).

 See related topics


Dragging an object into a "Click here..." block

You can drag any text or graphic object into a "Click here..." block.

1.	Drag an object over the "Click here..." block.

The mouse pointer changes to a hand as you drag.

2.	Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer approaches the "Click here..." block and you see a dashed outline around the "Click here..." block.

Freelance Graphics sizes graphic objects (but not text) to fill the "Click here..." block.

Note	To remove an object from a "Click here..." block, click it, and choose Edit - Cut.To place the object elsewhere, choose Edit - Paste.


Customizing page layouts

Page layouts contain "Click here..." text to tell users what to do, and also control the placement of text and graphic objects on the page. You can customize page layouts if you like.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts.

2.	Click the page layout you want to edit.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Make any changes you want to the page layout.

5.	Click Done.

6.	(Optional) To make permanent changes to a page layout in a SmartMaster look, choose File - Save As and save the file as a SmartMaster look file type.

Caution	It is a good idea to save the look under a new file name so you do not overwrite the original look file shipped with Freelance Graphics.

Notes

Changes you make affect all pages or content pages that use the customized page layout.

Note that you cannot select the title block when you are editing page layouts. This is because it is part of the backdrop. Since every page layout except the title page uses the backdrop, you can make global changes to all the page layouts in a SmartMaster look by editing the backdrop. See Customizing the backdrop.

Only the current presentation or content topic is affected by changes to page layouts or to the backdrop. If you switch to a new SmartMaster look after customizing a page layout or the backdrop, you will lose all these changes. To save a SmartMaster look, see step 6 above.

 See related topics


Changing the placement order of "Click here..." blocks

You can override the default scheme for the arrangement of "Click here..." blocks within the "Click here..." block guide.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts.

2.	Select the page layout you want to edit, then click Edit.

3.	Click the "Click here..." block you want to renumber.

4.	Choose "Click here" - "Click here" Block Properties.

5.	Click the Basics tab, then select "Set Click here... block guide order."

6.	Type a new number in the "Set Click here... block guide order" box to specify its placement on the page (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and so on).

If you change the order of one "Click here..." block, you may need to also change the order of all other "Click here..." blocks on the page in order to avoid duplicates. If two "Click here..." blocks have the same guide order number, the ID number is used to determine the placement of the block.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

8.	Click Done.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing the placement order of "Click here..." blocks

How Freelance Graphics determines the placement of "Click here..." blocks

Since each SmartMaster look contains the same page layouts, you can switch looks at any time to change the design of your presentation. For example, all looks include the page layout 4 Charts. When you switch to a different look, the four charts on the 4 Charts page remain the same but assume the style, color, and location of the new look.

More particularly, each of the four charts on the page is mapped to a location on the 4 Charts page layout of the new look. By default, Freelance Graphics places the four charts based on the ascending order of the ID numbers of the "Click here..." blocks.

For example, a chart in the "Click here..." chart block with an ID of 101 is placed in the "Click here..." chart block with the matching ID of 101 in the new look, and so on for each "Click here..." block.

 Go to procedure


Overview: "Click here..." blocks

"Click here..." blocks make it easy to add text and graphic objects to a page. Freelance Graphics has two main types of "Click here..." blocks.

•	"Click here..." text blocks are areas into which you can type new text or drag existing text. When you add text to a "Click here..." text block, the text assumes the typeface, size, color, and bullets defined in the underlying SmartMaster look. The text is also sized and positioned automatically.

•	"Click here..." graphics blocks are areas into which you can create or place charts, clip art, tables, diagrams, or organization charts. Objects are sized and positioned by the "Click here..." blocks automatically.

Each "Click here..." graphics block displays one of the prompts shown below. When you click that prompt, Freelance Graphics displays the associated dialog box, which you use to create the chart or table or choose a clip art image.

Note	In content topics, SmartCharts and other "Click here..." blocks may have slightly different and more specific prompt text.

Clicking this prompt:	Opens this dialog box:
Click here to create chart	Create a Chart
Click here to add clip art	Add Clip Art or Diagram to the Page
Click here to create table	Table Gallery
Click here to create diagram	Add Diagram Gallery
Click here to create organization chart	Organization Chart Gallery
You can also drag objects into "Click here..." blocks. See Dragging an object into a "Click here..." block.

If you are using a content topic, some "Click here..." blocks may already be filled in with text or graphics. You can edit this text or replace the graphics as you like.

Modifying "Click here..." blocks

You can:

•	Customize "Click here..." prompts. See Customizing "Click here..." prompts.

•	Create your own "Click here..." blocks. See Creating a "Click here..." block for text, Creating a "Click here..." block for graphics, and Customizing "Click here..." prompts.

•	Use the "Click here..." block guide to automatically position objects on the page. See Overview: The "Click here..." block guide, Sizing or moving the "Click here..." block guide, Changing the ID of a "Click here..." block, and Changing the placement order of "Click here..." blocks.


What happens when you switch SmartMaster looks
Overview: What happens when you switch SmartMaster looks

When you switch SmartMaster looks, this is what happens:

•	Page layouts in the new SmartMaster look with the same names as the current page layouts are assigned to the appropriate presentation pages.

All supplied SmartMaster looks have the same type and number of page layouts. When you switch looks, Freelance Graphics reassigns page layouts to presentation pages or content pages by matching the names of the page layouts.

For example, a page assigned a page layout named "1 Chart" is assigned a page layout in another SmartMaster look that is also named "1 Chart."

•	If the new SmartMaster look does not have a page layout with the same name as the old page layout, Freelance Graphics assigns those pages to Basic Layout.

•	If a page did not have a page layout before the switch, it remains without a page layout after the switch.

•	The contents of the "Click here..." blocks are reassigned to the corresponding "Click here..." blocks on the new page layouts.

If the new page layouts have fewer "Click here..." blocks, the remaining text and graphics retain their size and position on the presentation page. However, they are no longer in "Click here..." blocks.

•	When you switch SmartMaster looks, you also switch to the palette associated with the look you switched to.


Choosing a SmartMaster look

You can quickly change the look of your presentation without changing the content.

1.	Choose Presentation - Choose a Different SmartMaster Look or click here [image].

2.	Click the Previous or Next arrows to display SmartMaster looks one at a time.

Note	You can browse through looks automatically (in alphabetical order) by clicking the Scan button. Click the Stop Scan button to halt the display.

3.	Highlight the name of the look you want to use, then click OK.

 See related topics


Sizing or moving the "Click here..." block guide

You can size or move the "Click here..." block guide to size and position "Click here..." blocks within its borders.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Backdrop.

2.	Click the edge of the "Click here..." block guide (the heavy dashed rectangle).

3.	Drag to size or move the "Click here..." block guide.

4.	Click Done.

Note	This will affect all pages that use the "Click here..." block guide (except pages that use the Title page layout). Only the current presentation or content topic is affected when you size or move the "Click here..." block guide. If you switch to a new SmartMaster look after sizing or moving the "Click here..." block guide, you will lose these changes.

 See related topics


Overview: Why edit SmartMaster looks and page layouts?

Generally, you will not need to modify page layouts. They have been carefully created by graphic designers to not only look good on their own, but to be interchangeable with all the other looks Freelance Graphics offers.

When you modify page layouts, you must be very careful, because you may disturb the interchangeable aspects of looks. However, you may want to customize looks and page layouts to:

•	Customize prompt text in "Click here..." blocks. For example, you might want to change "Click here to type text" to "Click here to type agenda."

Note	The problem with changing "Click here..." text on page layouts is that the new prompt text is lost when you switch looks. A better way to create customized prompt text is to create a SmartMaster with content. See Overview: Designing content topics.

•	Add text or graphics to every page in a presentation. For this, use Presentation - Add a Logo to Every Page. See Adding clip art or a logo to every page.

•	Create new page layouts (for advanced users). You can add page layouts to existing looks, but new page layouts will be lost if you switch looks. See Creating a new page layout.

Create a new look. Graphic designers can create SmartMaster looks from scratch or customize existing ones. See Overview: Ways to create your own content topics.


Adding clip art or a logo to every page

You can add a logo, clip art, or any other text and graphics to every page in your presentation that uses the backdrop (except title pages).

1.	Choose Presentation - Add a Logo to Every Page.

2.	Add clip art or draw the logo on the page.

Note	To add an image from the clip art library, choose Create - Add Clip Art.

3.	If you need to create more space for the logo, size the "Click here..." block guide (the heavy dashed rectangle).

Tip	Place the logo outside the "Click here..." block guide to ensure that the logo will not overlap text or graphics in "Click here..." blocks.

4.	Click Done.

Notes

To also add the logo to any page in your presentation that uses the Title page layout, choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts, select the Title page layout, and add the logo.

Only the current presentation is affected by changes to page layouts or to the backdrop. If you switch to a new SmartMaster look after customizing a page layout or the backdrop, you will lose all these changes. To save a SmartMaster look, choose File - Save As and save the file as a SmartMaster look file type.

 See related topics


Creating a "Click here..." block for text

You can add a "Click here..." text block to any page layout.

1.	Choose Presentation - Edit Page Layouts.

2.	Select the page layout you want to edit, then click Edit.

3.	Choose Create - "Click here" Block.

4.	Drag a box on the page where you want the "Click here..." block to be added.

Freelance Graphics places a "Click here..." text block on the page.

5.	(Optional) Resize the text block by dragging a selection handle.

6.	Click Done.

 See related topics


Overview: Designing content topics

Note	This section is for content topic designers and assumes a fairly advanced knowledge of Freelance Graphics, especially the structure of SmartMaster looks and an understanding of how "Click here..." blocks work.

Freelance Graphics comes with content topics that help automate the creation of a variety of presentation types, such as meetings, sales proposals, business plans, and project status reports.

You can even create your own content topic to serve as a standard format for your workgroup.

By designing a custom content topic, you ensure that each presentation you create using it will have the same basic format, the same core content, and a consistent look. You can customize an existing content topic, turn an existing presentation into a content topic, or create a new content topic from scratch.

By customizing existing content topics or even creating your own, you can:

•	Save time by automating frequent tasks. For example, if all your presentations include a similar agenda or quarterly sales figures depicted in charts, you can include these in the content topic so you will not need to create these pages from scratch each time you create a presentation.

•	Turn an existing presentation into a content topic to use as a basis for similar presentations.

•	Distribute a customized content topic to a workgroup to use as the corporate presentation standard.

•	Remind yourself to include the same boilerplate material (with updated information) in every presentation.

Content topics and SmartMaster looks

Before you customize an existing content topic, or create a new content topic, it is important to understand the difference between SmartMaster looks and SmartMaster content topics.

Looks provide a common set of page layouts (with "Click here..." blocks) and a common backdrop design. Content topics provide a set of content pages in a logical sequence, which may contain:

•	Task-specific prompts (such as "Click here to type agenda items").

•	Filled-in text, graphics, and charts which the user can use or replace.

•	Content advice to help the user fill in each content page.

•	Built-in automation, with the ability to attach a LotusScript file to a page, to a "Click here..." block, or to a button. These scripts are run automatically when a user chooses a new content page, clicks a "Click here..." block, or clicks a button. Some content topics also have startup scripts that run automatically when you create a new presentation using them.

•	SmartCharts that give users a predetermined chart type and style to which they need only add their own data.

When you print a content topic file, the "Click here..." prompts are not printed.


Adding filled-in text to content pages

Content pages usually display text that users can use as is or edit. These are typically titles such as "Agenda," or other items that change infrequently, such as a list of departments.

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Select a content page.

3.	Click the "Click here..." text block you want to fill with text.

4.	Choose "Click here" - Fill in "Click here" Block.

5.	Type the text you want to be displayed on the content page.

6.	Click OK.


Adding new "Click here..." blocks

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Select a content page.

3.	Choose Create - "Click here" Block.

4.	Drag a rectangle on the page to add the "Click here..." block.

5.	Double-click the "Click here..." block, then change the type and prompt as you like.

Note	Often, it is easiest to start with the "Click here..." blocks on page layouts as the basis for the customized "Click here..." blocks on your content pages.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Adding new "Click here..." blocks

Creating your own page layouts

Graphic artists, who have designed the page layouts included with every SmartMaster look, have placed the "Click here..." blocks carefully so they will not overlap or bump against other design elements on the presentation backdrop. If you want to create "Click here..." blocks from scratch, it is best to start with the Basic Layout page layout and add "Click here..." blocks as you need them.

Adding "Click here..." blocks to page layouts or content pages

You can add "Click here..." blocks to page layouts or content pages.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Adding descriptive information to a content topic

It is strongly recommended that you add a short title and description to a content topic to help users understand its purpose. To add a more detailed tip, see Creating content advice for users.

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Choose Presentation - SmartMaster Content Setup - Title & Description.

3.	Type a title and description.

Note	Content topics appear to the user in alphabetical order based on this title, not the file name of the content topic.

4.	Click OK.


Overview: Checklist for customizing a content topic

The easiest way to create your own content topic is to customize an existing one. Here are the general steps in the process.

•	To customize an existing content topic, edit a content topic. See Opening a content topic for editing.

•	To create customized content pages, browse through the content pages and choose the ones that most fit your needs. See Overview: Ways to create your own content topics.

•	To create new content pages from scratch, create a new page, choose an appropriate page layout, and then customize the "Click here..." blocks. See Changing the prompts in "Click here..." text blocks.

•	To add filled-in text or graphics that the user can use as is or edit, add text or graphics to "Click here..." blocks. See Adding filled-in text to content pages and Adding filled-in clip art to content pages.

•	To provide users with predefined charts to which they need only add their own data, create SmartCharts. See Creating a SmartChart.

•	To help users choose an appropriate content topic, enter a title and a description that users can view when they are browsing through the list of content topics. See Adding descriptive information to a content topic.

•	To help users choose the appropriate content page when they are creating a presentation, enter a title and brief description for each content page. See Creating new content pages.

•	To help users fill out content pages, add content advice. A clickable button will appear on every content page that contains content advice. See Creating content advice for users.

•	To set up a LotusScript file that runs automatically when a user takes certain actions, such as clicking a button or choosing a content page, attach a script file to a button or a content page. See Overview: Attaching scripts.


Changing the prompts in "Click here..." text blocks

You can change the text in "Click here..." text blocks (as in all "Click here..." blocks) to help users understand exactly what to put on the page (for example, "Click here to type marketing goals").

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Select a content page.

3.	Double-click the text block that contains the prompt you want to edit.

4.	Edit the prompt as you like.

5.	Click OK.

 See related topics


Adding filled-in clip art to content pages

Content pages can include filled-in clip art.

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Select a content page.

3.	Click the "Click here..." clip art block you want to fill with a clip art image.

4.	Choose "Click here" - Fill in "Click here" Block.

5.	From the clip art library, double-click the image you want to add to the page.

 See related topics


Creating a content topic from an existing presentation

If you find that you frequently create variations of the same basic presentation (say, a quarterly report), you can save time by using it as the basis for a new content topic.

1.	Choose File - Open to retrieve the presentation you would like to use as the basis of a new content topic.

2.	Choose File - Save As.

3.	Under Save as type, select "Lotus Freelance SmartMaster Content (SMC)."

4.	Type a file name and click OK.

Notes

Make sure you save the file in the \LOTUS\SMASTERS\FLG folder (directory) so that it will appear in the list when a user is choosing a content topic.

Now you can go through the presentation page by page and customize "Click here..." blocks, add filled-in text and clip art, add SmartCharts, or create new content pages.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating a content topic from an existing presentation

When you save a presentation as a content topic:

•	Each presentation page becomes a content page which users of the content topic will see when they click the New Page button. They will then see what were your presentation pages as a list of content pages.

•	If you entered a page name and description, these are displayed when the user chooses a content page. If you did not enter a page name, the text in the title block is used as the page name. If you did not enter a page name and there is no text in the title block, the page is listed as "Unnamed." If you did not enter a description, the description is left blank.

•	"Click here..." prompts become active "Click here..." prompts that initiate an action when users click them.

•	When you open a content topic for editing, "Click here..." blocks are selectable so that you can, for example, change the prompt text or text properties. To fill in a "Click here..." block when you are editing a content topic, choose "Click here" - Fill in "Click here" Block.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Ways to create your own content topics

There are several ways to go about creating your own content topic:

•	Customize an existing content topic. Use this approach when an existing content topic has almost everything you need. Perhaps you need to edit a few prompts, or add a couple of content pages. The most common changes will be customizing "Click here..." prompts, filling in "Click here..." blocks with text or graphics, and creating SmartCharts. This is the easiest way to create your own content topics. See Opening a content topic for editing.

•	Start with an existing presentation and save it as a content topic. If you have a presentation of your own that you want to use as the basis for a new content topic, use this approach. See Creating a content topic from an existing presentation.

•	See also Overview:Checklist for customizing a content topic.


Opening a content topic for editing

1.	Choose File - Open.

2.	Click the "Look in" box and select the \LOTUS\SMASTERS\FLG folder (directory) (or the folder where the .SMC files are stored).

3.	Under Files of type, select Lotus Freelance SmartMaster Content (SMC).

4.	Double-click the name of the content topic you want to open.

 See related topics


Creating a SmartChart

When a content page contains a SmartChart, both the "Click here..." text and a small image of the chart are visible. When users click the prompt text, the original data disappears and they can enter their own data. The chart type, style, and attributes are predefined.

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Click the New Page button, select a chart page layout, and click OK.

3.	Click the "Click here..." chart block.

4.	Choose "Click here" - SmartChart - Create.

5.	Select a chart type and style and click OK.

6.	Enter labels, legends, and data.

7.	Click OK.

A small image of the chart appears.

8.	To customize the prompt text, double-click it, make your changes, then click OK.

 See related topics


Converting a chart to a SmartChart

When you are editing a content topic, you can transform an existing chart into a SmartChart. To create a SmartChart, see Creating a SmartChart.

1.	Click a chart.

Note	The chart you want to convert must be in a "Click here..." chart block.

2.	Choose Chart - Convert Chart to SmartChart.

You will see a "Click here..." chart block with the standard prompt text and a small image of the chart. When the content topic user clicks the prompt text in a presentation, the chart data window will open, and the user can type his or her data.

3.	To customize the prompt text, double-click it, make your changes, then click OK.

 See related topics


Deleting a SmartChart

When you delete a SmartChart, the original "Click here..." chart block is restored.

1.	Click the SmartChart.

2.	Choose "Click here" - SmartChart - Delete.


Modifying a SmartChart

You can change the data, type, and style for a SmartChart.

1.	Click the SmartChart block.

2.	Choose "Click here" - SmartChart - Edit.

3.	Edit the chart data, type, or style.

Note	The data you enter determines the image of the chart in the "Click here..." chart block as it appears to content topic users. When users click on the prompt, the data disappears so they can enter their own data.

4.	Click OK.

 See related topics


Overview: Attaching scripts

With LotusScript, you can automate a wide range of actions in Freelance Graphics. By stringing together a number of simple actions, you can perform relatively complex tasks. After you write a script, you can set up a presentation or content topic to run this script automatically based on various trigger points.

As a content topic designer, you can attach a script:

•	To be run when a user creates a new presentation using a content topic. See Setting up a starting script.

•	To a page, so that when a content topic user chooses that content page, the script is run automatically. See Attaching a script to a content page.

•	To a "Click here..." block, so the script runs automatically when the user clicks on the prompt text. See Attaching a script to a "Click here..." block.

•	To a button, so that the script is run when the user clicks the button. See Creating a script button.


Attaching a script to a content page

You can create a script that runs when the user chooses a new content page. Such a script might take information from an already filled-in page and place it on a current page.

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Click the New Page button.

3.	Select a page layout for the new page and click OK.

4.	Choose Layout - Page Properties.

Note	Make sure no object on the page is selected, so the Layout menu will appear.

5.	Click the Edit/Create button to open the IDE.

6.	Select the Page object in the Object drop-down box of the IDE.

7.	Select the event you want to use in the Script drop-down box of the IDE.

8.	Write your script.

9.	In the IDE menu, choose File - Save Scripts.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Attaching a script to a content page

Example

' This script puts up a message box as soon as the user selects
' this SmartMaster page as a template for a presentation page.

Sub Created(Source As Page)

Messagebox "You have just seleted this template. To make " + _
  "the best use of it, fill in all the information as " + _
  "completely as possible."

End Sub

 Go to procedure


Creating a script button

Clicking a script button in a content topic launches a LotusScript file. A script button has prompt text to inform the user of the action clicking it will initiate (for example, "Click here to add a goal"). When the user clicks this button, the script will add a row to a table, so you can enter a new goal.

1.	Choose Create - "Click here" Block.

2.	Drag a box on the page where you want the "Click here..." block to be added.

Freelance Graphics places a "Click here..." text block on the page.

3.	Click the right mouse button over the "Click here..." block and choose "Click here..." Block Properties.

4.	Click the Basics tab.

5.	Under Type of block, select Button.

6.	Click the text in the button, edit the prompt as you like, then click OK.

7.	Click the Basics tab again.

8.	Click the Edit/Create button to open the IDE.

9.	Select the Button object in the Object drop-down box of the IDE.

10.	Select the Click event in the Script drop-down box of the IDE.

11.	Write your script.

12.	In the IDE menu, choose File - Save Scripts.

 See related topics


Attaching a script to a "Click here..." block

When you are editing a content topic, you can attach a script to a "Click here..." block that is executed when a user clicks the block. For example, you could set up a script to automatically open the clip art library to an appropriate category.

1.	Click the right mouse button over a "Click here..." block.

2.	Choose "Click here...." Block Properties.

3.	Click the Basics tab.

4.	Click the Edit/Create button to open the IDE.

5.	Select the PlacementBlock object in the Object drop-down box of the IDE.

6.	Select the Click event in the Script drop-down box of the IDE.

7.	Write your script.

8.	In the IDE menu, choose File - Save Scripts.

9.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Attaching a script to a "Click here..." block

Example

The following script opens the clip art library to the category PROJECT.SYM when the user clicks the prompt "Click here to add project clip art." To open the clip art library to another category, replace PROJECT.SYM in this example with the category name of your choice.

sub main

CurrentPage.CreateSymbol ("project.sym")

end sub

When the user clicks the prompt "Click here to add project clip art," the following script opens the clip art library to the category PROJECT.SYM. To open the clip art library to another category, replace PROJECT.SYM in this example with the category name of your choice.

sub Clicked(Source As PlacmentBlock)

CurrentPage.CreateSymbol ("project.sym")

end sub

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Setting up a starting script

You can set up a LotusScript file to run when a user starts a presentation using a content topic. For example, a message box can request information from the user that will be placed automatically on various content pages, such as, the presenter's name, a product name, or a date.

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Choose Presentation - SmartMaster Content Setup - Startup Script.

3.	Select the Page object in the Object drop-down box of the IDE.

4.	Select the Create event in the Script drop-down box of the IDE.

5.	Write your script.

6.	In the IDE menu, choose File - Save Scripts.

 See related topics


Creating new content pages

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	Click the New Page button.

3.	Select the page layout you want to use as the basis for the content page.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add more content pages.

Note	To complete the content page, you can add new or edit existing "Click here..." blocks, add filled-in text or graphics, create a SmartChart, or attach a script.

 See related topics


Creating content advice for users

Users can view content advice for a content page by clicking the Content Advice button. Content advice should focus on the actual content of a page, not the process of completing the page. Unless a content page is self-explanatory, you should enter content advice for every content page in your content topic.

1.	Open a content topic.

2.	With nothing selected on the page, choose Layout - Page Properties.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Type any information you want for helping the user complete this content page.

5.	Click OK.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.


Overview: What is a content topic?

A content topic helps automate the process of creating a presentation by providing not only a common style and look for your presentation pages, but actual content as well.

Content topics are based on SmartMaster looks, but also provide these components:

•	Pages with task-specific prompts and content suggestions (for example, "Click here to add sales of key products or services").

•	Content advice that makes suggestions on how to fill out content pages.

•	Actual content in the form of filled-in text and graphics (such as tables, diagrams, and clip art).

•	Guided charts with the chart type and style already chosen for you. You just add your own data.

•	Automation in the form of LotusScript files that can be activated when you start new pages or click on prompts or buttons.

You can choose from a number of content topics, each tailored to a particular presentation format, such as Business Plan, Market Research, or Project Status. A business plan, for example, should have an executive summary, a competitive analysis, and a marketing message.

By providing actual pages (partially filled with content) for each of these components, content topics let you concentrate on the details unique to your own business plan.

If you need a format not covered by the content topics shipped with Freelance Graphics, you can customize existing content topics or turn any presentation into a content topic. See Overview: Designing content topics.

Note	SmartMaster content topics are provided solely for your convenience. Lotus provides no assurances that use of the SmartMaster content topics or their suggested structure will produce an effective analysis or presentation.


Starting and stopping using a content topic

Using a content topic helps you create your presentation more quickly and efficiently. You can start using a content topic even if you have created a presentation without using one.

1.	To start using a content topic and to choose from content pages, choose Presentation - SmartMaster Content - Select a Topic.

2.	To stop using a content topic and to create new pages from page layouts exclusively, choose Presentation - SmartMaster Content - Stop Using.

Notes

When you are using a content topic, you can choose from content pages or page layouts. When you are not using a content topic, you can choose from page layouts only.

Creating a presentation using a content topic uses more memory than creating a presentation without a content topic.


Editing filled-in text

Content pages often include filled-in text, which you can edit to suit your needs.

1.	Double-click the text block.

2.	Enter or edit the text.

3.	Click OK.


Adding data to SmartCharts

You can create a chart simply by adding your own data to a pre-selected chart type and style. A descriptive prompt (such as "Click here to create a market share chart...") reveals the content and a small picture shows the chart type and style.

1.	Click the descriptive "Click here..." SmartChart prompt text.

2.	In the Edit Data window, type your own data.

Note that the labels and legends are already filled in.

3.	Click OK.


Replacing filled-in clip art or diagrams

Some content pages include clip art or ready-made diagrams. You can replace a clip art image or diagram with a new one.

1.	Click the clip art image or diagram you want to replace.

2.	Choose Edit - Cut.

3.	Click the "Click here..." clip art or diagram block.

Note	Often, the clip art library opens to a category related to the content page you are using. This makes it easier for you to choose another appropriate symbol. To view ready-made diagrams instead of clip art, click the Diagrams button.

4.	Highlight the name of a clip art or diagram category.

5.	Double-click the clip art image or ready-made diagram you want to add.

 See related topics


Creating a new presentation using a content topic

1.	Choose a content topic to get a head start on your presentation.

A content topic contains pages that guide you through the process of creating specific types of presentations, such as a business plan or a project update. Content pages use a fill-in-the-blanks approach by suggesting appropriate text and graphics.

Note	To create a presentation without content pages, select "No content topic."

2.	(Optional) Choose a look for your presentation. Each content topic has an associated look, although you can choose another if you like.

A look automates the design of your presentation by controlling its overall appearance and by taking care of design elements such as fonts and colors.

3.	Click OK.


Creating a new presentation

1.	Choose File - New Presentation.

2.	Select a content topic to choose from task-specific pages containing suggestions for content as well as actual content. Read the description on the right to help you make your choice.

3.	Select a look by highlighting the name of a design you like. The design appears to the right of the selected look.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Select a content page from the next panel and click OK.

Note	To choose a page layout from the SmartMaster look with no pre-defined content (such as Bulleted List), click the "Page Layouts" tab, select the page layout you want, and click OK.

6.	Complete the content page by clicking the "Click here..." blocks and entering the requested information.

Note	Content pages include task-specific content already filled in for you. You can accept this content as is or customize it. See Editing filled-in text.

7.	(Optional) Click the New Page button and select another content page or page layout.

8.	Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each new page you want to add to your presentation.

Note	To choose multiple content pages, click "Choose Multiple Content Pages," then follow the instructions on the screen.

 See details


Details: Creating a new presentation

Using content pages

The pages in a content topic are ordered in a logical sequence for the type of presentation you are creating. Each time you click the New Page button, Freelance Graphics highlights the next content page for you automatically. You can choose content pages in any order you want, skip those you do not need, or even use the same content page more than once.

Using page layouts

As you create your presentation using a content topic, you may want to use a page layout instead of a content page. You can do this when you need to add a page for which a content page is not appropriate. For example, if you want to add a bulleted list of topics specific to your business, choose the Bulleted List page layout.

To do this, after you click the New Page button, click the Page Layouts tab to view and choose from a list of standard page layouts.

 Go to procedure


Overview: What is a SmartMaster?

A SmartMaster gives you a head start with both the content and the look of your presentation. When you create a new presentation, you can choose a content topic or use page layouts.

•	If you choose a content topic--for example, Brainstorming Session, Business Plan, or Project Proposal--you can choose from a set of pages for a specific type of presentation, such as a business plan or a nonprofit proposal. The pages in a content topic contain actual content that you can use as a starting point. For more information on content topics, see Overview: What is a content topic?.

•	If you choose page layouts, you can add your own content to common page formats such as title pages and bulleted lists.

SmartMaster looks

Whether you choose a content topic or page layouts, you also choose a look for your presentation. Content topics come with suggested looks, or you can choose your own.

A look is a collection of page layouts with a common background design. A look automates the design of your presentation by controlling its overall appearance and by taking care of design elements such as fonts and colors.

Although page layouts have different formats, they all share the same graphic style that characterizes a particular look, which gives you a consistent presentation. Each look has two palettes: one for color and one for black and white. For more information, see Overview: Color palettes.

Because each look contains the same page layouts, you can switch looks at any time to change the overall design of your presentation without changing the content or layout of each page. For example, when you change to a different look, the background design and the position of the title and subtitle of your title page may change depending on the layout of the new look, but the content will remain the same.

Page layouts

The page layouts in every SmartMaster look are:

•	Title

•	Bulleted List

•	2-Column Bullets

•	1 Chart

•	2 Charts

•	4 Charts

•	Bullets & Chart

•	Bullets & Clip Art

•	Organization Chart

•	Table

•	Diagram

•	Basic Layout (a page with just a "Click here..." title block)

•	Blank Page (a page with nothing on it)

The backdrop

The backdrop is the design source for the SmartMaster look. Characteristics common to all page layouts in the set (except the Title page)--such as the background color and graphic components--are created on the backdrop.

All the page layouts in a look, except Title, use the backdrop as a starting point. You can modify the backdrop page to customize a look. See Customizing the backdrop.

The Title page layout

The Title page has its own page layout, and is not controlled by the backdrop, because it often has a different design from the rest of a presentation.


Spell Check dialog box

Use the Spell Check dialog box to check and correct spelling. The correct spelling is based on a dictionary you can customize to include any words.

Choose a task

Checking and correcting spelling

Changing Spell Check options

Customizing the user dictionary

Selecting a different language dictionary


Checking and correcting spelling

1.	Choose Edit - Check Spelling or click here [image].

2.	Select the parts of the presentation you want to spell check.

3.	Click OK.

A dialog box appears if a word is not found in the dictionary.

4.	To correct a word, select a word from the Alternatives list, or edit the word in the Replace with box, then click replace.

5.	To keep the original spelling, click Skip.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each unrecognized word.

Tip	 To quickly check the spelling of one or more words, select the text or text blocks and press CTRL + F2.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Checking and correcting spelling

Replacing, skipping, and adding words

If a word in your presentation does not match any word in the main dictionary or the user dictionary, you can:

Click:	To:
Replace	Correct the spelling of only this occurrence of the word.
Replace All	Correct the spelling of the current word and all subsequent occurrences.
Skip	Ignore this occurrence of the word, but stop on the next occurrence.
Skip All	Ignore all occurrences of the word.
Add To Dictionary	Add the word as spelled to the user dictionary.  This option is dimmed if the language for the current user dictionary does not match the language dictionary you are using.
Checking spelling in Outliner view

In Outliner view, you can choose to check all displayed text in the outline or selected text only. Collapsed text does not get checked.

Checking spelling in embedded objects

Freelance Graphics cannot check spelling in embedded objects. To check spelling in an embedded object, use the application that created the objects.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Customizing the user dictionary

You can add words to the current user dictionary that are unique to your company or business. Freelance Graphics will then recognize them as being spelled correctly.

1.	Choose Edit - Check Spelling or click here [image].

2.	Click Edit Dictionary.

•	To add a new word, type it in the New word box and click Add.

•	To delete a word, select it in the Current words list and click Delete.

Note	This option is dimmed if the current user dictionary does not match the language dictionary you are using. See Overview: Language and user dictionaries.

3.	Click OK to close the Spell Check User's Dictionary dialog box.

4.	Click OK to begin checking spelling.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Customizing the user dictionary

If you add a word with an initial capital letter to the user dictionary, Spell Check accepts only a spelling of that word with an initial capital letter.

If you add a word with an initial lowercase letter to the user dictionary, Spell Check also accepts the word spelled with an initial capital letter.

If you add a word in all capital letters to the user dictionary, Spell Check accepts a spelling of that word with all capital letters.

 Go to procedure


Selecting a different language dictionary

You can check the spelling of words in other languages.

1.	Choose Edit - Check Spelling or click here [image].

2.	Click Language Options.

3.	Select the language you want to use.

4.	Click OK to close the Spell Check Language dialog box.

5.	Click OK to begin checking spelling.

 See details


Details: Selecting a different language dictionary

Freelance Graphics provides dictionaries in several languages. You can select only one language dictionary at a time. Use the language options when you are preparing a presentation in another language, or if you are including foreign words or phrases.

Freelance Graphics also lists the user dictionaries from other Lotus products installed on your computer.  (User dictionaries let you store specialized terms to use as an addendum to your language dictionary so that these terms are recognized as being spelled correctly.) If a user dictionary was created for a specific language and you select another language dictionary, you may want to select a user dictionary for that language as well. Otherwise, you will not be able to add words to that user dictionary. See Overview: Language and user dictionaries.

When a user dictionary is created without a specific language, you can add words to it, regardless of the language dictionary you are using.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Language and user dictionaries

What is a language dictionary?

Freelance Graphics provides dictionaries in several languages. You choose a language dictionary for the language you are working in to check the spelling of words in your presentation. You can select only one language dictionary at a time.

What is a user dictionary?

User dictionaries let you store specialized terms to use as an addendum to your language dictionary so that these terms are recognized as being spelled correctly. Freelance Graphics lists the user dictionaries from other Lotus products installed on your computer. You can not create user dictionaries in Freelance Graphics.

For example, suppose you are going to make a presentation at a medical conference in France. Since your presentation is in French, you use the French language dictionary to check the spelling of the words in your presentation. You may also choose a user dictionary that you created in another Lotus product to add special medical terms that you plan to use in your presentation. When you spell check, Freelance Graphics checks the spelling of words in your presentation against the spelling of words in both your current language and user dictionaries.

Working with language and user dictionaries

When you create a user dictionary in another Lotus product, you have the option of choosing a language for that user dictionary. If a user dictionary was created with a language, to add words to it you must also be using the same language dictionary. For example, suppose you created a German user dictionary in Word Pro, which you then use in Freelance Graphics. To add words to that user dictionary, you must be using the German language dictionary in Freelance Graphics.

Note	When a user dictionary is created without a specific language, you can add words to it, regardless of the language dictionary you are using.

 See related topics


Changing Spell Check options

You can specify certain options, such as finding repeated words, that are not part of the default spell check.

1.	Choose Edit - Check Spelling or click here [image].

2.	Click Options.

3.	Select one or more Spell Check options.

See details

4.	Click OK to close the Spell Check Options dialog box.

5.	Click OK to begin checking spelling.

 See details


Details: Changing Spell Check options

Spell Check options provide more ways to check for typing errors. These options include:

•	Check for repeated words. For example, the the.

•	Check words with numbers. For example, 1st.

•	Check words with initial capital letters. For example, Europe.

•	Provide a list of alternative spellings from the language and user dictionaries. If this option is dimmed, Freelance Graphics lists alternative spellings only from the language dictionary.

•	Provide a list of user dictionaries from other Lotus products installed on your computer.  See Selecting a different user dictionary.

 Go to procedure


Selecting a different user dictionary

You can choose any of the user dictionaries from other Lotus products installed on your computer. You can not create or delete user dictionaries in Freelance Graphics.

1.	Choose Edit - Check Spelling or click here [image].

2.	Click Options.

3.	Under User dictionary to use, select the user language you want to use.

4.	Click OK to close the Spell Check Options dialog box.

5.	Click OK to begin the spelling check.

 See details


Details: Selecting a different user dictionary

User dictionaries let you store specialized terms to use as an addendum to your language dictionary so that these terms are recognized as being spelled correctly. Freelance Graphics lists the user dictionaries from other Lotus products installed on your computer. You can not create user dictionaries in Freelance Graphics.

When a user dictionary is created in another Lotus product, you have the option of choosing a language for that user dictionary. If a user dictionary was created with a language and you select a different language dictionary, you may want to select a user dictionary for that language as well.  Otherwise, you will not be able to add words to that user dictionary. See Overview: Language and user dictionaries.

When a user dictionary is created without a specific language, you can add words to it, regardless of the language dictionary you are using.

If you do not have any Lotus products that have user dictionaries installed on your computer, Freelance Graphics provides a blank default user dictionary, LTSUSER.UDC. This user dictionary was created without a specific language. This means you can add words to it, regardless of the language dictionary you are using.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Using LotusScript

LotusScript is a scripting language used by a number of Lotus products. LotusScript lets you create custom dialog boxes to automate common tasks and processes, create programs that integrate and share data from other Lotus applications, and automate the creation of documents using content topics.

LotusScript is an object-oriented BASIC language which is compatible with, and easily integrates with, Visual Basic.

Accessing LotusScript Help

For more information on LotusScript, click one of the topics below.

LotusScript Index

Freelance Graphics LotusScript A-Z

Freelance Graphics Classes

Freelance Graphics Events

Freelance Graphics Methods

Freelance Graphics Properties

Chart Classes

Chart Methods

Chart Properties


Overview: Speaker notes

A speaker note is a note that is associated with a presentation page. You can use speaker notes as prompts while you are giving your presentation, as storage places for supporting facts or data sources, or as messages to colleagues who might also deliver your presentation.

You can create one speaker note for each presentation page. There is no limit to the amount of text you can put in a speaker note, however, there is a limit to the amount of text you can print (it is dependent on the font).

You see speaker note text only when you open the Speaker Note window or when you choose to print speaker notes with the presentation. A speaker note is not part of the presentation page.

You can print the presentation page and its speaker note together on one page, or you can print multiple presentation pages with the speaker notes all on one page. See Printing speaker notes for a formal presentation or Printing training or reference materials.

Speaker note text attributes

You can change the text attributes for all speaker notes in a presentation or you can override the default settings. You can change font, font size, add bullets, and make text bold, italic, underline, superscript, subscript, and strikethrough.

Where can you create speaker notes?

You can create and edit speaker notes in TeamShow, in Rehearse mode, and in Current Page, Page Sorter, and Outliner views. See Creating speaker notes.

You can also use speaker notes in World Wide Web presentations. See Creating WWW presentations.

Pages that have speaker notes

The following table shows what the speaker note icon looks like when there is no speaker note on a page and when there is one. It is the same for all views, including Rehearse mode and TeamShow:

View or mode:	Page without a       speaker note:	Page with a           speaker note:
All

In Outliner and Page Sorter views there is an additional Speaker Note button. The following table shows how the button looks in those views:

View or mode:	Page without a      speaker note:	Page with a           speaker note:
Page Sorter	No bitmap
Outliner	No bitmap


Speaker note window

Choose a task:

Editing speaker notes

Changing attributes for speaker note text and bullets

Changing default attributes for all speaker note text and bullets

Navigating in text in speaker notes

Paging through speaker notes

Selecting text in speaker notes

Zooming in or out of speaker notes

Overview: Speaker notes

 See related topics


Changing attributes for speaker note text and bullets

1.	Choose Page - Open Speaker Note.

Note	If you are in Rehearse mode, click the Speaker Note button.

2.	Drag to highlight the text or bullets you want to change.

Note	To change the attributes of a single bullet, place the mouse pointer on the line where the bullet appears.

3.	Choose Text - Text Properties from the Speaker Note window.

4.	Select the font name, size, and any attributes you want to use.

5.	(Optional) Under Bullet, select a style.

6.	(Optional) To apply these settings to all speaker notes, select "Apply to all speaker notes."

Note	This changes the default settings for new speaker notes you create.

7.	Click OK to return to the Speaker Note window.

8.	Click OK.

Note	To revert text and bullets to the default styles, highlight the text and choose Text - Reset to Default from the Speaker Note window. However, you cannot revert if you have just selected "Apply to all speaker notes."

 See details


Details: Changing attributes for speaker note text and bullets

Changing all text attributes

Choosing Text - Apply Style to All Speaker Notes has no effect on text that has a local override. For example, if a word has italic attributes, it will stay italic.

Note	You cannot revert to the original settings once you choose Text - Apply Style to All Speaker Notes.

Changing selected text attributes

You can change text font, font size, and attributes by using the Text menu in the Speaker Note window.

 Go to procedure


Creating speaker notes

1.	Choose Create - Speaker Note.

2.	Type the contents of your speaker note.

3.	To create a speaker note for another page in the presentation, move to the next or previous page by choosing View - Next or View - Previous in the Speaker Note window.

4.	Click OK.

Note	When you go to the next or previous speaker note, you save the speaker note you have created.

 See related topics


Changing default attributes for all speaker note text and bullets

This procedure changes the default settings.

1.	Choose Page - Create Speaker Note. If you have already created a speaker note for the current page, choose Page - Open Speaker Note.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties from the Speaker Note window.

3.	Select the font name, size, and any attributes you want to use.

4.	(Optional) Under Bullets, select a style.

5.	Select "Apply to all speaker notes."

See details

6.	Click OK to return to the Speaker Note window.

7.	Click OK.

Note	When you select text and choose Text - Reset to Default, highlighted text and bullets will revert to the defaults you set here.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing default attributes for all speaker note text and bullets

Apply attributes to all speaker notes and default attributes

To make the attributes you select apply to all speaker notes in this presentation, and to make these selections the default for all subsequent speaker notes in this and other presentations, select "Apply to all speaker notes" when you are in the Text Properties for Speaker Note dialog box.

Alternatively, you can highlight the text whose attributes you want to use for all speaker notes in the Speaker Note window, then choose Text - Apply Style to All Speaker Notes.

Note	Attributes will not apply to text that has a local override. For example, if a word has italic attributes, it will stay italic.

Reset to default style

If you make changes to text attributes within a speaker note, you can make text revert to the default style by highlighting the text and choosing Text - Reset to Default from the Speaker Note window.

 Go to procedure


Deleting speaker notes

1.	Choose Page - Delete Speaker Note.

Note	When you are in Outliner view, you must have an entire page selected for this command to be available.

2.	Select to delete the speaker notes on the current page or on all pages.

Note	In Page Sorter and Outliner views, the options are between selected pages and all pages.

3.	Click OK.

4.	You are asked whether or you want to carry out the deletion, if you do, click Continue.

Note	Once you delete a speaker note, you cannot restore it.

 See related topics


Editing speaker notes

1.	Choose Page - Open Speaker Note.

2.	Edit the speaker note.

3.	To edit a speaker note for another page in the presentation, move to the next or previous page by choosing View - Next or View - Previous in the Speaker Note window.

4.	Click OK.

 See related topics


Paging through speaker notes

To page through all the speaker notes in a presentation, do one of the following:

To move to:	Click:	Or choose:
The next page		View - Next
The previous page		View - Previous
 See related topics


Zooming in or out of speaker notes

When you are in the Speaker Note window, you can make the text of a speaker note appear larger or smaller by zooming in or out.

To zoom:	Click:	Or choose:
In		View - Zoom In
Out		View - Zoom Out
Note	Zooming in or out of a speaker note does not affect the size of the printed text. To change the size of the printed text, see Changing attributes for speaker note text and bullets.


Adding a movie

 Show me a demo

1.	Choose Create - Add Movie.

2.	Under Files of type, select the type of movie.

3.	Select the movie you want to add.

4.	Under Store in presentation, select whether to embed or link the file.

5.	(Optional) To preview the movie, click Preview.

6.	Click Open.

Note	When you add a movie to the page, it appears as a projector icon or, if the movie consists of an actor and a path, you see a rectangle that represents the actor's path.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Adding a movie

If you have more than one movie on a page, one movie must finish playing before the next one begins.

The next event in your screen show (an object appearing, a sound playing, the next page appearing, and so on) will not begin until a movie is finished playing.

You can stop a movie while it is playing by pressing ESC, ENTER, or PAGE DOWN, or by clicking the mouse. However, doing so could trigger the next media event if it has been set to appear "On click."

If the movie consists of an actor and a path, for example, an airplane (the actor) flying from left to right (the path), you can drag the rectangle to extend or shrink the path that the airplane travels.

You can change the placement of a movie by dragging the icon to a different location on the page.

If you see an empty rectangle when you add a movie, it is because the page is too small for the icon to fit in the rectangle. To see the icon, you can zoom in on the page by choosing View - Zoom In.

 Go to procedure


Attaching movies to objects or text

1.	Click the right mouse button over the object or text and choose the Properties command.

2.	Click the Screen Show tab.

3.	Under Action when object/text block is clicked, select "Play movie."

4.	Select a movie.

5.	Under Store in presentation, select whether to embed or link the file.

6.	Click Open.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See related topics


Setting options for AVI movies

1.	Double-click the movie icon.

2.	Click Options.

3.	To make the movie play continuously, select "Play continuously."

4.	To make the movie play a specific number of times, select "Play n time(s)" and enter a number.

Note	If you linked the movie when you first added it, you can choose to embed it now, under Store in presentation.


Setting options for AVI movies attached to objects or text

You must first attach a movie to an object or text before you can set options for it.

1.	Click the right mouse button over the object or text block and choose the Properties command.

2.	Under Action when object is clicked, click the Options button.

3.	To make the movie play continuously, select "Play continuously."

4.	To make the movie play a specific number of times, select "Play n time(s)" and enter a number.

Note	Press ESC or click the mouse while a movie is playing to stop it.

5.	To change the location of the movie, select a location.

6.	Click OK.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	If you linked the movie when you first added it, you can choose to embed it now, under Store in presentation.

 See related topics


Setting options for Gold Disk movies

Freelance Graphics comes with a catalog of Gold Disk Add Impact (.AIM) movies.

1.	Double-click the movie icon.

2.	Click the Options.

3.	To make the movie play in a loop, select "Play continuously."

4.	To make the movie play a specific number of times, select "Play n time(s)" and enter a number.

5.	To make the last frame of the movie stay on the screen when the movie finishes playing, select "Hold last frame."

6.	To change the speed at which the movie plays, select a speed

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox..

Note	If you linked the movie when you first added it, you can choose to embed it now, under Store in presentation.


Setting options for Gold Disk movies attached to objects or text

Freelance Graphics comes with a catalog of Gold Disk Add Impact (.AIM) movies. You must attach a movie to an object or text before you can set options for it.

1.	Click the right mouse button over the object or text block and choose the Properties command.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	To make the movie play continuously, select "Play continuously."

4.	To make the movie play a specific number of times, select "Play n time(s)" and enter a number.

Note	Press ESC or click the mouse while a movie is playing to stop it.

5.	To make the last frame of the movie stay on the screen when the movie finishes playing, select "Hold last frame."

6.	To change the speed at which the movie plays, select a speed.

7.	To change the location of the movie, select a location.

8.	Click OK.

9.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	If you linked the movie when you first added it, you can choose to embed it now, under Store in presentation.

 See related topics


Overview: Movies and sound

By adding movies and sound effects to a screen show, you turn it into a multimedia presentation.

Types of movies

Freelance Graphics comes with a catalog of Gold Disk Add Impact movies (.AIM), can play Gold Disk Add Impact or Animation Works movies (.AWM) of your own, and also supports all movie types that are supported by Windows Media Control Interface (MCI). See Adding a movie.

Playing a movie

You have a number of choices for how to make a movie begin playing. One way is to have the movie appear as an icon so that you can click it during a screen show to make it play. Another way is to have the page appear and then simply have the movie begin playing. In this case, you can choose to have the movie play when you click the mouse or after a set number of seconds. See Controlling when a movie begins playing.

Movie options

Depending on the type of movie file you use, you can loop a movie so it plays continuously or for a specific number of times; you can adjust the speed at which it plays; and you can have the last image stay on the screen after the movie plays. See Setting options for AVI movies and Setting options for Gold Disk movies.

Movie buttons

If you want to change the look of the standard movie icon, you can attach a movie to an object or text. See Attaching movies to objects or text. During a screen show, click the text or object and have the movie play. In fact, the Freelance Graphics Clip Art library has a great selection of buttons that are designed just for this purpose. See Adding clip art to one page.

Sequencing movies

Initially, movies play in the order you add them to the page. You can easily resequence them. See Sequencing objects.

Movies and screen resolution

For Gold Disk movies, the bitmaps which movies are made of scale depending on what screen resolution they are played on. Movies appear the same size, relative to other objects on the page, when played on a screen resolution that differs from the one on which the presentation was created.

For example, if you create a screen show with your monitor set to VGA and your coworker plays the screen show on a monitor set to SVGA, movies, like other objects on the page, enlarge to fit the higher resolution.

Likewise, if you change screen resolutions and your presentation has AVI movies, the AVI movies scale along with everything else on the page.

Resizing the area in which a movie plays

When you add a movie to a page, it appears as a projector icon within a rectangle. The rectangle represents the area in which the movie plays. If a movie consists of an actor and a path--for example, a bicyclist (the actor) riding from left to right across the screen (its path)--you can resize the rectangle to change the actor's path.

In the case of Gold Disk movies, resizing the rectangle will not change the size of the actor but alters the area in which it moves in. In the case of AVI movies, resizing will scale the entire movie--the actor and its path. Some other MCI movie types do not scale at all. If you resize the rectangle, the movie continues to play in its original size.

Types of sound

Freelance Graphics comes with a catalog of Wave files (.WAV). You can also use your own Wave files or MIDI clips (.MID) with Freelance Graphics.

Playing a sound

To add sound to a presentation, you attach a sound file to an object on a page. Once you do so, you can control when the sound begins to play, how many times to play it, and whether it should finish playing before the presentation moves on to the next event. See Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text and Setting sound options.

Embedding or referring to sound and movie files

When you add a sound or a movie to a page, you have the choice of embedding the sound or movie, or referring to the sound or movie.

Embed movies and sound files if you want to create a presentation that is easily portable. For example, if you embed movies in your presentation and then send your presentation to someone via the  mobile screen show player or TeamReview, you can send the presentation complete with its movies. When you embed a movie, it becomes part of the presentation and increases the size of the presentation.

If you want to keep the size of your presentation to a minimum, rather than embedding them, you can refer to movies and sound files, essentially creating a link from the presentation to the movie or sound file. Then, rather than storing a movie or sound file with the presentation, Freelance Graphics stores only the path and file name of the movie or sound file.

If you choose to link your files, deselect "Prepare for Mobile Screen Show Player" when you save your file the first time, or Freelance Graphics will convert the linked files to embedded files.


Controlling when a movie begins playing

1.	Click the movie icon.

2.	Choose Movie - Screen Show Effects.

3.	If you want to see the movie icon so you can click it during a screen show, select "Display movie as icon on page (click icon to play)."

4.	If you want to have the movie begin playing once the page appears (so that the movie icon does not show up on screen), select "Display page first, then play movie."

To make the movie begin playing when you click the mouse, select "On click." To make the movie begin playing after a set time, select "After n seconds" and enter the number of seconds.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See related topics


Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the right mouse button over the object or text and choose the Properties command for the object.

•	Go to the page you want to attach the sound to, and choose Page - Screen Show Effects.

2.	Click the Screen Show tab.

3.	If you are attaching sound to an object or text, select "Display page first, then display object/text."

4.	Click Browse.

5.	Under Files of type, select the type of sound file you want to use.

6.	Select a sound.

7.	Under Store in presentation, select whether to embed or link the file.

8.	(Optional) To preview the sound, click Play.

9.	Click Open.

10.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	To delete a sound, highlight its name in the screen show panel of the object's InfoBox and press DELETE.

 See related topics


Setting sound options

1.	Do one of the following:

•	If the sound is attached to an object or text block, click the right mouse button over the object or text block and choose the Properties command for the text block or object.

•	If the sound is attached to a page, go to the page and choose Page - Screen Show Effects.

2.	Click the Screen Show tab.

3.	Click Options.

4.	If you want the sound to play as the object, text, or page appears, select "During transition."

5.	If you want the sound to play after the object, text, or page appears, select "After transition."

Note	If you select "After transition" you can also choose whether to play the sound continuously or a certain number of times.

6.	To have the sound complete playing before the screen show moves on to the next media event, select "Finish sound before next automatic event."

7.	Click OK.

8.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	If you linked the sound when you first added it, you can choose to embed it now.

 See related topics


Go to Page dialog box

Use the Go to Page dialog box to choose a page to go to. You have the following choices:

•	Next Page--Goes to the next page in the presentation.

•	Previous Page--Goes to the previous page in the presentation.

•	First Page--Goes to the first page of the presentation.

•	Last Page--Goes to the last page of the presentation.

•	Last page displayed--Goes to the last page that was displayed.

•	Quit screen show--Stops the screen show and returns to the Freelance Graphics window.

•	Pause/Resume--Interrupts a screen show set to run automatically and then starts it again.

•	List--Opens the Screen Show Pages dialog box.

•	Page names--Goes to the specified page.


Overview: Object and text effects

By default, objects and text appear simultaneously with the page during a screen show. However, you can make objects and text appear with their own special effects. For example, you can make bulleted items appear progressively one at a time rather than all at once.

Setting visual effects for objects and text

Just as each page of a screen show can appear by means of a visual effect, objects and text can also appear with their own visual effects. And like pages, objects and text can appear by means of any one of more than 30 visual effects, such as rain, zigzag, or blinds. See Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text.

Making bulleted items appear progressively

Bulleted lists have a number of effects unique to them.

For example, if a page scrolls onto the screen, a bulleted list on the page can scroll on with it. Alternatively, the page can scroll on with nothing but the page title, and then each bulleted item can "fly" in from the left. In addition, the previous bulleted items can dim each time a new one appears. See Making bulleted items appear progressively.

Timing and sequencing events on a page

You can have objects and text appear in one of two ways:

•	Simultaneously when the page displays

•	First have the page display, then have objects and text appear

For example, suppose you have a page with text listing the benefits of using a compass. You may want the text to appear as soon as the page appears so you can discuss the benefits, but you want a picture of the compass to appear on the page after you have finished talking.

If you choose to have an object or text display after a page displays, you have two ways to control the timing of its appearance. You can have it appear:

•	When you click your mouse

•	After a particular elapsed time that you set

See Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text.

Once you apply effects to objects and text, they will appear sequentially during a screen show. This sequence is initially determined by the order in which you applied effects to the objects.

For example, if you first assign a visual effect to a circle, the circle will be the first object to appear in the sequence after the page appears (with all the objects that do not have effects). You can view and change the sequence of the objects that have effects. See Sequencing objects.

Audio effects

You can attach a sound to an object so the sound plays as the object appears or at the end of the object's appearance. For example, you can have a whistle play as an arrow flies onto the page, or you can have a chime play just as the arrow stops. See Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text.

Clicking objects during screen shows

You can make an object or text block trigger an event so that when you click the object during a screen show, something happens. For example, you can click an image of a car to toot a horn or to jump to a page describing the car's engine. See Attaching an action to objects and text.


Attaching an action to objects and text

You can make an object or text block perform an action when it is clicked during a screen show.

1.	Click the right mouse button over the object or text and choose the Properties command.

2.	Click the Screen Show tab.

3.	Under Action when object/text block is clicked, select what you want to occur when the object is clicked during a screen show.

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	To remove an action from an object, select "No action."

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Attaching an action to objects and text

Action options

When an object is clicked during a screen show, it can perform one of the following actions:

Go to Page--Goes to another page. Select the page to go to.

Go to URL--Goes to a location on the World Wide Web. Specify the location by entering its URL (Uniform Resource Locator).

Run application--Runs another application. Specify the path of the application to run.

Play sound--Plays a sound. Specify the path and filename of the sound file to play and play options.

Play movie--Plays a movie. Specify the path and filename of the movie file to play, play options, and the movie location.

Run show--Runs another screen show. Specify the presentation file to run.

How actions affect the sequence of other objects

If an object is set to play a movie when clicked, the movie will finish playing before the next event on the page begins.

You cannot attach actions to objects that are EPS files or metafiles (including Lotus SmartPics), unless you ungroup them first.

 Go to procedure


Making bulleted items appear progressively

During a screen show, a bulleted list can appear one bulleted item at a time.

1.	Click the bulleted list to select it.

2.	Choose Text - Bullet Build.

3.	Under Timing, select "Display page first, then display text."

4.	Do one of the following:

•	To make each bulleted item appear when you click the mouse, select "On click."

•	To make the bulleted items appear automatically, select "After n seconds" and enter the number of seconds you want to elapse before each bulleted item appears.

5.	Under Display bullets, select One at a time.

Note	To display all the items in the bulleted list simultaneously, make sure "All at once" is selected.

6.	(Optional) Select "Dim previous bullets" if you want the previous bullet to dim when the next one appears.

7.	(Optional) Under Transition, select a visual effect.

8.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	Bullet builds apply to Level 1 Text only. That is, if you have sub-bullets under a Level 1 Text bullet, the sub-bullets will appear along with the Level 1 Text bullet.


Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Objects and text can appear with their own timing and effects.

Note	Before applying an effect, be sure the object or text is within the dashed line that indicates the page borders.

1.	Click the right mouse button over the object or text and choose the Properties command.

2.	Click the Screen Show tab.

3.	Select "Display page first, then display object/text."

Note	To make an object appear with the page, select "Display with page."

4.	Do one of the following:

•	To make the object appear on a manual cue, select "On click."

•	To make the object appear automatically, select "After n seconds" and enter the number of seconds you want to elapse between the previous event and the appearance of the selected object.

5.	(Optional) Under Transition, select a visual effect.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	If the selected object is a bulleted list and you set bullets to appear separately, the visual effect and appearance cue apply to each bulleted item in the list, rather than the bulleted list as a single block of text.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text

Active objects set to display "After 0 seconds" appear as fast as possible after the previous event. The actual speed depends on the computer on which the screen show is running.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Page effects

Use visual effects, sound, and timing to make dramatic transitions between pages during a screen show. (Screen show effects do not affect printed output, overheads, or 35 millimeter slides.)

Setting visual effects for pages

A page can appear by means of any one of more than 30 visual effects, such as fade, checkerboard, or blinds. See Setting timing and visual effects for pages.

Triggering the appearance of pages

By default, each page stays on the screen until you trigger it manually to advance to the next page. As an alternative, you can automate all or part of your presentation by setting pages to advance automatically at time intervals you determine. See Triggering the appearance of pages.

Skipping a page

You can skip a page during a screen show without deleting it from your presentation file. See Skipping a page during a screen show.

Audio effects

You can attach a sound to a page so the sound plays as the page appears or at the end of its appearance. See Attaching sound to pages, objects, and text.


Overview: Sequencing objects

By default, during a screen show, all the objects on a page appear simultaneously with the page. For example, suppose you create a page and add to it the following objects: text, a picture of a car, and an arrow pointing to the car. When you run the presentation as a screen show, all the objects appear at once: the page itself, the text, the car, and the arrow.

Now, suppose you want the objects on this page to appear sequentially; let's say you want text to appear one second after the page background, the car to drive on from the left after two more seconds, and, finally, the arrow to fly in from the top and point to the car. To do this, you set timing and transition effects using the Screen Show Effects panel of the InfoBox. All objects with effects appear in a sequence order:

•	1. Text

•	2. Car

•	3. Arrow

See Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text for more information.

Freelance Graphics gives the objects sequence numbers that represent the order in which you added timing and transition effects to them, but you can change the sequence whenever you like. Let's suppose you change your mind and want the car to appear first, then the text, and finally the arrow. You can easily change the sequence to the following:

•	1. Car

•	2. Text

•	3. Arrow

See Sequencing objects for more information.


Sequencing objects

You can change the sequence of objects that have effects.

1.	Click the object.

2.	Choose Presentation - Sequence Objects on Page.

The name of the selected object is highlighted.

3.	(Optional) Drag the highlighted name to where you want it in the list.

The mouse pointer changes to a hand when it is over an object that can be dragged.

4.	(Optional) Highlight and drag other objects to the where you want them.

5.	Click OK.

Tip	In the "Current object" section of the dialog box, you can rename objects. This makes it easier to keep track of  the objects on the page as you resequence them.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Sequencing objects

By default, objects you add to a page appear simultaneously with the page when you run the presentation as a screen show. However, you can assign special effects to objects and text. Once you do that, you can have them appear after the page appears, and appear in a particular sequence.

Objects that can be sequenced

Only objects with effects can be sequenced. If an object has no effect, it appears simultaneously with the page background. See Overview: Object and text effects.

Objects in front of, or behind, others

During a screen show, it is the sequence order that determines which objects appear in front of, or behind, other objects on the page: the first object with effects appears in front of all the objects without effects, the second object with effects appears in front of the first, the third appears in front of the second, and so on.

However, when you are not in a screen show, it is the drawing priority that determines which objects appear in front of, or behind, other objects on the page. Therefore, when you are working on a screen show presentation in Current Page view, you will notice that the sequence you have assigned to objects with effects has no effect on which objects appear in front of, or behind, other objects. See Rearranging overlapping objects.

 Go to procedure


Skipping a page during a screen show

1.	Go to the page you want to skip.

2.	Choose Page - Screen Show Effects.

3.	Select "Do not display this page during screen show."

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Tip	To skip groups of pages, go to Page Sorter view, select a group of pages, then follow the procedure starting with step 2.


Setting visual effects for pages

You can set a visual effect for each page individually, or set one visual effect for all the pages in your presentation.

For a single page

1.	Go to the page for which you want to set an effect.

2.	Choose Page - Screen Show Effects.

3.	Under Transition, select a visual effect.

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

For all pages

1.	Choose Presentation - Set Up Screen Show or click here [image].

2.	Under Apply to, select whether to apply the visual effect to all existing pages or to new pages only.

3.	Under Transition, select a visual effect.

4.	Click OK.

Tip	To apply a transition to a group of pages, click the Page Sorter tab, select a group of pages, then follow the procedure..

 See related topics


Triggering the appearance of pages

You can trigger a page to advance to the next page either manually or automatically.

For a single page

1.	Go to the page you want to advance.

2.	Choose Page - Screen Show Effects.

3.	Under "Advance to next page," do one of the following:

•	Select "Trigger manually (click or keypress)."

•	Select "Trigger automatically after n sec." and enter the number of seconds you want to elapse between the appearance of the last object on the current page and the appearance of the next page.

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

For all pages

1.	Choose Presentation - Set Up Screen Show or click here [image].

2.	Click the Page Effects tab.

3.	Under Display next page, do one of the following:

•	Select "On click or keypress." See details

•	Select "After n seconds" and enter the number of seconds you want to elapse between the appearance of objects and pages.

Note	The trigger you set here applies not only to pages, but also to all objects--including text and bulleted items--on all pages in the presentation.

4.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Triggering the appearance of pages

Advancing to the next page

When you run a screen show, each page advances in one of two ways:

•	Manually when you click the left mouse button, press PAGE DOWN, or press ENTER.

•	Automatically after the specified number of seconds has elapsed.

"As fast as possible"

Pages set to "Trigger automatically, after 0 seconds" will advance to the next page as fast as possible. The actual speed depends on the computer on which the screen show is running.

 Go to procedure


Making more screen space available for screen shows

Use the following procedure if you need to use as much screen space as possible for your screen show.

1.	Choose File - Print.

2.	Under Print to, select "Screen Show."

3.	Click Close.

Note	If you later select a printer so you can print your screen show, you may get a warning message. Choose "Don't modify anything" to prevent objects on your page from being permanently scaled down in size.

 See details


Details: Making more screen space available for screen shows

If objects are close to the edges of the screen, you may need to scale them down so they print without running off the page. However, if you scale them, objects are then permanently scaled down in size. Switching your output device back to "Screen Show" does not restore objects to their original size.

Scaling objects is a good idea if you frequently switch output devices, or if you mail presentations to other people.

 Go to procedure


Canceling a screen show

You can stop a screen show before it is finished playing.

1.	Press ESC.

2.	Click Quit Screen Show.


Running a screen show continuously

You can set a screen show to cycle back to the first page when the last page is finished.

1.	Choose Presentation - Set Up Screen Show or click here [image].

2.	Click the Options tab.

3.	Under Run options, select "Run screen show in continuous loop."

4.	Click OK.

Note	To quit from a screen show that has been set to run continuously, press ESC, then click Quit Screen Show.

 See related topics


Displaying the screen show control panel

You can display a VCR-like control panel when you run a screen show.

In the illustration above, the buttons from left to right are as follows:

Back--Goes to the previous page.

Pause--Displays a dialog box that allows you to jump to another page.

Forward--Advances to the next page.

Stop--Quits the screen show.

1.	Choose Presentation - Set Up Screen Show or click here [image].

2.	Click the Tools tab.

3.	Under Control panel, select "Display control panel."

4.	Under Position, select a position for the control panel.

5.	Click OK.

Note	To hide the control panel, make sure "Display control panel" is not selected.

 See related topics


Drawing onscreen during a screen show

During a screen show, you can draw onscreen using the left mouse button. For example, you can draw a circle around some important text.

1.	Choose Presentation - Set Up Screen Show or click here [image].

2.	Click the Tools tab.

3.	Under On-screen drawing, select "Allow drawing on pages."

4.	Select a color and width for the lines that you draw.

5.	Click OK.

Note	To turn off onscreen drawing, make sure "Allow drawing on page" is not selected.

 See details


Details: Drawing onscreen during a screen show

When onscreen drawing is turned on, you might accidentally draw lines when you simply want to click to advance to the next screen.

During a screen show, you can avoid unwanted marks either by being careful not to move the mouse when you click to advance, or by pressing PAGE DOWN or ENTER to advance (thereby not using the mouse).

 Go to procedure


Setting global page effects

You can set global page effects so that all the pages in your presentation use the same effect when you run your presentation as a screen show.

1.	Choose Presentation - Set Up Screen Show or click here [image].

2.	Click the Page Effects tab.

3.	Under Apply to, select "All existing pages" or "New pages only."

Selecting "All existing pages" replaces any other transition already assigned to existing pages.

4.	Under Transition, select a transition.

5.	Under Display next page, select "On click or keypress" or "After n seconds" and enter a number.

Note	If you select "On click or keypress," the page will display when you click the mouse, press ENTER, or press PAGE DOWN. If you select "After n seconds," the page displays after the designated time elapses.


Set Up Screen Show dialog box

Use the Set Up Screen Show dialog box to set screen show options.

Choose a task

Setting global page effects

Displaying the screen show control panel

Drawing onscreen during a screen show

Signaling when page is ready to display

Running a screen show continuously

Overriding page settings temporarily


Overriding page settings temporarily

At times you may want to run a screen show automatically that you usually run manually. You can do this without having to reset all the pages to advance automatically.

1.	Choose Presentation - Set Up Screen Show  or click here [image].

2.	Click the Options tab.

3.	Under Overrides, select "Run entire screen show automatically."

4.	Click OK.

Note	If you exit Freelance Graphics--or turn off this option--any objects or pages set to display "On click" will again wait for a mouse click before appearing.


Signaling when a page is ready to display

You can be signaled during a screen show when the next page is ready to display.

1.	Choose Presentation - Set Up Screen Show or click here [image].

2.	Click the Options tab.

3.	Under Cue for displaying next page, select "Sound a tone," "Display an arrow," or both.

4.	Click OK.

Note	Once you hear or see the signal during the screen show, you can click the mouse, press ENTER, or press PAGE DOWN to display the next page.

Tip	If you use signals, consider hiding the control panel to reduce screen clutter during a screen show.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Signaling when a page is ready to display

If you attempt to advance quickly through a presentation, you may find that occasionally nothing happens when you try to advance to the next page. This can occur if the next page has complex graphics and it is not ready to be displayed.

You can avoid this situation by setting Freelance Graphics to signal you when the next page is ready to be displayed. The signal can be a short tone, a small arrow in the lower right corner of the screen, or both.

 Go to procedure


Rehearsing a presentation

1.	Select Presentation - Rehearse - Start.

2.	Rehearse your presentation.

3.	When you are finished, click Done.

4.	Click OK to return to the presentation.

5.	(Optional) To view a summary from the last time you rehearsed, select Presentation - Rehearse - Summary.

 See details


Details: Rehearsing a presentation

What you see while rehearsing

While you rehearse, Freelance Graphics displays the following:

Page time--Shows the elapsed time you have spent on the current page.

Total time--Shows the elapsed time since the beginning of the first page.

While you rehearse, you can use the following buttons:

Restart--Restarts the timer for the current page.

Pause/Continue--Stops the clock/starts the clock.

Forward arrow--Records the time for the current page and advances to the next page. If you have already rehearsed the page, you can add to the page time by clicking Continue, or click Restart to reset the timer.

Back arrow--Moves back a page in the presentation. If you have already rehearsed the page, you can add to the page time by clicking Continue, or click Restart to reset the timer.

Speaker Note--Lets you create, view, and edit speaker notes.

Done--Opens the Rehearse Summary dialog box.

What you see in the Rehearse Summary dialog box

The Rehearse Summary dialog box displays the following:

•	The names of all the pages in the presentation.

•	The amount of time you spent rehearsing, per page.

•	A running total of time per page.

•	The total amount of time you took to rehearse the presentation.

 Go to procedure


Using the right mouse menu during a screen show

1.	During a screen show, click the right mouse button.

2.	Choose one of the following options:

Next-- to go to the next page

Previous--to back up a page

Go To--to specify the page to go to

Allow Drawing--to invoke onscreen drawing

Pen Color--to choose the color you draw with onscreen

Pen Width--to choose how wide the pen draws

Speaker Notes--to create or edit speaker notes for the page you are on

Control Panel--to turn on or off the control panel, and to choose where on the screen it should display

End Screen Show--to stop the screen show

Note	The right mouse menu options are also available:

•	In rehearse mode.

•	In TeamShow, only if you are the sender.

•	In Mobile Screen Show, except for the ability to create and edit speaker notes.

 See related topics


Running a presentation as a screen show

Do one of the following:

•	Choose Presentation - Run Screen Show - From Beginning or click here [image].

•	Choose Presentation - Run Screen Show - From Current Page.

Tip	During a screen show, you can click the right mouse to bring up a menu of useful options. See Using the right-mouse menu during a screen show.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Running a presentation as a screen show

You can use the keyboard or mouse during a screen show.

To:	Do this:
Move from one page to the next page	Click the left mouse button, press PAGE DOWN, or press ENTER.
Move from one page to the previous page	Press the right mouse button or press BACKSPACE.
Pause and restart from a page that is set to advance automatically	Press SPACEBAR.
Go to another page	Press ESC, select the page, and click Go To Page.
Stop running a screen show before it is finished	Press ESC and click Quit Screen Show.
 Go to procedure


Overview: Screen shows

When you deliver a presentation as a screen show, the presentation becomes more like a movie than like a book: colored images flow in an animated manner from one to the next. To get this animated effect, you can add special effects to almost any piece of your presentation. Once you have added all the effects you want, you can run, or even rehearse, your presentation. See Running a presentation as a screen show and Rehearsing a presentation.

Visual effects for pages

Visual effects are what distinguish a screen show from a printed presentation. Visual effects enliven a presentation, hold the attention of the audience, and heighten the impact of your message. See Setting timing and visual effects for pages.

Visual effects for objects and text

Just as you can apply visual effects to pages, you can also apply them to objects and text. See Overview: Object effects and Setting timing and visual effects for objects and text.

In addition, if you want to make things happen in a particular order, you can change the sequencing of objects that have visual or sound effects. See Sequencing  objects.

Movies and sound

During a screen show, you can play movies and sounds to add cinematic flair to your presentation. Movies can be interleaved with other events on a page, and sounds can be attached to OLE objects, page transitions, and bulleted points. You can even make sounds play by clicking on an object. See Overview: Movies and sound.

Screen space

If you are designing a screen show that needs to make use of as much screen space as possible, you can specify your screen as the output device. See Making more screen space available for screen shows.

 See related topics


Add Clip Art or Diagram to the Page dialog box

Use this dialog box to select either clip art or diagrams.

Choose a task

Adding clip art to one page

Adding ready-made diagrams

Creating a custom diagram

Scanning through clip art or diagrams


Adding clip art to one page

Clip art (symbols) are ready-made graphic objects that you can add to a page. You can move, size, reshape, or change the attributes of clip art as you would any object.

Note	For diagrams see Adding ready-made diagrams.

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Clip Art button.

•	Click a "Click here..." clip art block.

2.	Select a clip art category, or click Scan.

If you click Scan, click Stop Scan when you see the clip art you want to use.

Note	If you are running a DMS, it can display only one clip art category rather than the full library of clip art. See Overview: Using DMS dialog boxes.

3.	Click the clip art you want to add to the page.

4.	Click OK.

5.	(Optional) Position and size the clip art.

Note	You can add clip art to any page by choosing Create - Add Clip Art and following steps 2-5.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Adding clip art to one page

You can also select clip art categories in the Add Clip Art or Diagram to the Page dialog box by typing the first letter of the name of a category to move the highlight to the first category that begins with that letter.

Drag and drop clip art

You can drag and drop clip art to or from another application into your presentation. For more information, see Dragging and dropping to another application or Using drag and drop to embed an object.

Note	You can also drag and drop from the Add Clip Art or Diagram to the Page dialog box to the current page.

Scanning clip art sets

You can browse through clip art sets automatically (in alphabetical order) by clicking the Scan button. Click the Stop Scan button to halt the display.

Changing the scanning speed

To change the default scanning speed, choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences, then type the number of seconds you want each set of images to be displayed in the Scanning speed box. You can type values between 0.1 and 100. The suggested speed is 1 second.

 Go to procedure


Adding images to the clip art library

You can create or import an illustration and then add it to the clip art library.

1.	Draw or import the objects that you want to save as clip art.

2.	Select all the components (objects) that make up the clip art.

3.	If you selected more than one object, choose Drawing - Group (or Collection - Group).

Note	If you do not group the objects, Freelance Graphics saves each one as a separate piece of clip art.

4.	Choose Create - Add to Library - Clipart Library or click here [image]. To save in the diagram library, see Saving a presentation as a diagram file.

5.	Add the clip art to the category of your choice. CUSTOM.SYM is an empty category you can use.

See details

6.	Click Open.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Adding images to the clip art library

You can add clip art that you created to the clip art set named CUSTOM.SYM or you can create a new set. To create a new clip art category with a new file name, choose File - Save As. Under Save as type select "Lotus Freelance Clip Art (SYM)," then type in a new name. You could also add it to an existing clip art set by selecting a file name from the list.

Note	Save the file in the \LOTUS\SMASTERS\FLG folder (directory), so that the file will be listed with other Freelance Graphics clip art files.

Retrieving and editing clip art you created

You retrieve, use, edit, and size clip art that you create in the same way you do clip art that comes with Freelance Graphics. For more information about editing clip art, see Overview: Working with clip art.

Modifying existing clip art

You can edit clip art in the clip art library. Choose File - Open and, under Files of type, select "Lotus Freelance Clip Art (SYM)." Specify another folder (directory) if necessary.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Changing the properties of bitmaps

1.	Double-click the bitmap you want to change.

2.	Adjust the contrast, sharpness, and brightness controls to the values you want.

See details

3.	(Optional) To make the bitmap background transparent, select "Make image transparent."

4.	(Optional) To reverse the colors of black-and-white bitmaps, select "Invert colors."

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details


Details: Changing the properties of bitmaps

Contrast, sharpness, and brightness

Contrast is the ratio of black to white. Sharpness is the degree of line and border definition. Brightness is the luminous intensity. The controls range from -5 to 5, where zero is a medium range.

You can change the contrast and brightness for both color and gray scale images. You can only change the sharpness for gray scale images. Contrast, sharpness, and brightness are not applicable to monochrome images.

Make image transparent

Selecting "Make image transparent" turns all pixels (except black pixels) in the bitmap image transparent so that images or colors that are behind the bitmap show through. This is particularly useful for line art, because the border of the bitmap image is white. Selecting this also makes the border invisible.

Invert colors

Selecting "Invert colors" reverses the black-and-white areas of a selected monochrome image. That is, black areas become white and white areas become black. This works only with monochrome images; it does not affect color or gray scale images.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Why embed or refer to clip art in a presentation?

You can embed or refer to clip art or bitmaps that were created in another application.

Embedding clip art

Embed clip art when you want to use only one copy of it. A presentation with an embedded object is easier to work with, because you can edit the object without leaving Freelance Graphics. However, an embedded object makes the presentation file larger because the presentation contains the clip art rather than referring to the clip art.

For information about how to embed an object, see Creating an embedded object or Embedding an existing object.

Referring to clip art

When you want to use the same clip art in more than one presentation (or in more than one place in the same presentation) and you want to be certain to use the most current version, you should refer to the clip art rather than embed it. That is, when you import clip art, you should click No when prompted to respond to the question "Include image with file."

Note	If the original file containing the clip art is moved or if the file name is changed, the reference to the file will have to be updated. If you copy your presentation to a diskette, you will have to copy the bitmaps to the diskette.

Caution	 If you want to save the clip art in the clip art library, you must embed the clip art in the presentation.

Tip	If you want to use the same clip art on every page in a presentation, see Adding clip art or a logo to every page.

 See related topics


Importing clip art

1.	Choose File - Open.

2.	Under Look in, select the directory.

3.	Under Files of type, select the file type (BMP, TIF, and so on).

4.	Select the file from the list of files.

5.	Click Open.

6.	Depending on the kind of clip art you import, you may be prompted to do one of the following:

•	Include the image with the file.  (BMP, TIF, GIF, PCX, and TGA)

•	Include as a PostScript object. (AI and EPS)

•	Make a template background. (PPT and PRS)

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Importing clip art

Embed a copy of the image file

If you select Yes to embed an image with the file, the image is embedded in the presentation. If you select No, the image is referred to, that is, it is not part of the presentation. If you intend to add this image to the clip art or diagram library, you must embed the image.

If you refer to the image and the original file containing the clip art is moved or if the file name is changed, the reference to the file will have to be updated. If you save your presentation to a diskette, you will have to copy the bitmaps to the diskette.

If you have not updated the reference to the file, you get a warning message notifying you that Freelance Graphics could not locate the referenced file. In place of your clip art, you will see a rectangle with an "x" inside with the path that it could not locate displayed.

For more information, see Why embed or refer to clip art in a presentation?

Make a PostScript object (EPS and AI files only)

If you import an image that is an EPS or AI file (AI data is a superset of EPS data), one of the following happens, depending on what the image file contains and whether you make the image a PostScript object.

If the imported image contains	Make PostScript object = No	Make PostScript object = Yes
Only EPS print  data	The message "No displayable data" appears and nothing is placed on the page. When the presentation is printed, nothing from the imported image is printed.	A rectangle is displayed on screen as a PostScript object.  If the presentation is printed on a PostScript printer, the EPS data is printed. If sent to a non-PostScript printer, a rectangle is printed.
EPS data and a TIFF preview image	The message "No displayable data" appears and nothing is placed on the page. When the presentation is printed, nothing from the imported image is printed.	The TIFF preview image is visible on the screen. If the presentation is printed to a PostScript printer, the EPS data is printed. If sent to a non-PostScript printer, the TIFF image is printed.
EPS data and WMF data	The WMF data is placed on the page as a group of objects. When the presentation is sent to a printer, the WMF data is printed.	A rectangle is displayed on screen as a PostScript object. If the presentation is printed on a PostScript printer, the EPS data is printed. If sent to a non-PostScript printer, a rectangle is printed.
EPS data, a TIFF preview image, and WMF data	The WMF data is displayed as a group of objects. When the presentation is sent to a printer, the WMF data is printed.	A TIFF preview image is visible on the screen. If the presentation is printed on a PostScript printer, the EPS data is printed. If sent to a non-PostScript printer, the TIFF image is printed.
Notes

WMF, a Windows metafile format, is a standard drawing format. It is a vector file format, not a bitmap file format.

If an AI image is vector based, you get a vector image when you bring it into Freelance Graphics.

Include a  template/background from file (PowerPoint and Harvard Graphics files only)

If you click Yes to Make Template Background, the PowerPoint or Harvard Graphics template overrides the Freelance Graphics SmartMaster look. It also adds the background as a page layout to the page layout list.

Bitmap's original size maintained

Bitmaps (files that have a BMP, TIF, GIF, TGA, or PCX extension) that are imported into Freelance Graphics maintain their original size. If a bitmap is too large to fit on the page, Freelance Graphics scales the bitmap by 50% repeatedly, until it fits on the page. To edit a bitmap's attributes, see Changing the properties of bitmaps.

Note	Scaling bitmaps may distort their clarity.

Color bitmaps

Color bitmaps are displayed in color and, if you are printing to a color device other than a plotter, they are printed in color. If you print a color bitmap to a black-and-white device, the colors are automatically mapped to gray scales during printing. To display the bitmap as it will appear when printed to a black-and-white printer, make sure the command View - Display in Color is deselected.

Note	Bitmaps are less subject to color change due to palette switching than metafiles.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Metafiles and bitmaps

A metafile consists of a set of generically defined information so that it can be created or read by all applications that follow the rules for creating and reading metafiles. Metafiles contain objects, but if you ungroup a metafile, it is no longer a metafile. However, metafiles can be resized.

Bitmaps are raster graphics files that form images from a series of dots, or pixels. While bitmaps look more like objects in the parent application than metafiles do, metafiles contain more information. While a bitmap is a pictorial representation of an object, it does not contain information about the objects represented in it, so it cannot be ungrouped.

When to use a metafile rather than a bitmap

The following list offers criteria for making the choice between a bitmap or a metafile.

•	If the object has to be scaled, use a metafile rather than a bitmap (bitmaps lose clarity when scaled).

•	Bitmaps are less subject to color changes (for example, when changing palettes).

•	Bitmaps greatly increase the size of a file compared to metafiles.

Ungrouping metafiles

If you import a metafile into Freelance Graphics and then ungroup the metafile, it is no longer a metafile. Also, note the following:

•	Curves become lines.

•	Arrows become two objects: a line and a polygon.

•	Rectangles with rounded corners may ungroup as polygons.

•	Chart metafile objects become individual objects and become unlinked from the chart data.

•	Markers that appear on an object's points become polygons.

•	Text blocks become separate text blocks for each line of text.

•	Rotated text is no longer rotated.

•	Text typeface, size, and appearance are maintained, but other text attributes (such as bold, italic, and so on) are lost.

•	All fill patterns become solid patterns.

•	Graduated patterns become a solid pattern using the fill color.

•	Gray scale patterns become a solid color using the fill color.

Note	You cannot ungroup metafiles containing bitmap information, such as a Word Pro OLE object.

 See related topics


Overview: Working with clip art

Clip art generally consists of two or more objects that are grouped so you can treat them as a single object. Clip art can also be imported bitmaps or charts.

To edit the individual objects of clip art, first select the clip art, then ungroup it with Group - Ungroup (or Collection - Ungroup). To regroup the objects, select all the objects that form the drawing, then regroup them with Drawing - Group (or Collection - Group) when you finish editing them.

Note	When clip art is a bitmap, it is a single object and cannot be ungrouped.

Clip art and library colors

Clip art is generally created with library colors that stay the same when you add clip art to your presentation. However, some images are created using the palette, which means these shapes take on a color that is appropriate for your presentation.

For more information about color, see Overview: Using Colors, Overview: Color palettes, and Overview: Color libraries.

Editing attributes

To edit the attributes of clip art while it is a grouped object, double-click the clip art and make changes in the InfoBox. Or, select the clip art and choose Group - Group Properties (or Collection - Collection Properties) to display the InfoBox.

Adding clip art to a "Click here to add clip art" block

You can easily add clip art to any area on a presentation that has "Click here to add clip art" on it. When you add clip art to one of the "Click here..." blocks, the clip art is sized and placed in the "Click here..." area.

If you choose not to use the "Click here..." clip art block, the words "Click here..." will not print nor will they appear in a screen show.

To create "Click here..." blocks for clip art, see Adding new "Click here..." blocks and Adding filled-in clip art to content pages.

Adding text to clip art

Some clip art has embedded text blocks (see the table below). You add text by clicking "Type text here" or "Click here to add text" and typing the text you want.

Clip art image	Image number and file name
The certificate	# 28 in COMMOBJT.SYM
The spotlights	# 3 in ENTERTAI.SYM
The flag and pennant	# 61 & # 62 in FLAGS.SYM
The cake	# 24 in FOOD.SYM
The hand with piece of paper	# 1 in HANDS.SYM
The man at the whiteboard	# 13 in MEN.SYM
The man at the whiteboard	# 2 in AGENDA.SYM
The business card	# 3 in OFFOBJCT.SYM
One sticky note	# 8 in OFFOBJCT.SYM
One sticky note	# 5 in PROJECT.SYM
The whiteboard	# 9 in OFFOBJCT.SYM
The whiteboard	# 3 in AGENDA.SYM
The clipboard	# 10 in OFFOBJCT.SYM
The clipboard	# 8 in PROJECT.SYM
The clipboard	# 10 in NEXTSTEP.SYM
The easel	# 1 in PRESENTN.SYM
The overhead projector	# 2 in PRESENTN.SYM
The screen	# 3 in PRESENTN.SYM
All images	In TEXTBOX.SYM
Tip	You can always place text over clip art (that does not have its own embedded text block) by choosing Create - Text and positioning the text over the clip art.

 See related topics


Scanning through clip art or diagrams

1.	If you are not in the Add Clip Art or Diagram to the Page dialog box, choose Create - Add Clip Art or click here [image].

2.	Under View, select Clip Art or Diagram.

3.	Click Scan.

4.	Click Stop Scan when you see the clip art or diagram you want.

5.	Click the clip art or diagram you want to add.

6.	Click OK.

7.	(Optional) Position and size the clip art or diagram.


Overview: Tables

You can use a table to display text or numbers. When creating a table, you choose an overall style and the number of rows and columns that you want. See Creating a table.

Once you have created a table, you can also change the properties of the whole table, or of selected cells, rows, columns, or text. See Changing the properties of a table and Changing table borders, colors, and patterns.

Selecting and editing tables

•	To select a table, click it. Freelance Graphics displays handles around the table borders.

•	To edit a table, click the table once to select it. Then click in the table and drag the cells, rows, columns, or text you want to work with. When you are editing a table, Freelance Graphics displays a thick gray border around it.

For information on selecting parts of a table, see Selecting parts of a table.

Working with tables

If the InfoBox is closed, do one of the following:

•	To work with the entire table, click the table to select it and choose Table - Table Properties.

•	To work with selected cells, click the table and then click again and drag to select the cells. Then choose Table - Cell Properties.

•	To work with selected text, click the table and then click again and drag to select the text. Then choose Text - Properties.

If the InfoBox is already open, simply select what you want to work with (the table, cells, or text).

Working with numbers in tables

Note the following when working with numbers in tables:

•	Freelance Graphics does not provide any mathematical functions for numbers in tables.

•	By default, text in tables is left justified in each cell, and numbers are right justified.

•	Freelance Graphics considers numbers and letters together in a cell as text.


Inserting columns and rows in a table

 Show me a demo

1.	Click the table.

2.	Click in the table where you want the row or column inserted.

3.	Choose Table - Insert - Row or Table - Insert - Column.

Notes

To insert more than one row or column at a time, in step 3 choose Table - Insert - Row/Column.

The rows or columns you insert take on the properties of the table.

 See details


Details: Inserting columns and rows in a table

About inserting columns and rows in a table

A table can have up to 30 columns and 50 rows.

To add a row or column quickly

•	To insert a single row below a row, click the table once to select it, then click a cell above where you want to insert the row. Then choose Table - Insert - Row.

•	To insert a single column to the right of a column, click the table once to select it, then click a cell to the left of where you want to insert the column. Then choose Table - Insert - Column.

The row or column that you add takes on the properties of the row or column that you clicked.

 Go to procedure


Changing table borders, colors, and patterns

1.	Select what you want to change in the table.

2.	Choose Table - Lines & Fill Color.

3.	Under Border, select the borders to apply the changes to.

4.	(Optional) Under Border, select a style, width, and color.

5.	(Optional) Under Interior, select a pattern and colors.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details


Details: Changing table borders, colors, and patterns

About colors and patterns

For more information about changing colors and patterns for objects, see Details: Changing colors and patterns.

Note	You can not change the color and fill patterns for grouped tables.

Displaying shadows around the table border

You can display a shadow around the perimeter of a table. Select the table and choose Table - Table Properties. Click the Lines & Colors tab and select where to display the shadow.

 Go to procedure


Changing how text looks in a table

You can change the font, alignment, bullets, and other properties of text in a table.

1.	Double-click the table, and drag to select the text you want to change.

2.	Choose Table - Table Properties or click here [image].

3.	In the InfoBox, under Properties for, select what you want to change.

4.	To change the font, click the Text Format tab and select a font, size, and any other attributes.

5.	To change the bullets, click the Bullets tab and select attributes for the bullets.

6.	If you have selected a table or cells, to change the text alignment and indentation, click the Alignment tab and select an alignment and indentation.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing how text looks in a table

The default font for table text is the same as the default font for the presentation.

If you cut or copy text into a table, this text takes on the font for the table. Words or characters with overrides, such as underline or bold, retain these attributes in the table.

You cannot curve text in a table.

 Go to procedure


Changing the properties of a table

You can change the style of text, cells, rows, or columns in a table, or of the table itself.

1.	Select what you want to change in the table.

2.	Choose Table - Table Properties or click here [image].

3.	In the InfoBox, under Properties for, select what you want to change in the table.

4.	Make the changes you want.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See related topics


Creating a table

You can specify the overall style of a table and the number of columns and rows that you want (up to 30 columns and 50 rows).

1.	Click the New Page button.

2.	Click the Page Layouts tab (if necessary), select the Table page layout, and click OK.

3.	Click the "Click here..." table block.

4.	Select the style of table you want.

5.	Select the number of rows and columns for the table.

6.	Click OK.

Note	You can create a table on any other page layout by choosing Create - Table and following steps 4 - 6.


Creating a table using 1-2-3 data

1.	Start Lotus 1-2-3 and open the worksheet with the data you want.

2.	Select the range of cells that you want to use for the table.

3.	Choose Edit - Copy.

Note	Keep the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet open.

4.	Open a Freelance Graphics presentation in Current Page view.

5.	Choose Edit - Paste Special.

6.	Select Paste.

7.	Select Table (Formatted) and click OK.

Note	You can also use Edit - Paste Special to paste 1-2-3 data into an existing Freelance Graphics table. Doing this replaces the data in the table where the insertion point is with the data you copied. The table will automatically extend to fit the data, up to the maximum table size.

 See details


Details: Creating a table using 1-2-3 data

Attributes that Table (Formatted) preserves

Selecting Table (Formatted) as the format for Edit - Paste Special preserves the following 1-2-3 attributes:

•	Text attributes--font, size, color, emphasis (bold, italic, and so forth), and paragraph alignment

•	Numeric formats--currency, scientific, and so forth

•	Some table attributes--for example, column width, but not border attributes or background colors

Selecting the Table (Unformatted) format

When you choose Edit - Paste Special to paste 1-2-3 data into Freelance Graphics, you can choose among many Clipboard formats. Selecting Table (Unformatted) creates the table with 1-2-3 data using default table attributes for the SmartMaster look you are using.

Pasting data into a table

A Freelance Graphics table can have up to 30 columns and 50 rows. You can paste up to this amount of data into a table. If you try to paste more data than will fit, Freelance Graphics will not paste the additional data.

 Go to procedure


Creating a table using Word Pro data

1.	Start Word Pro and open the document with the table you want to copy.

2.	Select the table that you want to copy.

Note	You must select the entire table.

3.	Choose Edit - Copy.

4.	Open a Freelance Graphics presentation in Current Page view.

5.	Choose Edit - Paste Special.

6.	Select Paste.

7.	Select Table (Formatted) and click OK.

Note	You can also use Edit - Paste Special to paste Word Pro data into an existing Freelance Graphics table. Doing this replaces the data in the table where the insertion point is with the data you copied. The table will automatically extend to fit the data, up to the maximum table size.

 See details


Details: Creating a table using Word Pro data

Attributes that Table (Formatted) preserves

Selecting Table (Formatted) as the format for Edit - Paste Special preserves the following Word Pro attributes:

•	Text attributes--font, size, color, emphasis (bold, italic, and so forth), and paragraph alignment

•	Numeric formats--currency, scientific, and so forth

•	Some table attributes--for example, column width, but not border attributes or background colors

Selecting the Table (Unformatted) format

When you choose Edit - Paste Special to paste Word Pro data into Freelance Graphics, you can choose among many Clipboard formats. Selecting Table (Unformatted) creates the table with Word Pro data using default table attributes for the SmartMaster look you are using.

Pasting data into a table

A Freelance Graphics table can have up to 30 columns and 50 rows. You can paste up to this amount of data into a table. If you try to paste more data than will fit, Freelance Graphics will not paste the additional data.

 Go to procedure


Creating a table using data from other Windows applications

1.	Start the other application and open the file you want to use.

2.	Select the table you want to copy.

Note	Select the entire table and keep the file open.

3.	Choose Edit - Copy.

4.	Open a Freelance Graphics presentation in Current Page view.

5.	Choose Edit - Paste Special.

6.	Select Paste.

7.	Select Table (Formatted) and click OK.

Note	You can also use Edit - Paste Special to paste data from another application into an existing Freelance Graphics table. Doing this replaces the data in the table where the insertion point is with the data you copied. The table will automatically extend to fit the data, up to the maximum table size.

 See details


Details: Creating a table using data from other Windows applications

Attributes that Table (Formatted) preserves

The attributes that are preserved when you choose Table (Formatted) as the format for Edit - Paste Special depend upon the level of RTF (Rich Text Format) the application supports. For example, some applications do not preserve column widths; in this case, Freelance Graphics uses a default column width.

Depending on the level of support, the following table attributes from the other application may be preserved in the Freelance Graphics table:

•	Text attributes--font, size, color, emphasis (bold, italic, and so forth), and paragraph alignment

•	Numeric formats--currency, scientific, and so forth

•	Some table attributes--for example, column width, but not border attributes or background colors

Selecting the Table (Unformatted) format

When you choose Edit - Paste Special to paste data from another application into Freelance Graphics, you can choose among many Clipboard formats. Selecting Table (Unformatted) creates the table with data from the other application using default table attributes for the SmartMaster look you are using.

Pasting data into a table

A Freelance Graphics table can have up to 30 columns and 50 rows. You can paste up to this amount of data into a table. If you try to paste more data than will fit, Freelance Graphics will not paste the additional data.

You can also use Edit - Paste Special to paste data from another application into an existing Freelance Graphics table. Doing this replaces the data in the table where the insertion point is with the data you copied. The table will automatically extend to fit the data, up to the maximum table size.

 Go to procedure


Deleting a table

1.	Click the table you want to delete.

2.	Choose Table - Delete - Entire Table.

Note	Choose Edit - Undo to reinsert a table you just deleted.


Deleting columns and rows in a table

1.	Double-click the table.

2.	Drag to select the column(s) or row(s) to delete.

3.	Choose Table - Delete - Row/Column or click here [image].

4.	Select whether to delete columns or rows.

5.	Click OK.

Notes

To reinsert the columns or rows you just deleted, choose Edit - Undo.

To delete the contents of columns or rows, but not the actual columns or rows, double-click the table and drag to select the columns or rows with the contents you want to delete. Then choose Edit - Clear.


Changing the style of a table

 You can change the overall style of a table.

1.	Click the table you want to change.

2.	Choose Table - Table Properties or click here [image].

3.	Click the Layout tab in the InfoBox.

4.	Select the table style you want.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.


Moving a column or row in a table

You can move one row or column at a time in a table.

1.	Double-click the table.

2.	Drag to select the column or row you want to move.

3.	Choose Table - Move Row/Column.

4.	Select whether to move a row or column.

5.	Select where to move the row or column.

6.	Click OK.


Overview: Navigating in a table

Click the table once to select it and again to be able to edit it. Then use these keys to move within and between cells in a table.

Key:	Moves:
TAB	To the next cell in the row.
SHIFT+TAB	To the previous cell in the row.
←	To the previous character in the cell.
→	To the next character in the cell.
CTRL+→	To the beginning of the next cell.
CTRL+←	To the end of the previous cell.
↑	Up one line in a cell, maintaining the same character position in lines that have enough characters.
↓	Down one line in a cell, maintaining the same character position in lines that have enough characters.
CTRL+↑	To the end of the cell above.
CTRL+↓	To the end of the cell below.
HOME once	To the beginning of the line in the current cell.
HOME twice	To the beginning of the first cell in the row.
END once	To the end of the line in the current cell.
END twice	To the end of the last cell in the row.
CTRL+HOME	To the beginning of the first cell in the table.
CTRL+END	To the end of the last cell in the table.


Selecting parts of a table

Use the following actions to select tables, and to select characters, cells, rows, and columns within tables.

To do this:	Do this:
Select a table	Click the table once.
Select a cell	Double-click the table, then drag across the cell.
Select a row	Double-click the table, then drag across the row of cells.
Select a column	Double-click the table, then drag down the column of cells.
Select a group of cells	Double-click the table, then drag across the cells.
Select characters in a cell	Double-click the table, then drag across the characters.
Select characters right, to the end of the line, and then extend the selection right, to the end of the row	Double-click the table, click a cell, and then press SHIFT+END. Press SHIFT+END again to extend the selection.
Select characters left, to the beginning of the line, and then extend the selection left, to the beginning of the row	Double-click the table, click a cell, and then press SHIFT+HOME. Press SHIFT+HOME again to extend the selection.
Extend the selection left or right, one character at a time or one cell at a time	Select text in a cell or select one or more cells, and press SHIFT+← or SHIFT+→.
Extend the selection up or down one column	Select all text in a cell or select one or more cells, and press SHIFT+↑ or SHIFT+↓.
 See related topics


Sizing columns and rows in a table

You can adjust the width or height of selected columns or rows in a table.

1.	Double-click the table.

2.	Drag to select the columns or rows you want to adjust.

3.	Choose Table - Size Row/Column.

.

4.	Under Row, select the row height.

5.	Under Column, select the column width.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Notes

If you clicked in a single cell and no column or row is selected, the size adjustments apply to the entire column or row, depending on what you are sizing.

If the selected columns or rows are different sizes, the Column width and Row height settings in the InfoBox are blank.

 See details


Details: Sizing columns and rows in a table

Sizing columns and rows quickly

You can drag a border line in a table to size a column or row. While the mouse pointer is over the border line, the mouse pointer changes to a two-headed arrow.

Adjusting both the table and text size

•	Click the table. Then press SHIFT and at the same time drag a corner handle to size the table. While the mouse pointer is dragging the handle, the pointer changes to a two-headed arrow.

 Adjusting the table size (but not the text)

•	Click the table and drag a handle to size the table. While the mouse pointer is dragging the handle, the pointer changes to a two-headed arrow.

Freelance Graphics adjusts the size of all the columns and rows in the table, but leaves the point size for all the text the same.

Automatically adjusting row height

You can automatically adjust the row height for all rows in a table when you add or delete text in a table. Click the table and choose Table - Size Row/Column. In the InfoBox, select "Automatic row height." When this setting is selected, you cannot specify a height for rows. If you do not select this setting, you can specify a height for rows in the table.

Adjusting columns and row margins

You can adjust the space between the text in the cell and the cell border for an entire table. Click the table and choose Table - Size Row/Column. In the InfoBox, specify the Cell margins for the rows or columns. This adjusts the left and right space between the text and the cell border for the table.

Setting the unit of measurement for the table size

The unit of measurement for tables is based on the unit you select using View - Set Units & Grid. You cannot change the unit of measurement in the InfoBox.

 Go to procedure


Overview: TeamMail for Freelance Graphics

TeamMail works with your current electronic mail system to allow you to send and receive mail messages from within Freelance Graphics. Using TeamMail you can:

•	Send a simple text message and distribute it to one or more people.

•	Send selected pages or your entire presentation as an attachment to your mail message.

•	Route the presentation from one person to the next.

•	Track the progress of a routed message and attachments by having a mail message sent to you each time a recipient forwards your presentation to the next recipient.

•	Save a distribution route and use it to quickly send messages to frequently used names and addresses.

•	Attach the Mobile Screen Show Player to allow recipients without Freelance Graphics to view your presentation.

Note	You can also distribute a presentation to members of a workgroup with TeamReview. TeamReview also gives the recipients of the presentation access to a set of reviewing and comment tools to annotate a presentation. For more information, see Using Review and Comment.


Using TeamMail

1.	Choose File - TeamMail.

2.	Follow the instructions online.

 See related topics


Choosing a file

The sender performs this procedure after starting the Mobile TeamShow Player. When starting TeamShow from the Freelance Graphics menu, only the current presentation file can be used.

1.	In the Files of type list box, select the presentation file type. Presentation files have a .PRZ extension.

2.	In the Look in box, select the directory containing the presentation.

3.	In the File name list box, specify the file name.

4.	Click Open.

 See related topics


Overview: Choosing a plug-in protocol

TeamShow has detected one or more plug-in protocols that can be used for communications. Both the sender and receiver must select the same protocol.


Overview: Choosing a shared name

TeamShow has determined that the file you want to share resides in a shared folder (directory). If the file resides in multiple shared folders (for example, within the shared folder \March within the shared folder \Sales), you will generally want the receivers to access the more restrictive folder (\March). You will need to tell the receivers the name of the shared folder to use, and if it is password protected, the read-only password for that folder.

If you are running Windows NT, using File and Printer Sharing for Netware Networks, or are using user- level security, then receivers must have user accounts and passwords to atttach to your computer.

Tip	If the file resides in a shared folder that you do not want the receivers to access (for example, your entire C drive might be defined as your only shared folder), create a new (more restricted) shared folder or move the file to an appropriate folder.

 See related topics


Overview: Identifying the other computer

When you are the sender, you must identify each receiver's computer. (The receiver does not need to identify the sender. The TeamShow software on the receiver's computer simply waits to be contacted by a TeamShow sender.)

Contact each receiver by telephone for their TCP/IP name or IP address. If the receiver cannot find their TCP/IP name or IP address, have them contact their network administrator or Internet access provider for assistance.

For information about resolving problems with connections, see Troubleshooting TeamShow.

Selecting receivers

When you add a TCP/IP name, TeamShow attempts to resolve the name to an IP address. If TeamShow cannot resolve the name, a dialog box displays suggesting that you enter the IP address instead of the TCP/IP name. If the connection succeeds, the name is added to the list of receivers. For more information, see Overview: TCP/IP, IP addresses, and host names.

TeamShow uses the receiver list from the previous TeamShow presentation. A checkmark next to a name in the list indicates that the name is selected for participation in the TeamShow presentation. Remove the checkmark (click the checkmark to remove it) next to names that you do not want to participate in the presentation. To completely remove a name from the list, select the name and click Remove.


Overview: The Mobile TeamShow Player

When you install the Mobile Screen Show Player two application icons are created: one for the Mobile Screen Show Player and one for the Mobile TeamShow Player. With the Freelance Graphics TeamShow Player you can present or view screen shows on connected computers. While a presenter on one computer runs a show, TeamShow coordinates the display of pages on the presenter's and viewer's computers.

You can download the Freelance Mobile Screen Show Player from the Lotus web site at http://www.lotus.com.

Starting Mobile TeamShow

To start the Mobile TeamShow Player, click the Mobile TeamShow icon.

The first panel will ask if you are the sender (presenter) or receiver (viewer).

For information on setting up systems to run TeamShow, see TeamShow requirements.


Overview: Receiving a presentation

As the TeamShow receiver, your computer is the passive audience for the presentation. The TeamShow sender controls the flow of the presentation (the changing of pages).

Before starting, you will need to agree with the sender on how to connect the two computers.

If you are not in voice contact with the sender, use the telephone to contact that person now.

Note	All TeamShow participants must be running one of the following:

•	Freelance Graphics 97 for Windows

•	Freelance Graphics 96 for OS/2

•	Freelance Graphics 97 Mobile TeamShow for Windows

•	Freelance Graphics 96 Mobile TeamShow for OS/2

For more information on TeamShow requirements, see TeamShow requirements.

Note	You can exit TeamShow by pressing ESC.

 See related topics


Overview: Sending a presentation

As the TeamShow sender, you select the presentation file and control the flow of the show (the changing of pages).

All TeamShow participants must be running one of the following:

•	Freelance Graphics 97 for Windows

•	Freelance Graphics 96 for OS/2

•	Freelance Graphics 97 Mobile TeamShow for Windows

•	Freelance Graphics 96 Mobile TeamShow for OS/2

For more information on TeamShow requirements, see TeamShow Requirements.

Selecting a file

If you start TeamShow from within Freelance Graphics, the current presentation file is the only file that you can share with the receiver.

If you start Mobile TeamShow, you will need to specify the presentation file.

Note	If each recipient already has a copy of the presentation, or you plan to access the presentation from a shared resource, uncheck the checkbox at the bottom of the panel.

For information about Mobile TeamShow, see Overview: The Mobile TeamShow Player.

Connecting with the receiver

Regardless of how you start TeamShow, you will need to identify the computer to receive the presentation. You will also need to agree with the receiver on how to connect the two computers.

If you are not in voice contact with the receiver of the presentation, use the telephone to contact that person now.

 See related topics


Overview: Sending or receiving a presentation

Sender

If you are presenting a screen show to someone else, you are the TeamShow sender. Speaker notes, if there are any, display only on your computer. As the sender, you control the flow of the presentation on both computers.

Receiver

If you are viewing a screen show presented by someone else, you are a TeamShow receiver.

Note	If all computers are at the same location (and cabled or networked together), be sure to designate the computer on which you want to view speaker notes and control the presentation flow as the sender, and the computers on which the viewers will watch your presentation as the receivers.

 See related topics


Overview: Sharing a presentation file

You can share a copy of the presentation file, send a copy of the file to the receivers, or indicate that all users already have separate copies and will use those.

Sending a version of the file to the receivers

If you are using a slow connection, such as a modem, this is the best option in terms of performance. Sending a copy of the presentation to each participant is the most reliable method for sharing a presentation file.

Indicating that all users already have copies

This option is useful in a case where the connection was interrupted, but you know that your receivers already have copies of the file, and you do not want to resend it. You must exercise caution, however, and be certain that each receiver has the same version of the file you have, and not an earlier one.

Sharing from a network server

To share a presentation file from a network server make sure that the file is stored on a server to which the receivers have access.

Sharing from a shared area of your computer

To share a presentation file from a shared area of the sender's computer:

•	Windows 95 and Windows NT: The receivers must have access to the shared folder in which the file resides.

•	Windows 95 only: The sender must have the file sharing service installed and turned on.

Sharing an external storage document

Freelance allows you to open presentations stored in Notes databases, ODMA Document Management Systems, FTP servers, or Web pages over the Internet. You can share these externally stored documents with receivers that are running Freelance (not the Mobile Screen Show Player) and have access to the document.

Access control

Windows 95 lets you choose either user-level or share-level access. Windows NT only has user-level access. See your operating system documentation for more detailed information.

User-level access

For user-level access, the receiver's name must appear in the list of users having access to the shared folder.

Share-level access

For share-level access, we recommend that you choose a folder that has no password for read-only access, or that you delete the password for read-only access before you finish the TeamShow setup procedures.

 See related topics


Overview: TCP/IP, IP addresses, and host names

TCP/IP provides communication across interconnected networks that use diverse hardware architectures and operating systems.

About Names and IP address

To complete a connection between participating computers, TeamShow must obtain the correct IP address of each computer. Computers use these IP addresses to identify each other. Users usually find it easier to work with computer names, and TCP/IP automatically attempts to resolve computer names to IP addresses. However, in many cases the name resolution will not successfully identify the IP address. If a connection cannot be made in TeamShow because the host name could not be found, you must enter the IP address. For more information, see Troubleshooting TeamShow.

TeamShow and the Internet

Computers that are not on the same physical LAN can run TeamShow by communicating over the Internet, provided that:

•	None of the computers are behind a firewall (security measures that prevent access to the computer).

•	There are one or more "gateways" that can connect the two machines.

If you are not sure if there is a Firewall at your company, or a gateway that can connect you to the remote computer(s), please consult your network administrator. For more information, see Troubleshooting TeamShow.

Note	 If you use an Internet access provider such as Compuserve or the Microsoft Network, you do not have a Firewall between you and the Internet.

Connecting two computers directly

It is sometimes useful to connect two computers directly. For example, you could connect your laptop to a computer connected to a projection screen. This would enable you to view speaker notes on your laptop while your audience views the presentation on the projection screen.

There are various methods available for connecting the two computers, including:

•	Connecting the two computers with Ethernet but not on a LAN

•	Having one computer dial up another directly

•	Connecting the two computers with a parallel or serial cable

When you connect the two computers directly you must make sure that:

•	An IP address is bound to the adapter you're using (network interface card or dial-up networking)

•	The IP addresses are on the same subnet ( For more information, see Troubleshooting TeamShow)

If you don't understand these requirements you should get help from your network administrator before attempting to connect the computers.


Overview: TeamShow alternatives

Using TeamShow is the best way to present a finished screen show to an audience on remote computers. As the presenter, you control the sequence and timing of the presentation pages. Your viewers can focus on your presentation without being distracted by the mechanics of moving from page to page.

But if you need to present to someone whose computer does not have Freelance Graphics or the TeamShow application installed, you can create one of the alternative standalone presentations described below. Once your viewers have access to one of these, you can provide instructions on the use of the appropriate viewing tool over the telephone, as you step the viewers through your presentation.

Mobile Screen Show Player

The Mobile Screen Show Player is a separate application that runs external to Freelance Graphics. You can mail a finished Freelance Graphics presentation file, together with the Mobile Screen Show Player, to anyone running a 32-bit Windows operating computer. For more information about using the Mobile Screen Show Player, open that application and choose Help - Help Topics.

For information about the Mobile TeamShow Player, see Overview: The Mobile TeamShow Player.

World Wide Web Presentations

Presenting the screen show on the Web is best if your viewer's computer (for example, a Macintosh or UNIX computer) cannot run Freelance Graphics or the Mobile Screen Show Player. If your intended viewers have a World Wide Web browser (for example, Mosaic or Netscape), you can have Freelance Graphics "publish" your completed presentation as a set of Web pages. You can then store the pages on a Web server, or mail them directly to each user as file attachments.

 See related topics


TeamShow requirements

To participate in a TeamShow presentation all participants must have:

•	Compatible versions of FreeLance Graphics

•	An active network connection

•	TCP/IP

All participants should be in voice contact for both setting up and running the TeamShow presentation.

Compatible versions of Freelance

TeamShow is not compatible with earlier versions of Freelance Graphics. All TeamShow participants must be running one of the following versions of Freelance Graphics:

•	Freelance Graphics 97 for Windows

•	Freelance Graphics 96 for OS/2

•	Freelance Graphics 97 Mobile TeamShow for Windows

•	Freelance Graphics 96 Mobile TeamShow for OS/2

Note	You can download a copy of the Freelance 97 Mobile Screen Show Player from the Lotus web site at http://www.lotus.com. The installation process for the Mobile Screen Show Player creates an icon to run Mobile TeamShow.

Network requirements

TeamShow is a network-based feature, and uses standard third-party network protocols to communicate between the various participants. TeamShow requires:

•	An active network connection between participating systems.

•	All TeamShow participants must be running TCP/IP as at least one of their network protocols.

Network connection

An active network connection can be accomplished by having:

•	Each system on the same physical LAN, with the TCP/IP protocol bound to each system's network interface card (NIC).

•	Each system on LANs that are interconnected by a proprietary WAN. With this type of connection you should consult your network administrator to determine how to use TCP/IP to communicate between the different LANs over your WAN (with TCP/IP bound to each system's NIC).

•	Each system on LANs that are interconnected via the Internet (with TCP/IP bound to each system's NIC). With this type of connection you could experience problems if there is a firewall between participating systems. For more information, see Troubleshooting TeamShow.

•	One or more systems connected by modem and telephone lines directly to a LAN reachable by the other systems, through utilities such as Microsoft's Dial Up Networking Win95 or Microsoft's Remote Access Services for Windows NT, on the client side, and Microsoft's Remote Access Services, Novell NetWare Connect server, or the Shiva LanRover or NetModem/E families of remote access servers, on the server side (with TCP/IP bound to each system's dial up adapters). If you aren't sure this is the type of connection you have, you should consult your network administrator.

•	One or more systems connected by modem and telephone lines to the Internet through an Internet access provider such as Compuserve or the Microsoft Network (with TCP/IP bound to their dial up adapters).

•	The computers directly connected through a modem, serial, or parallel cable, using third-party software such as Dial Up Networking or LapLink. With this type of connection you must be sure that each computer has a valid IP address associated with its dial up adapter, and that these IP addresses are compatible with one another for communication. If you use this type of connection you should contact your network administrator. For more information, see Overview: TCP/IP, IP addresses, and host names.

TCP/IP

To verify that you have TCP/IP installed, open the Network Control Panel at Start Menu -Settings - Control Panel, and check to see if TCP/IP is listed as one of the network components installed. If TCP/IP is not installed, you should ask your network administrator or Internet access provider how to install TCP/IP. For more information, see Overview: TCP/IP, IP addresses, and host names.

 See related topics


Overview: Troubleshooting TeamShow

Testing for a gateway

An IP address is a globally unique identifier for a computer. If you are given the IP address of a host computer, your computer could theoretically reach that host from anywhere in the world. However, to reach the host computer, your computer needs a route to the IP address. Depending on the IP addresses of the two computers, a gateway might be required to define the route to the IP address of the host computer.

An IP address is divided into four subparts called  "octets". The range of the first three numbers of the IP address (or first octet) specify the IP address class. There is a subnet mask for each class. In the following table the parts of the IP address, where the subnet mask is 255, describe a subnet. The parts of the subnet mask that are zeros, are the individual workstations in that subnet. For example, if the IP address is 198.184.36.212 then the subnet is 198.184.36 and the individual workstation is 212.

Address class	Range of first octet	Subnet mask
Class A	1 - 126	255.0.0.0
Class B	128 - 191	255.255.0.0
Class C	192 - 223	255.255.255.0
If both IP addresses are on the same subnet, then there is no problem. If they are not,  there must be a gateway capable of getting from one subnet to the other. If both subnets are part of your company's LAN, there are probably gateways in place. If the computer you are trying to contact is outside the LAN, your company might have a firewall in place to prevent you from communicating to points outside the LAN. If you cabling two systems together, you will not have a gateway.

There are different utilities you can run (for example, WINIPCFG for Windows 95 or IPCONFIG for Windows NT) to identify your IP address. To find out if you have a gateway, run the utilitity on both computers and note both the IP address and the subnet mask. For each of the four octets in the subnet mask with a "255", both IP addresses must match. For each octet in the subnet mask with a "0", the IP addresses must differ. If the IP addresses do not match where the subnet mask is "255", then there must be a gateway that knows how to route data from one machine to the other.

Testing name resolution

To check the host name and host IP address to verify the connection with a remote TCP/IP computer, you can use a Microsoft diagnostic utility called "ping". To determine whether you configured the IP address properly, use ping with the IP address of your computer, your default gateway, and a remote host. Refer to Microsoft's documentation for more information about using the Microsoft diagnostic utilities.

Open an MS-DOS prompt, and at the command line, type in PING MACHINE-NAME, using the same name you tried in TeamShow. If ping gives the error "Bad IP address", then your system is unable to resolve that name to an address. If both computers are at the same company, you can try the name without the host.domain suffix. For example, if the receiver's machine is called "myhost.lotus.com", you can type PING MYHOST. If ping successfully receives packets from the other machine, then try that name in TeamShow .

Connection failures

There are three situations in which the connection can fail:

•	The sender cannot resolve the name of one or more of the receivers to its IP address.

•	The sender cannot reach one or more of the receivers, even if it knows the IP address.

•	The computers involved do not have a network connection between them.

The sender cannot connect to the receiver by name

The preferred way of identifying the remote computer(s) is by host name. Host names look something like "myhost.lotus.com" and IP addresses appear as a sequence of four integers separated by dots.

To use the name you enter, TeamShow must resolve the name to an IP address. If it cannot resolve the name, you must use the IP address. If the TeamShow sender fails to connect to one or more of the receivers, first try to determine whether the problem is in name resolution.

The sender knows the address but still cannot connect

If ping determines the address of the receiver's machine by name but displays the message "Request Timed Out" one of the following problems exists:

•	The receiver's system is not running TeamShow or has not selected Finish.

•	There is not an active network running between the two systems (for example, the direct cable connection or dial-up networking did not connect properly).

If ping gives the error "Destination Host Unreachable,"  one of the following problems exists:

•	You or the receiver, or both, are behind a firewall. Any computer at a site protected by a firewall must bypass the firewall by logging on to an Internet access provider or dialing up directly to the LAN of the other user.

•	The gateway between the computers is down or the route to the destination address cannot be found because the computers are on different subnets. In this case, you should get help from your network administrator.

•	There is no gateway because you are using dial-up networking or direct cable connection to directly connect two computers. You must alter the IP address of one of the machines to match subnet mask 255 to the IP address, or, find another method of connecting the machines. Please ask your network administrator or Internet access provider for help.

There is no network between the machines

You should get help from your Internet access provider or network administrator with any of the following situations:

•	One or more of the computers does not have a network adapter card.

•	One or more of the computers is connected to the Internet at a site protected by a firewall.

•	One or more of the computers is attempting to log in to a LAN or the Internet using an Internet access provider, Windows NT remote access server, or other third-party product, but the connection is not properly configured.

Port number

TeamShow uses the hard-coded port number 21300. If you have problems connecting, there might be a conflict with an existing service. If TeamShow fails to work due to a port conflict, you should remove or temporarily disable the service using that port. If you do not know how to do this, consult your network administrator or refer to your operating system documentation.

 See related topics


Overview: Using TeamShow

Use TeamShow to present or view screen shows on connected computers. While a presenter on one computer runs a show, TeamShow coordinates the display of pages on the presenter's and viewer's computers. Speaker notes, when used, display only on the presenter's computer. For information on setting up systems to run TeamShow, see TeamShow requirements.

Before you start

If you are the presenter, make sure that your presentation was saved with "Prepare for Mobile Screen Show Player" selected in the Save As dialog box. This ensures that all of the items in your presentation (charts, images, sounds, and so on) are contained within your file. If this option is no selected, your presentation file may contain only pointers to items in other files, and those files may not be available to your viewers.

Note	If you are running a DMS, it automatically saves a presentation so it can be run by the Mobile Screen Show Player. See Overview: Using DMS dialog boxes.

Starting TeamShow

You can start TeamShow from within Freelance Graphics, or you can run TeamShow as a separate application.

To start TeamShow from within Freelance Graphics, choose File - TeamShow - Send (to present a show), or File - TeamShow - Receive (to view a show).

To start TeamShow as a separate application, click the TeamShow icon (which is installed in your Freelance Graphics folder).

The first panel will ask if you are the sender (presenter) or receiver (viewer).

 See related topics


Overview: Design tips

You do not need to have expertise in graphic design in order to produce professional-looking presentations. Freelance Graphics includes easy-to-use SmartMaster content topics, a variety of page layouts, ready-made diagrams, and clip art.

One key to executing good design is being able to see your presentation as your audience will see it. Two Freelance Graphics features help you gain this objectivity while you are working on a presentation:

•	Use File - Print Preview to see what printed output will look like. See Previewing a presentation.

•	Use the Color/B&W toggle to get an idea of how your presentation will look as a black-and-white printout. See Switching a presentation between color and black and white.

Click the Related topics button below to learn about more specific design tips.

 See related topics


Designing bulleted lists

Bulleted lists present information in a compact, easy-to-read format.

•	Aim for three to five bulleted items in a column; avoid more than seven.

•	Begin and end each bulleted item on the same page.

•	Use phrases rather than sentences in bulleted items.

•	Use no more than seven words in each bulleted item in a single-column list. Use only four to six words per item in a two-column list.

•	Use parallel syntax in your phrases. For example, begin each item with a verb, or use a list of nouns.

•	Add clip art to a page with a bulleted list to illustrate your topic or add levity. If you use clip art as a bullet, avoid using an image that overpowers or detracts from your message.

•	Avoid creating a bulleted list that spans multiple pages.

 See related topics


Choosing the best SmartMaster look for the situation

Freelance Graphics provides many SmartMaster looks for presentation backgrounds. Each look is designed to provide good contrast between the text and the background colors. You might consider the following things when choosing a look.

•	The look you choose can set the tone for your presentation--formal, serious, informal, or humorous.

•	The background may contain busy or simple designs.

•	You can add clip art to any page to add flair or make a point.

•	For a multimedia screen show, choose a multimedia look, or add movies and sound to your presentation.

•	Choose a look that is suited to your delivery medium. For example, if you will deliver your presentation as slides or on a computer or video monitor as a screen show, choose a look with white or light text on a dark background.

 See related topics


Using clip art

Clip art can clarify your message and add humor to your presentation.

•	Try to include at least one image every few pages.

•	If a piece of clip art is not the right orientation, rotate or flip it.

•	Use clip art that complements your message. You can size objects to avoid large images that overpower your message.

•	Use clip art images to replace text in diagrams.

•	For convenience, add your company logo to the clip art library.

 See related topics


Adding color wisely

Judicious use of color adds polish and flair to a presentation.

•	Use a distinct or bright color to focus attention.

•	Downplay an element by coloring it gray or blue-gray.

•	Use no more than three main colors on a contrasting background.

•	Avoid colors that clash or colors that tend to blend.

•	Avoid using color to differentiate objects if your audience is likely to print your presentation on a black-and-white printer; use shapes or patterns instead.

•	Do not use red and green together; some people have red/green color blindness.

•	When picking colors, use the sixteen suggested colors in the top two rows in the color library.

•	If you depart from the SmartMaster look color scheme, use either light text on a dark background, or dark, solid-color text on a white or light background.

 See related topics


Understanding color psychology (United States)

There are some common color associations that might help you plan the colors you use in your presentations.

•	Red represents intensity. A red background can indicate passion or competition.

•	Blue is calm and serene. In the background, it indicates trust, order, and balance.

•	Green stimulates discussion. In the background, it signals openness or intelligence.

•	Black often indicates financial gain. In the background, black suggests a direct approach.

•	Yellow is cheerful, stimulating, or futuristic.

•	Purple is mystical or magical, often suggesting fantasy.

•	Brown represents security.

•	Gray is a neutral color.

 See related topics


Creating effective diagrams

Diagrams are often composed of different text shapes and connectors. You can use diagrams to illustrate processes and structures.

•	Before you create a diagram, look at diagrams in the diagram library. You may find images and ready-made diagrams you can use right away.

•	You can use the drawing tools to create shapes with or without text and to design custom diagrams.

•	Keep diagrams simple and uncluttered.

•	Use a common shape, color, or background to associate related elements.

•	Use arrows or lines to indicate flow. Number them to indicate sequence.

•	Make the most important element large or colorful, but do not make it stand out too much.

•	Size your diagrams in relation to the other elements on the page.

•	Clearly label important elements that may not be understood.

•	Try to arrange the left and right or top and bottom parts of a diagram so the information looks balanced on the page.

 See related topics


Using drawings for impact

Use drawings to enhance and clarify your message.

•	Before you create a drawing, take a look at the clip art library to find ready-made images and drawings you can use right away.

•	You can use the drawing tools to create your own drawings.

•	Keep drawings simple and uncluttered.

•	Use a common shape, color, or background to associate related elements.

•	Use arrows or lines to indicate flow. Number them to indicate sequence.

•	Make the most important element large or colorful, but do not make it stand out too much.

•	Size your drawings in relation to the other elements on the page.

•	Use points mode to make fine adjustments to a drawing. When you complete a drawing, you can group the elements back together as one object.

•	Try to arrange the left and right or top and bottom parts of a drawing so it looks balanced on the page.

 See related topics


Design tips for clip art, diagrams, and drawings

The selected object may be one of three types: a piece of clip art, a diagram, or a drawing.

For design tips on a particular grouped object, choose one of the following:

Using clip art

Creating effective diagrams

Using drawings for impact


Using imported images to make a point

You can import images created in other applications, such as photographs, scanned images, bitmaps, or drawings.

•	Add your company logo to the clip art library.

•	Crop images down to the most important elements, eliminating unnecessary details.

•	When using an image of a person next to text, face the subject of the image toward the text.

 See related topics


Fine-tuning organization charts

Organization charts are useful for showing the structure of an organization or team.

Keep the organization chart simple and uncluttered

•	If the organization chart will appear in a screen show, limit it to three or four levels.

•	If the organization chart will appear in a printed handout, limit it to six levels.

•	Consider breaking a complex chart up into several smaller ones.

Experiment with layouts and formats

•	Boxes with shadows suggest authority; rounded rectangles or ovals suggest less authoritative roles; and names without shapes around them suggest the least authoritative structure.

•	You can also use different styles for the lowest level of the chart.

•	Use a row of boxes or a boxed list to place importance on individuals at the lowest level.

•	Use a plain or ladder list to suggest more casual roles or to fit more information on the organization chart.

•	Use a border around the organization chart if there are other objects on the page.

•	To emphasize a hierarchy, make the connecting lines thicker or more colorful.

 See related topics


Enhancing tables

Tables are useful for illustrating comparisons.

Table style and format

•	If a table has more than two columns and four rows, display lines in the table.

•	If there are other objects on the page, use a style with a line around the outside edge of the table.

•	You can also change the color and format of text and lines in a table.

•	If the table will appear only in a printed handout, limit it to six columns and twenty rows.

•	If the table will appear only in a screen show, limit it to three columns and eight rows.

Text in tables

•	Use simple phrases rather than sentences for table entries.

•	Use parallel syntax: begin each entry with a verb, or use a list of nouns.

 See related topics


Presenting great-looking text

If you depart from the default settings in the SmartMaster look, keep the following guidelines in mind.

•	Use a font size large enough for your audience to read. Choose a size that will display three to five lines of text per page.

•	Use bold, italic, or underline sparingly for emphasis.

•	Avoid more than a few words in ALL CAPS.

•	Use a drop shadow for dramatic effect. See Adding a drop shadow to text.

•	Avoid ornate or novelty typefaces.

•	Balance your use of text with clip art. See Adding clip art to one page.

•	Avoid entering text in the margins or too close to the edge of the page.

 See related topics


Design tips for text or bulleted lists

The words on your presentation page can be plain text or a bulleted list. To see design tips pertaining to one or the other, choose one of the following:

Presenting great-looking text

Designing bulleted lists


Overview: Presentation tips

Use these presentation tips as general guidelines for creating and giving presentations.

Defining what you want to say and how to say it

See Defining your message.

Structuring and writing your presentation

See Structuring a presentation and How to write for a presentation.

Enhancing your presentation with graphics

See Thinking visually.

Speaking in front of an audience

See Speaking in front of an audience.

Use these presentation tips, in combination with the design tips, to assist you in planning, writing, and giving presentations.

 See related topics


Answering audience questions

A question-and-answer session after your presentation reinforces your message and proves your competence.

•	Listen intently to the question, looking directly at the questioner. Try to fully understand the question before you begin to formulate an answer.

•	Gain a few moments of thinking time before responding to a question. This allows you to come up with an appropriate answer. There are several tactics you can use to gain time:

•	Repetition--Repeat or restate the question.

•	Lead-in--Use a lead-in such as "I'm glad you asked that."

•	Acknowledge emotion--If the questioner's tone is hostile, respond to the emotion. For example, tell the questioner that you are sorry that he or she had a negative experience.

•	Give the best and shortest answer you can.

•	Never guess at an answer. If you are not sure of the facts, say that you do not know the answer and will obtain it for the questioner.

•	Restate or reinforce your message at the end of each answer.

•	Move on to the next question as soon as you finish an answer. This gives authority to the answer you just gave.


Being aware of body language

The audience reads your body language as much as they read your slides or listen to your words.

•	Stand whenever possible. Standing gives you an air of authority, makes your voice project better, and makes it easier for you to gesture.

•	Smile when you first get up to speak, and again whenever appropriate. A smile goes a long way toward making you and your audience comfortable.

•	Maintain eye contact: talk one-to-one. Look directly at one person at a time. Stay with each person for a sentence or two (five to seven seconds) and then move on to someone in another part of the room.

•	Keep your feet squarely planted on the floor about a shoulder's width apart. Avoid shifting your weight or rocking back and forth. (If you must rock, put one foot in front of the other; rocking forward and back is less noticeable than rocking side to side.)

•	Avoid fidgeting with your hands. Do not play with pencils, papers, eyeglasses, hair, or clothing. (If fidgety hands are a big problem for you, keep your arms at your sides.)

•	Do not simply read aloud from your slides. Each time you advance to a new page, pause and refresh your memory by reading the page text to yourself; then, turn back to the audience and discuss each point in turn.

Note	Pausing before you speak also gives your audience a moment to read the text; if you begin to speak too soon, they will still be reading instead of listening.


Choosing a delivery medium

Freelance Graphics offers many ways to deliver presentations.

Tips for informal training and collaborative meetings

•	For groups of two to 15, use printed handouts with one page per sheet.

•	Enter your narrative or background information in speaker notes and print the presentation with the notes alongside or below your graphics.

Tip	Be aware that people will at first pay more attention to the handout than to what you are saying. Give people time to read through the handout before you begin speaking.

Tips for formal presentations to groups of 15 to 100

•	For groups of 15 to 100, overheads are a good choice. Because you can use them with the house lights on, overheads allow the audience to take notes and to see the speaker--which makes for a more interactive situation.

•	For groups of more than 50, use 35mm slides in a darkened room to display the sharpest and brightest still images. Slides are compact and portable, as well as easy to use and duplicate.

•	For dynamic special effects in formal presentations, show your presentation as a screen show. To make a screen show more visible to large audiences, use a video monitor or large screen projection equipment.

•	If you do a formal presentation using overheads, slides, or a screen show, you may also want to hand out paper copies of the presentation. Then your audience can follow along, take notes, or save the copies for reference.

Note	The drawback to paper copies is that your audience may be tempted to read the handouts rather than listen to you. To prevent this, you could hand out the printed materials at the end of your presentation.

Tips for situations where you cannot be there in person

•	When you cannot be there, use the TeamShow feature in Freelance Graphics.

•	When you want detailed feedback, use the TeamReview feature in Freelance Graphics.

•	When you simply want to make a presentation to others, mail the screen show file or post it in a Notes presentation library.

•	For networked colleagues who do not have Freelance Graphics, send a screen show using the Mobile Screen Show Player.

•	When you want to make the presentation available on the World Wide Web, save it so that it can be posted as a Web presentation.

 See related topics


Organizing your work with SmartMaster content topics

Freelance Graphics provides SmartMaster content topics that are templates for creating different types of business presentations. For example, you can prepare a Business Plan, a Project Proposal, or a Competitor Analysis by choosing that content topic.

When you start a new presentation, you can select one or more pages as needed, and choose from content pages or standard page layouts.

•	Choose File - New Presentation to select the content topic that suits your goals, audience, and delivery medium.

•	Fill in the page layouts as directed and use the Content Advice to help you.

•	You can skip pages you do not need or use the same page several times.

•	You can change the background look of your presentation at any time if you see a SmartMaster look that better suits your audience or your goals.

•	Content pages are suggestions for complete coverage of a topic, but you can also create your own pages by modifying the suggested pages.

•	Rearrange pages as needed by clicking the Page Sorter tab and dragging pages to new locations.

•	Click the Outliner tab to review the text in page titles and organize your ideas in bulleted lists.

•	Use speaker notes to jot down reminders of things you would like to say when you give your presentation.

 See related topics


Defining your message

You will want to define your message even before you begin working on a presentation.

•	Clarify your objective, goal, or conclusion. A good way to check that you are clear about your objective is to make sure you can state it in one sentence.

•	Decide what type of presentation you are doing: informative, persuasive, or a combination of both. Informative presentations promote understanding, while persuasive presentations influence choices or behaviors.

•	Analyze your audience; think about what interests or concerns they may bring to the presentation. Slant the presentation to address their needs.

•	Know how much time your presentation should take. If you do not have a specific time allotment, make your own assessment of how much time is appropriate. Be sure to err on the side of brevity. (Keep in mind that when a speaker delivers a presentation in front of an audience, he or she usually takes one to four minutes per page.)

•	Research your topic thoroughly. Use facts, examples, and concrete details rather than abstract theories and unsupported arguments.

 See related topics


Rehearsing

Choose Presentation - Rehearse - Start to run through and time your presentation.

•	When you rehearse, use the same delivery medium and props you will use during the actual presentation: screen show, paper handouts, slides, or overheads. This will familiarize you with any equipment or other objects you need to handle.

•	Although you may feel silly at first, practice your gestures and movements along with your words.

•	Use printed speaker notes to remind you of points you want to make. Do not try to memorize your speech or read word-for-word from a manuscript.

•	Rehearse aloud. Do not just "think through" your speech.

•	Try to rehearse in front of a small audience of coworkers who can give you feedback on your presentation style.

•	If possible, have someone videotape you while you rehearse. Viewing the tape will give you excellent feedback on what you are doing right and how you can improve. Repeated taping and viewing of your performance usually leads to quick improvement of presentation skills.

 See related topics


Speaking in front of an audience

Feeling nervous about public speaking is natural; it happens to everyone, even those who appear confident. Although you may think the audience can tell when you are nervous, they actually have no way of knowing. Always bear in mind that the audience is on your side; they want you to succeed.

•	Pretend you are relaxed and confident even if you are not; concentrate on the audience getting your message, rather than on how you look or feel.

•	Enunciate clearly and avoid mumbling. Slow down your normal speech rhythm and make sure you open your mouth wide enough.

•	Use your voice to project. This does not mean speaking loudly, but making your voice carry to the person furthest away.

•	Use simple language that is easy to understand; avoid jargon.

•	If you stumble or need a moment to think, simply pause and quietly take a deep breath; your audience will perceive you as having character and authority.

•	Keep a glass of water nearby in case your mouth gets dry (or you need an excuse for a longer pause).

•	Never admit nervousness to the audience and never apologize. If you leave something out, just go ahead and mention it when you think of it.


Structuring a presentation

A successful presentation is composed of three parts:

•	The introduction--Captures the attention of the audience. At the very least, it states the purpose of the presentation; it can also lay out the potential benefits to the audience, state the qualifications of the speaker, and preview the main points. (10% of the presentation)

•	The body--Builds your case. This is where you explain the topics--in the same order they were listed in the introduction. Remember to use seven or fewer main points. (70% of the presentation)

•	The conclusion--Restates your purpose, summarizes the main points, restates the benefits, and thanks your audience. (20% of the presentation)

Ways to organize your presentation

Use one of the following tried-and-true methods to organize the body of your presentation.

•	Topical--Divides the body of your presentation into subtopics, for example, from simple to complex, from general to specific, or from familiar to unfamiliar. (This is the easiest and most popular method.)

•	Cause and effect--Examines the known and suspected causes of a situation.

•	Spatial--Arranges topics according to their position in space or geographical location.

•	Chronological--Arranges topics by order or date of occurrence.

•	Problem-solution--States a problem, explores it, and suggests a solution.

•	Pro and con--Lists points for and against competing solutions to a problem; end by summarizing the arguments and pitching your solution (after discrediting the other alternatives).

•	Non-controversial to controversial--First, states arguments that your audience accepts without misgivings, and then gradually works up to the more controversial positions.


Thinking visually

Graphics get information across quickly, spark interest, improve comprehension, and aid memory. Think creatively about converting words to graphics.

Clip art or drawings

Use clip art to emphasize or illustrate points, to depict items that cannot be photographed, and to succinctly replace wordy details. See Using clip art.

Data charts

Use data charts to compare numbers, show changes over time, show relationships among data, or to present statistics--even if only two or three numbers are involved. In the Help Contents under "How Do I?," choose "Work with Charts."

Tables

Use tables to break down financial data, to show the relation of a whole to its parts, and for comparisons. See Enhancing tables.

Diagrams

Substitute diagrams for abstract ideas and processes. See Creating effective diagrams.

Organization charts

Use organization charts to demonstrate the makeup of a company, or to illustrate a reorganization of personnel. See Creating an organization chart.

Animated clip art or movies

Use animated clip art or movies to add dramatic multimedia effects. See Overview: Movies and sound.

Maps

Use maps to present information that has a geographical component, such as sales figures by region. The clip art library includes many useful maps. See Adding clip art to one page.

Bitmaps

Import bitmaps of images that have been created in other applications. See Importing objects and files.

Scanned photographs

Use images that have been scanned (in other applications) to show particular people, make something appear very real, or to illustrate objects difficult to draw. See Importing objects and files.

Bulleted lists

Use bulleted lists to summarize lengthy information, list key points, and show parts of a whole. See Designing bulleted lists.


How to write for a presentation

Writing for a presentation requires organization, brevity, and careful use of language.

State your main ideas

•	State the main topic for each page in the title. Use emphatic titles such as "Sales Post Record Highs" rather than "Quarterly Sales."

•	Limit the key topics to seven or fewer per presentation. (Keep in mind that a formal presentation takes one to four minutes per page--without audience questions.)

Use appropriate language

•	Use language appropriate to your audience and avoid jargon. Take into account the ages, values, and level of understanding of your audience.

•	Use vivid nouns and strong verbs; minimize the number of prepositions, adverbs, and adjectives. For example, say "Multimedia impact" rather than "The advantages we gain from using interesting movies and clever sounds."

•	Avoid the passive voice. For example, say "The audience loved the presentation" rather than "The presentation was well-received."

Use bulleted lists

•	When writing bulleted lists, express one point in each bulleted item.

•	Use phrases rather than sentences in bulleted items and use parallel syntax in your phrases. For example, begin each item with a verb, or use a list of nouns.

•	For presentations you deliver in person, be brief in your bulleted items; let your spoken words fill in the details.

•	For presentations that you will not deliver in person, the text in your bulleted items needs to stand on its own so it can be more detailed.

•	For training or reference presentations, be brief in your bulleted items, and write detailed information in speaker notes you print alongside or below your graphics.

 See related topics


Overview: Adding text

There are several ways to add text to a page. Choose the method that best suits your needs.

You can:

•	Fill in a "Click here..." text block. See Filling in a "Click here..." text block.

•	Create your own text block. See Adding a text block.

•	Enter text in Outliner view. See Adding text in Outliner view.

•	Copy and paste text from another application. See Copying objects from one place to another.

•	Import text from another application. See Importing objects and files.


Adding a text block

You can create your own text block to add a label, a callout, or some other annotation to a page.

1.	Choose Create - Text.

2.	Position the mouse pointer where you want one corner of the text block, and drag a rectangle that delineates the text block.

3.	Begin typing.

4.	(Optional) To start a new line, press ENTER.

5.	When you are finished, click OK.

Note	This procedure creates a wrapping text block. To create a non-wrapping text block, in step 2 click instead of dragging. Then continue with step 3.

 See details


Details: Adding a text block

Placing a text block

If there is other text already on the page, be careful when dragging a rectangle for the new text. If you start the rectangle on top of an existing text block, you will be selecting and editing the existing text instead of creating a new text block.

It may be easier to drag the rectangle somewhere else on the page and move it to the proper location after you have typed the text.

Switching between wrapping and non-wrapping text

To select or deselect "Word wrap," click the Alignment tab in the InfoBox.

Resizing a non-wrapping text block

If you resize a non-wrapping text block, it automatically becomes a wrapping text block.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Text blocks and text levels

Each page layout provides "Click here..." text blocks. Each "Click here..." text block displays a prompt to tell you what kind of text to type. For example:

•	Click here to type presentation title

•	Click here to type project status

•	Click here to list meeting goals

When you click a "Click here..." text block and type text, Freelance Graphics automatically places and formats the text you add.

The position of the text is determined by the placement of the text block on the page layout. The text properties are determined by the named style assigned to the text block. This lets you "fill in the blanks" of your presentation pages, without worrying about their format.

The format and position of these text blocks on the presentation page are based on the SmartMaster look you are using. If you choose a different look, the format and position of the text you type in "Click here..." text blocks changes to match the new look.

Note	If you begin typing without having selected a text block, Freelance Graphics will automatically place your text in the highest priority text block on the page. For example, a "Click here..." text block that says "Click here to type page title" has a higher priority than one that says "Click here to type bulleted list."

Text levels

Each text block has five levels of text. Each level has text properties such as indentation, typeface, color, and size. This is an example of a text block that uses all five text levels:

To indent a level of text, press TAB. To outdent a level of text, press SHIFT+TAB.

Tip	You can move from text block to text block in a presentation by pressing ↑ from the last line of text or ↓ from the first line of text.

 See related topics


Filling in a "Click here..." text block

1.	Click a "Click here..." text block, such as "Click here to list eligiblity requirements," and begin typing.

2.	To start a new bullet in a bulleted list, press ENTER.

3.	To indent a level, click between a bullet and its text and press TAB.

4.	To outdent a level, click between a bullet and its text and press SHIFT+TAB.

5.	When you are finished, click OK.

Tip	To force a line break in a text block, press CTRL+ENTER.

 See details


Details: Filling in a "Click here..." text block

Clicking once in a "Click here..." text block that is not yet filled in lets you start typing text. If there is text in a text block, single-clicking selects the text block; double-clicking lets you start typing or editing text.

If you do not fill in a "Click here..." text block on a presentation page, Freelance Graphics does not print the "Click here..." text or display it in a screen show.

If you begin typing without being in a text block, Freelance Graphics automatically puts your text in the text block with the highest priority on the page.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Deleting a text block

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Edit - Cut.

Notes

You cannot delete a text block while you are working in it. Press ESC to stop working in a text block.

To delete a "Click here..." text block, you have to redesign the page layout. See Customizing page layouts.


Adding sub-bullets

1.	Double-click the bulleted list text block.

2.	Click at the end of the bulleted text under which you want the sub-bullet to appear.

3.	Press ENTER.

4.	Press TAB to indent, then type the text for the sub-bullet.

5.	To add another sub-bullet, press ENTER.

6.	To outdent a bullet, click between a bullet and its text and press SHIFT+TAB.

7.	When you complete the list, click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Adding sub-bullets

Tips for creating and editing bullets

To do this:	Use:
Start a new bullet in a bulleted list	ENTER.
Force a line break	CONTROL+ENTER.
Indent a bullet	or TAB.
Outdent a bullet	or SHIFT+TAB.
Change text properties	Text menu commands, SmartIcons, or the InfoBox.
Delete a bullet	BACKSPACE.
Change properties (e.g., bullet type, size, or color) for one text level	The InfoBox. Under Properties for, select the level you want to change.
Automatic continuation

If a bulleted list has so many items that the text extends beyond the printable area of the page, Freelance Graphics offers to create another page. The new page will have the same title as the original page, with "(continued)" appended to the title.

 Go to procedure


Changing the bullet type, size, or color

 Show me a demo

1.	Click a filled-in bulleted or numbered list text block.

2.	Choose Text - Bullets & Numbers or click here [image].

3.	(Optional) Under Properties for, select "All Text Levels" or a specific text level.

4.	To change the bullet size, under Size, select a size.

5.	To change the bullet type, under Style, select a type.

6.	To change the bullet color, under Color, select a color from the 16 suggested choices at the top of the color library.

7.	Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	If you modify properties for a particular level of text, for example, Level 1 Text, Freelance Graphics changes the bullets only for that level.

Tip	You can easily create and reuse a customized bullet style by using a named style.

 See related topics


Rearranging items in a bulleted list

1.	Double-click the bulleted list text block.

2.	Place the mouse pointer on the bullet in front of the item you want to move.

3.	Press the left mouse button. When the mouse pointer changes to a hand, drag the bullet to its new location in the list.

The mouse pointer changes to a clenched hand when you start to drag. A horizontal line shows the new location of the bullet as you drag it around.

When you release the mouse, the clenched hand changes back to an open hand.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 to rearrange other items in the list.

5.	When you finish rearranging the list, click OK.


Creating a bulleted list

The best way to create a bulleted list is to use a bulleted list page layout.

1.	Click the New Page button or click here [image].

2.	If you are using a SmartMaster content topic, select a page with a bulleted list. Otherwise, select the Bulleted List or 2-Column Bullets page layout.

3.	Click OK.

4.	On the new page, click the "Click here..." bulleted list text block.

5.	Type the text for your first bullet.

6.	Press ENTER to move to a new line that starts with a bullet.

Tip	Press TAB to indent a level; press SHIFT+TAB to outdent a level.

7.	When you complete the list, click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating bulleted lists
Details: Creating a bulleted list

Tips for creating and editing a bulleted list

To do this:	Use:
Start a new bullet in a bulleted list	ENTER.
Force a line break	CONTROL+ENTER.
Indent a bullet	or TAB.
Outdent a bullet	or SHIFT+TAB.
Change text properties	Text menu commands, SmartIcons, or the InfoBox.
Delete a bullet	BACKSPACE.
Change properties (e.g., bullet type, size, or color) for one text level	The InfoBox. Under Properties for, select the level you want to change.
Automatic continuation

If a bulleted list has so many items that the text extends beyond the printable area of the page, Freelance Graphics offers to create another page. The new page will have the same title as the original page, with "(continued)" appended to the title.

 Go to procedure


Turning bullets on or off

1.	Click a filled-in text block.

2.	Choose Text - Bullets & Numbers or click here [image].

3.	(Optional) Under Properties for, select "All Text Levels" or a specific text level.

4.	To turn bullets on, under Style, select the style of bullet you want.

5.	To turn bullets off, under Style, select None.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	If you choose properties for a particular level of text, for example, Level 1 Text, Freelance Graphics changes only that level of bulleted text.

 See related topics


Deleting bulleted items from a list

1.	Double-click the bulleted list text block.

2.	Select all the text for the bullet you want to delete.

3.	Choose Edit - Cut.

4.	Press BACKSPACE to remove the bullet for that item.

5.	Click OK.

Note	 You can delete all but the last bullet in a "Click here..." bulleted list text block. If you delete all the text, the prompt text and its bullet reappear.

 See related topics


Modifying the space between the bullet and text

1.	Click a filled-in bulleted list text block.

2.	Choose Text - Bullets & Numbers or click here [image].

3.	Under "Space between bullet & text," enter a number.

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	The space between bullets and text is measured in the units of measurement specified in the Units and Grid dialog box.

 See related topics


Changing from a bulleted list to a two-column bulleted list

1.	Click the Outliner tab.

2.	Click where you want the first line of the second column.

3.	Choose Text - Make Second Column.

Note	If you click the Current Page tab, you can see that the page now has two columns.

 See details


Details: Changing from a bulleted list to a two-column bulleted list

If you switch page layouts when your presentation page already has text and graphics on it, Freelance Graphics places the text and graphics in the appropriate "Click here..." blocks on the new page layout that you choose.

If you have text and graphics and switch to a page layout that has "Click here..." blocks for text only, you may want to change the placement and size of your graphics.

If you switch from a 2-Column Bullets page layout to a Bulleted List page layout, Freelance Graphics places the first column of text in a "Click here..." text block and leaves the second column's bulleted text in a regular text block. You can cut and paste the text to the first column.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Using clip art for bullets

You can use any clip art included with Freelance Graphics, or any other compatible clip art product, as a bullet.

1.	Click a filled-in bulleted list text block.

2.	Choose Text - Bullets & Numbers or click here [image].

3.	(Optional) Under Properties for, select "All Text Levels" or a specific text level.

Tip	To use clip art for only one level of text, in the InfoBox, under Properties for, select the text level--for example, Level 1 Text--you want to change.

4.	Under Style, select Clip Art.

5.	Click Scan to browse through the clip art until you see what you want to use, then click Stop scan.

6.	Click the clip art you want to use.

7.	Click OK.

8.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Tip	If you want to change the bullets for only some bulleted items, you must select the text for the bullet(s) you want to change before doing step 2.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Using clip art for bullets

Once you use a piece of clip art as a bullet, Freelance Graphics adds it as an option under Style in the Bullet panel of the InfoBox so you can easily reuse it.

Bullets that are clip art do not display in Outliner view. Representative bullets appear in their place.

 Go to procedure


Specifying a starting number for a numbered list

You must have already created a numbered list before you can specify a starting number.

1.	Click the numbered list text block.

2.	Choose Text - Bullets & Numbers or click here [image].

3.	Under Start number, type a starting number and press ENTER.

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See related topics


Creating a numbered list

The best way to create a numbered list is to use a bulleted list page layout.

1.	Click the New Page button or click here [image].

2.	If you are using a SmartMaster with content, select a page with a bulleted list. Otherwise, select the Bulleted List or 2-Column Bullets page layout.

3.	Click OK.

4.	On the new page, click the "Click here..." bulleted list text block.

5.	Type the text for your first bullet.

6.	Press ENTER to move to a new line and type the text for the next bullet.

7.	When you complete the list, click OK.

8.	Choose Text - Bullets & Numbers or click here [image].

9.	Under Properties for, select "Level 1 Text."

10.	Under Style, select I or 1 from the list.

11.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	You must have text in a text block before you can change the properties of the text block.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating a numbered list

Using a named style

You can easily create and reuse a customized bullet style by using a named style. A named style is a collection of properties that you can apply to text blocks. If you use numbered lists frequently, you should consider creating a numbered list named style.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Curved Text dialog box

Freelance Graphics provides a gallery of curving options for text. You can use the supplied curves, or you can curve text around shapes you draw.

Choose a task

Curving text

Curving text around shapes


Curving text around shapes

1.	Select the shape around which you want the text to curve.

2.	Choose Drawing - Convert - To Lines or To Polygons.

3.	While the shape is still selected, press SHIFT and then click the text block to select it.

4.	Choose Collection - Collection Properties or click here [image] to open the InfoBox.

5.	Click Curved Text.

6.	Click Custom Shape.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.


Deleting text

1.	Double-click the text block.

2.	Select the text you want to delete.

3.	Choose Edit - Cut.

4.	Click OK.

Notes

You can choose Edit - Undo to restore text you cut inadvertently.

If you delete all the text from a "Click here..." text block, the prompt text will reappear when you click OK.

 See details


Details: Deleting text

Keys to use to delete text

Press this:	To delete this:
BACKSPACE	Selected text or the character before the insertion point.
DELETE	Selected text or the character following the insertion point.
CTRL+BACKSPACE	Word before the insertion point.
CTRL+DELETE	Word following the insertion point.
 Go to procedure


Editing text

 Show me a demo

1.	Double-click the text block.

2.	Enter or edit the text.

3.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Editing text

Other ways to start editing text

You can also start editing text by selecting the text block and:

•	Pressing F2.

•	Clicking the Drawing and Text button and then clicking the Text icon.

Replacing text

There are several ways to replace existing text in a text block.

•	Select the text, then start typing. The first character you type replaces the selected text. You can continue to add characters without overwriting any other text in the block.

•	Press INSERT to overwrite text, character by character. To stop overwriting characters as you type, press INSERT again. If text is selected when you begin typing, the first character you type replaces the selected text.

•	Select the text, then choose Edit - Paste to replace the selected text with text you have most recently cut or copied.

 Go to procedure


Curving text

1.	Click the text block you want to curve.

2.	Choose Text - Curved Text or click here [image].

3.	Select the shape you want to apply to the text.

4.	(Optional) For text with circular shapes, specify the angle for the curve to start in the Text start point box. For example, if you specify 90 degrees, the curve starts at the 3 o'clock position.

5.	(Optional) To see how your changes look, press and hold Preview. Release the button to return to the dialog box.

6.	Click OK.

Uncurving text

1.	Click the curved text block.

2.	Choose Text - Curved Text or click here  [image].

3.	Click Remove Effect.

 See details


Details: Curving text

When you edit a curved text block, Freelance Graphics temporarily positions the text horizontally, then returns it to its curved position when you are finished. If you size the text block, Freelance Graphics resizes the text to fit the new shape.

Notes

You cannot strike out or underline curved text.

A bullet associated with a line of text will not be curved.

You cannot curve selected text within a text block; you can only curve the entire text block.

 Go to procedure


Indenting text

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties.

3.	Under Properties for, select the text level you want to change.

4.	Click the Alignment tab.

5.	Under Indent, enter the new 1st Line indent.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	The number you enter measures the distance from the left side of the text block in the units of measurement set under Units in the Properties box.

If you have the text ruler displayed, you can also indent text by dragging the indent icons to where you want them.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Indenting text

Indent options

The following table describes what each Indent option controls:

This option:	Controls this indentation:
1st Line	First line of a paragraph in a text block.
Left	Left margin of a text block.
Right	Right margin of a text block.
Hanging Indents

To create a hanging indent, so that all lines of a paragraph except the first are indented, type a value for the Left indent that is greater than the value for the 1st Line indent.

 Go to procedure


Setting margins

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties.

3.	Under Properties for, select the text level you want.

4.	Click the Alignment tab.

5.	Under Indent, enter the new left and right indents.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Notes

The numbers you enter measure the distance from the left side of the text block in the unit of measurement set under Units in the Set Units and Grid dialog box.

If you have the text ruler displayed, you can also set margins by dragging the left and right margin icons to where you want them.

 See related topics


Selecting text in Current Page view

You can select an entire text block, or the text within a text block--such as letters, words, or phrases--change the way text looks, or copy or delete it.

Selecting a text block

Click the text block to select it.

Selecting text within a text block

1.	Double-click the text block.

2.	Select the text you want to change.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Selecting text in Current Page view

Once you have double-clicked the text block, use the following methods to select text.

Do this:	To:
Click (over text)	Place the insertion point at the location of the I-beam pointer.
Drag	Select the text from where you press the mouse button to where you release it.
Double-click (over text)	Select the entire word under the I-beam pointer.
Double-click, then drag	Select the entire word under the I-beam pointer, then select subsequent words you drag across.
SHIFT+click	Select all text between the insertion point and the I-beam pointer.
SHIFT+drag	Select all text between the insertion point and the I-beam pointer, then select the text you drag through.
SHIFT+double-click	Select all text between the insertion point and the entire word the I-beam pointer is over.
SHIFT+double-click, then drag	Select words between the insertion point and the word the I-beam pointer is over, then select the words you drag through.
SHIFT+→, or ←	Add or delete one character at a time to or from the selection.
SHIFT+↑, or ↓	Select or deselect all text between the insertion point and the corresponding location in the line above or below. If at the beginning or end of a text block, the insertion point moves to the corresponding location in the previous or next block.
SHIFT+HOME	Select all the text from the insertion point to the beginning of the line.
SHIFT+END	Select all the text from the insertion point to the end of the line.
SHIFT+PAGE UP	Move to the first text block on the previous page.
SHIFT+PAGE DOWN	Move to the last text block on the next page.
 Go to procedure


Sizing text

Sizing all the text in a text block

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties or click here [image].

3.	(Optional) Under Properties for, select the level you want to change.

4.	Under Size, type or select a new size.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Sizing selected text in a text block

1.	Double-click the text block.

2.	Select the text you want to change.

3.	Choose Text - Text Properties or click here [image].

4.	Under Size, select a new size.

Note	You can also type in a text size in the box below the listing of text sizes.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.


Displaying the text ruler

If you change text block margins and indents often, you may want to use the text ruler for faster access to these settings.

1.	Choose View - Set View Preferences.

2.	Under Display, select "Text block ruler."

3.	Click OK.

Tip	If you have the text ruler displayed, you can indent text and change margins by dragging the icons to where you want them.

 See related topics


Keeping overrides when changing SmartMaster looks
Keeping level overrides when changing SmartMaster looks

You can keep level overrides you apply to your text when you change SmartMaster looks.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - Freelance Preferences.

2.	Select "Keep text overrides when changing a look."

3.	Click OK.

 See related topics


Custom Text Size dialog box

1.	Select the existing point size.

2.	Type a number for the new text size.

3.	Click OK.


Overview: Text properties and named styles

Text properties include typeface; point size; color; drop shadows and shadow color; bullet style, size, and color; justification; emphasis such as italics or underlining; and more. A named style is a collection of text properties that you can group together, save with a name, and then easily reuse. Using named styles, you can quickly make presentation-wide changes to your text.

Character and level overrides

You can apply text properties to specific letters, words, phrases, or levels in a text block. This overrides any properties already assigned to the text block as a whole.

•	Character overrides--properties applied to selected letters, words, or phrases in a text block.

•	Level overrides--properties applied to an entire level of text in a text block.

Both types of overrides take precedence over the properties the text block has as a whole. For example, say you have yellow, 30-point Courier text in a bulleted list that uses arrows as bullets. You want to emphasize the phrase "Green glass aquariums" in one of the lines. You can make that phrase green and increase its point size to 40. Now, "Green glass aquariums" has character overrides for color and point size.

See Changing properties for selected text and Overview: Text blocks and text levels.

Named styles and SmartMaster looks

Each SmartMaster look has default named styles designed specifically for it. The named styles are: Presentation title, Presentation subtitle, Page title, Bulleted text, Numbered list, and Label text.

Each "Click here..." text block in a look has a default named style assigned to it. You can edit these default named styles to suit your needs and you can also create new named styles. This is how named styles and SmartMaster looks work together:

•	If you switch SmartMaster looks, your presentation uses the default named styles of the new look. If a text block used the "Page title" named style in one look, it will use the "Page title" named style in the new look.

•	If you edit the default named styles in your presentation, and then switch SmartMaster looks, the default named styles in the new look overwrite your changes.

•	If you create new named styles and you switch SmartMaster looks, your presentation keeps the named styles you created. This is because new named styles become part of your presentation file when you save it.

What kind of text uses named styles?

You can use the default styles, or create your own named styles, and apply these to text in "Click here..." text blocks, shapes with text, text in diagrams, and text in text blocks you created.

You cannot use named styles with organization chart text, data chart text, or table text.

Using the same named styles in different presentations

You can cut or copy text or pages with text blocks that use a named style you created in one presentation and paste that into another presentation. The named style comes with the text and gets appended to the list of named styles. You can apply this style to other text in the target presentation.

If one of the elements of the named style is color, and you used a palette color, the named style will use the palette colors of the new presentation.

Named styles and character and level overrides

Character and level overrides take precedence over named styles. That is, even though a text block has a named style, you can apply text properties to individual characters or levels of that text and those are the properties the text will take on.

However, if you have character and level overrides, and then apply a new named style, character overrides persist, but level overrides do not.

See Changing properties for selected text.

 See related topics


Adding a border around text

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties.

3.	Click the Lines & Colors tab in the InfoBox.

4.	Under Border, select a style, width, and color.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Tip	If you want the color of the border to be different from the pattern color of the text block, deselect "Same color as border." If you select "Same color as border," Freelance Graphics used the Border color as the pattern color.


Adding a drop shadow to text

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties or click here [image].

3.	(Optional) If you want a drop shadow for selected text, click the text block again so you can edit it, and select the text.

4.	Under Text shadow, select where you want the shadow to appear.

5.	Under Depth, select how deep you want the shadow to be.

6.	Under Color, select a color.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	To turn drop shadows off, select "None" under Text Shadow.


Aligning text

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties

3.	Click the Alignment tab in the InfoBox.

4.	Under Alignment, click the button(s) that show the horizontal and vertical alignment you want.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	To enable or disable word wrapping, select or deselect "Wrap text."


Changing the background color of text

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties.

3.	Click the Lines & Color tab in the InfoBox.

4.	(Optional) Under Interior, select a pattern color.

5.	(Optional) Under Interior, select a pattern and/or a background color.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details


Details: Changing the background color of text

Pattern and background color

Objects can have one color (solid) or two (a pattern, sometimes called a graduated fill). When the object is solid, it uses a pattern color only. When the object has a pattern, it used a pattern color and a background color.

If you choose different colors for pattern color and background color, Freelance Graphics shades the object using both colors, creating a graduated fill. In the Pattern gallery, black represents pattern color and white represents background color.

Note	Select None in the Pattern gallery if you do not want an object to have any color. This overrides the color choices.

Too many objects with graduated fills on a page can cause degradation in your color output and lengthy printing times. If either of these things happen, consider changing graduated fills to solids. See Printing graduated fills.

Same color as border

If you select "Same color as border" under Interior, Freelance Graphics uses the Border color for the pattern color

Palette colors vs. static colors

Use palette colors for objects such as text, charts, or diagrams. This way, if you switch SmartMaster looks, these objects will use palette colors of the new look. Static colors stay the same when you switch looks. For more information about static and palette colors, see Overview: Using colors.

 Go to procedure


Change Named Style dialog box

If you choose Redefine the existing named style, the changes you have made will be applied to the named style of the text block. If you choose Assign a new named style, you can name the current set of text properties, and the new named style gets added to the named styles you can use in the current presentation.

For more information on named styles, choose one of the following topics.

Overview: Text properties and named styles

Creating a named style

Redefining a named style


Changing the typeface of all text in a presentation

1.	Choose Presentation - Change the Typeface Globally or click here [image].

2.	Select a new typeface.

3.	(Optional) If you want the typeface to change for existing data charts, tables, and organization charts, select the boxes.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click OK again.

Note	Data charts you create later use the default typeface.

 See details


Details: Changing the typeface of all text in a presentation

Named styles are affected by the Presentation - Change the Typeface Globally command. If you use this command, the typeface of all named styles changes too. You can restore the original typeface simply by choosing Presentation - Choose a Different SmartMaster Look and choosing the original look.

 Go to procedure


Changing properties for selected text

1.	Double-click the text block.

2.	Select the text you want to change.

3.	Choose Text - Text Properties or click here [image].

4.	Change the properties for the selected text.

5.	Click OK.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing properties for selected text

Seeing your changes

While any change you make in the InfoBox takes effect immediately, it may not always be apparent. For example, if you change the color of the selected text, you cannot see the actual color change until you deselect the text.

Changing properties for new text you type

As long as you have a text block selected, you can select properties for text in the InfoBox. When you begin typing, the new text you type will have those properties.

Other ways to change text

You can change some text properties using any one of the text-related icons on the SmartIcons palette, or by using any of the text buttons on the status bar.

You can change the relative size of text by using the arrow icons that appear above the text in a text block.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Applying a named style

You can apply a named style to "Click here..." text blocks, text in text shapes, text in diagrams, and text blocks you create.

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Named Styles - Apply.

3.	Select the style you want to apply.

4.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Applying a named style

Named styles and the Reset to Style button

You can remove character and level overrides from text blocks that use named styles with the Reset to Style command or the Reset to Style button on the Style panel of the InfoBox.

Using "None" as a named style

If you want a text block to be protected from retroactive changes--that is, changes that occur when you redefine a named style--then assign it "None." Choosing "None" as a named style breaks the link between a text block and named styles.

If you assign the "None" named style to a text block, you cannot use the Reset to Style command or the Reset to Style button on the Style panel of the InfoBox.

 Go to procedure


Creating a named style

You can assign properties for a named style to one text level, several text levels, or all text levels.

 Show me a demo

1.	Click a text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties.

3.	(Optional)  Under Properties for, select "All Text Levels" or a specific text level.

4.	Select the properties you want the named style to have.

5.	Click the Named Style tab in the InfoBox.

6.	Click Create Style.

7.	Enter a name for the named style.

8.	Click OK.

9.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating a named style

Named styles and text levels

If you create a style and change the properties for only one level, the other levels are saved as part of the style with their original properties.

You can also assign different properties to each level of the five levels of text in a text block. For example, you could create a named style in which Level 1 text had blue square bullets and orange 36 point text; Level 2 text had green round bullets and yellow 24 point text; and so on. For more information about text levels, see Overview: Text blocks and text levels.

Naming conventions

Each named style must have a unique name, can be up to 32 characters, and can use letters or numbers. You can use the name of a named style as a note; for example, "CorpBullet--do not change," or "CorpLogo--Bullets."

 Go to procedure


Deleting a named style

You can delete only the named styles that you create. You cannot delete any of the default named styles, even if you have edited them.

1.	Click a text block.

2.	Choose Text - Named Styles - Manage Style or click here [image].

3.	Select the named style you want to delete.

4.	Click Delete.

5.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.


Redefining a named style

1.	Click a text block that uses the named style you want to redefine.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties.

3.	(Optional)  Under Properties for, select "All Text Levels" or a specific text level.

4.	Select the properties you want the named style to have.

5.	Click the Named Style tab in the InfoBox.

6.	Click Redefine Style.

7.	Click OK.

8.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	When you redefine a named style, these changes are applied to all text blocks in the presentation that uses that named style.

 See related topics


Restoring an original named style

If you have applied character or level overrides to a "Click here..." text block, you can restore its original properties.

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties or click here [image] to open the InfoBox.

3.	Click the Styles tab.

4.	Click Reset to Style.

5.	Select how much text you want to reset to its original default named style, and what kind of overrides you want to remove.

6.	Click OK.

7.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

Note	If you have redefined one of the default named styles and want to restore its original properties, reapply the SmartMaster look. Choose Presentation - Choose a Different SmartMaster Look and choose the original look.


Spacing text

1.	Click the text block.

2.	Choose Text - Text Properties

3.	Click the Alignment tab in the InfoBox.

4.	To tighten or expand the space between lines of text in a paragraph, change the line spacing.

5.	To tighten or expand the space between bulleted items in a list, change the paragraph spacing.

6.	(Optional) Move, collapse, or close the InfoBox.

 See related topics


Freelance Graphics and the Internet

Freelance Graphics has a number of features that let you make use of the Internet.

Internet-specific features

With Freelance Graphics, you can

•	Save files directly to, and open files from, an Internet server.

See Overview: Working with the Internet.

•	Add an Internet-specific SmartIcons set to your desktop that lets you open from or save to the Internet, go to the Lotus home page, go to Lotus customer support, publish a presentation to the World Wide Web, and search for specific text on the Internet.

See Selecting and displaying a specific SmartIcons set.

•	Include sound and movie files in a presentation on the Internet.

See Attaching an action to objects and text.

•	Include an Internet address in a screen show as an object effect. Click the object during a screen show, and you jump to the location.

See Attaching an action to objects and text.

World Wide Web-specific features

With the World Wide Web and Freelance Graphics, you can

•	Publish a presenation on the Web (in HTML and GIF formats).

•	Use Netscape 2.0 frames.

See Overview: Posting a presentation on the World Wide Web


Color enhancements

A variety of new color enhancements make it easier to work with colors. New features include:

•	A new palette design that includes 48 colors that control particular elements of your presentation and 16 suggested colors recommended for use with this palette. Labels in the Edit Palette dialog box tell you exactly what elements of your presentation each color controls, such as titles, drop shadows, bullets, or data series in charts. For more information, see Overview: Color palettes.

•	A new screen library optimized for 256-color mode.

•	The color library has 16 slots reserved for custom colors. For more information, see Overview: Color libraries.

•	Thirteen additional output color libraries optimized for a variety of printers. See Enhancing printed output.

•	The ability to convert CMYK colors to RGB values. For more information, see Converting CMYK colors to RGB colors.

•	The choice between a standard color chooser and a designer's color chooser (for those who do a lot of design work such as modifying or creating SmartMaster looks). For more information, see Specifying the color chooser.


Copy pages from other presentations

Freelance Graphics now makes it easy to view and copy pages from other presentations. You open another Freelance Graphics presentation in the browser, and mark the pages you want to copy. You can copy pages all at once or one at a time by dragging and dropping. The pages you copy assume the look of the current presentation.

For more information, see Copying pages from another Freelance Graphics presentation.


Drawings and diagrams

New drawing tools automate and simplify the process of creating business drawings and diagrams.

Drawing & Text toolbox

You can open, close, or move the new Drawing & Text toolbox, depending on your task. The toolbox includes new tools, and a Flowchart button that opens a specialized palette of text shapes for creating standard flowcharts.

For more information, see Overview: Drawing.

Ready-made diagrams

Creating flowcharts and custom diagrams such as pyramid charts is now more automated and simpler. To create a business diagram quickly, you can choose from one of the 100 ready-made diagrams and add your own text. You can also use ready-made diagrams as a starting place to create your own customized diagrams.

For more information, see Overview: Diagrams, text shapes, and connectors.

Custom diagrams with text shapes and connectors

To create diagrams from scratch, you can start with over 75 text shapes and connectors.

Text shapes are geometric objects that can contain text. You can drag and drop text shapes from the toolbox to the page in one step. To add text to a text shape, just select it and start typing. When you move or size a text shape, the text moves and resizes along with the shape.

You can create dynamic links between objects with a variety of connectors. When you move a connected object, all connections among objects are preserved and the connectors are resized.

For more information, see Creating a custom diagram.

Sizing objects in fixed increments

You can change the size of selected objects in fixed increments, or make all selected objects the same size by choosing a command or clicking an icon. For more information, see Details: Sizing objects with the mouse.

Fast Format

The new Fast Format command lets you quickly copy the attributes of one object to another. For more information, see Copying properties from one object to another.


New file types and extensions

Freelance Graphics 97 includes several new file types, including .PCD (Kodak Photo CD) and .JPG (a standard graphic formart used on the World Wide Web). It also supports changed file name extensions. For example, the Freelance Graphics96 and 97 presentation file extension is .PRZ, the extension for SmartMaster content topics is .SMC, and the extension for SmartMaster look files is .MAS.

You can open presentation files created in other versions of Freelance Graphics: Freelance Graphics for Windows Release 1.0 and 2.x presentation files have the extension .PRE; Freelance Graphics for OS/2 presentation files have the extension .PRS.

When you save a file, you can include a Windows 95 long file name, as well as enter text to describe your presentation.

For more information, see:

Overview: Presentation files

Overview: Freelance Graphics file types

Saving a presentation


Making global changes

Freelance Graphics offers new ways to make global changes to a presentation.

•	Change the properties of all selected objects with the InfoBox. See Overview: Properties and the InfoBox.

•	Change the typeface for all text in a presentation, with the ability to include or exclude data charts, tables, and organization charts. See Changing the typeface of all text in a presentation.

•	Change text properties by creating named styles and applying them to text blocks. See Overview: Text properties and named styles.

•	Change the design of pages by editing the backdrop. See Customizing the backdrop.


Installing additional language versions of applications

SmartSuite lets you access single copies of Lotus applications in multiple languages. This capability, part of the Lotus strategy for multilingual computing, is available in Approach, Freelance Graphics, and Word Pro.

The first language you install becomes your default language. To add a second or third language version of a Lotus application, you must rerun the Install program. The Install program informs you that you already have an existing copy of the product in a different language and preserves the directory structure of the default language. The Install program populates the Start menu with icons for the additional languages. These icons can be identified by the two character ISO language tag. For example, the icon for the French version of Freelance Graphics is labeled Freelance Graphics 97 - FR.


Task-sensitive interface

Freelance Graphics has a more task-sensitive interface that makes the tools you need available when you need them. Freelance Graphics senses your current task and automatically modifies the interface to provide the appropriate menus, SmartIcons, and InfoBox.

The result is an uncluttered desktop that makes it easier to complete the task at hand.

Menus

A common menu structure makes it easier to learn other products in the Lotus SmartSuite. In addition, context-sensitive menus change when you select a different object. For example, if you select a text object, the Text menu appears.

You can click the right mouse button over an object to display a shortcut menu of choices relating to the selected object as well as other options that make sense in the current context, such as adding a speaker note. If no objects are selected, the shortcut menu relates to page properties.

For more information, see Overview: Freelance Graphics menus.

InfoBox

The InfoBox lets you change the properties of selected objects in a single location. Changes you make in the InfoBox are displayed on the page immediately--no need to close the InfoBox or click OK.

When you select a different object, the InfoBox changes to reflect the selected object. The InfoBox makes it easier to perform common tasks, because steps for formatting objects are the same for different objects.

The InfoBox remains open until you close it; you can move or collapse it if you like.

For more information, see Overview: Properties and the InfoBox.


Automating tasks with LotusScript

LotusScript is a scripting language used by a number of Lotus products. LotusScript lets you create custom dialog boxes to automate common tasks and processes to increase productivity, create programs that integrate and share data from other Lotus applications, and automate the creation of documents using content topics. Freelance Graphics includes ready-made scripts that you can use to streamline your work. You can also customize these ready-made scripts.

LotusScript is an object-oriented BASIC language which is compatible with, and easily integrates with, Visual Basic.®

For information about changes in scripting in Freelance Graphics 97, see Script information for upgraders.


Meeting support tools

Support material is critical for presentations with a lot of information. Freelance Graphics now offers more ways to create support material for presentations.

Speaker notes

Speaker notes have improved text editing capabilities. You can:

•	Enlarge or reduce text onscreen without changing the size of printed output

•	Change font and font size

•	Add bullets

•	Make text bold, italic, underlined, superscript, subscript, and strikethrough

•	Change the text attributes for all speaker notes in the InfoBox, or override the default settings

For more information, see Overview: Speaker notes.

You can also use speaker notes in World Wide Web presentations. See Details: Creating WWW presentations.

Handouts

You can create professional-looking handouts using the new print formats and handout layouts in Freelance Graphics.

For more information, see Printing materials for meetings.


Mobile Screen Show Player

With the Mobile Screen Show Player, you can run a Freelance Graphics presentation on any 32-bit Windows-based computer, or give a copy of your presentation to anyone to view, even if they do not have a copy of Freelance Graphics.

If you are part of a team presentation, in which several people deliver their own presentations, you can link everyone's presentation with the Mobile Screen Show Player, so that each person does not have to find and load his or her presentation individually. This eliminates awkward waiting times between presentations.

For more information, see Overview: The Mobile TeamShow Player.


Notes/FX

Notes/FX lets application developers customize their workflow applications by adding commands to the Notes and Freelance Graphics menus. These commands are associated with a Notes form and are available whenever a document is viewed through the Notes form. Each workflow command has a script associated with it that runs when the command is chosen.

Notes/FX offers a powerful way to store, browse, organize, and share information across an organization. For example, customer names, orders, and price lists can be stored in a Notes database as a pool of information for the sales force. With Freelance Graphics and Notes/FX working together, you can create a presentation library that stores presentations for various sales situations, then customize the presentation for each sales call quickly.

For more information, see Overview: Exchanging data between Freelance Graphics and Notes.


OLE 2.0

Freelance Graphics fully supports OLE 2.0 as a client and server. This means you can link data to and from other products. For example, if you create automatic links in a Freelance Graphics presentation to data in a 1-2-3 file, whenever you open the Freelance Graphics presentation, it automatically displays the latest 1-2-3 data.

In addition, the ability to drag and drop objects between products makes working with several applications easier, and in-place editing of OLE objects will also increase your productivity.

For more information, see Overview: Sharing data using OLE2.


OLE custom controls

Freelance Graphics supports OLE custom controls (OCXs), including Lotus Components. Lotus Components are a set of small, fast, reusable software applets, including the Lotus Spreadsheet, Chart, Draw/Diagram, Project, Comment, and File Viewer Components, and the Lotus Template Builder.

For more information, see Overview: OLE custom controls.


Online assistance

Now, everything you need to know to learn and use Freelance Graphics is available online. A variety of new Help features put information at your fingertips when you need it.

Guide Me

Guide Me is a convenient and fast way to get the Help you need for the task you are working on. As you are working on your presentation, click the Guide Me button at any time.

When you click the Guide Me button, you are presented with a list of tasks. Click the task that most closely matches your needs. Guide Me displays a Help procedure immediately, or another list of tasks, so you can narrow the scope of your request. You will never have to click more than three times to display the Help procedure you need.

Guide Me is context-sensitive. For example, if you have selected a chart, Guide Me is ready with a list of tasks related to charts.

Guide Me is also aware of which view of Freelance Graphics you are working in. Guide Me displays different tasks depending on whether you are in Current Page view, Outliner view, or Page Sorter view.

New Lotus Help design

The redesigned online Help system is task-oriented and provides how-to information quickly.

There are Help buttons in most dialog boxes that lead directly to specific topic information.

A new feature leaves the Help screen open and visible so you can follow the instructions as you work.

Rescue bubbles

Rescue bubbles are a form of just-in-time learning that provide instant pop-up Help when you are stuck. For example, if you attempt to change the color of a hollow object without adding a fill pattern to the object, a rescue bubble will remind you exactly what needs to be done to complete the task successfully.

Demos

Demos perform tasks for you automatically, using sample data, so you can see precisely how to perform a task. When you click a Demo button in a Help screen, a sample file opens, and you see the steps performed one at a time. At the end of the demo, the sample file closes and you are returned to your presentation at the point you left off, with the Help screen open so you can perform the steps yourself.

For a list of demos in Freelance Graphics, see Using Demos.

In-line tips

Many dialog boxes now have tips on the surface of the dialog box, with text on a yellow background.

Shortcuts

A number of Help procedures contain a shortcut icon that you can click to move directly to a dialog box without choosing the normal command to access the dialog box.

Content advice for content topics

You can click the Content Advice button--available in most content topics--for a screenful of tips to help you complete the current content page.


Printing enhancements

New printing features make printing faster and easier. You can:

•	Preview pages onscreen to check formatting and find errors before you print. See Previewing a presentation.

•	Print non-contiguous pages in Page Sorter view. See Details: Selecting pages to print.

•	Print multiple sets of collated pages. See Collating copies when printing.

•	Switch output devices within the Freelance Graphics Print dialog box. When you do, Freelance Graphics checks if all objects that printed on the previous device will print within the printable page of the new device. See Details: Selecting a printer.

•	Add page numbers, dates, and alignment options to headers and footers with a single click, and control the font of headers and footers. See Adding headers and footers to pages.

For more information, see Overview: Printing.


Rehearse mode

The more you practice delivering your presentation, the better you will do. Now, you can practice your presentation as well as keep track of elapsed time in Rehearse mode.

Elapsed time in Rehearse mode is displayed as you practice, both for the whole presentation and for individual pages. After you finish, you can display a summary report of total presentation time and time for individual pages.

You can pause the timer at any time as you rehearse if you need to attend to other tasks such as answering a phone. Resume the rehearsal session whenever you are ready. In Rehearse mode, you can also view, edit, or create your speaker notes onscreen as you rehearse.

For more information, see Rehearsing a presentation.


Screen show

Screen show includes a number of new features and capabilities, including:

•	Built-in animation and multimedia effects with multimedia SmartMaster looks.

•	Ability to assign a transition effect to individual objects or entire pages.

•	Ability to set the sequence and appearance of objects--so you can create animations or display information in the order you prefer.

•	Ready-made animations with a variety of business themes. If an animation file is used more than once in a presentation, the same file will be referenced only once to save disk space.

•	Ability to use the right mouse menu during a screen show to navigate through a screen show, start and customize onscreen drawing, create and edit speaker notes for the page you are on, and use other features that are useful while you are running a screen show.

•	Ability to omit specified pages from a screen show, so you can customize your presentation for different audiences.

For more information, see Overview: Screen shows.

 See related topics


SmartMaster looks and content topics

The new SmartMaster concept in Freelance Graphics evolves the original SmartMaster idea by providing actual content as well as structure for your presentation and by including new automated features.

For more information, see Overview: What is a SmartMaster? and Overview: What is a content topic?

SmartMaster looks

As in previous releases of Freelance Graphics, SmartMaster looks provide a common set of page layouts and backdrop designs. Freelance Graphics has over 120 fully editable looks, including a number of multimedia looks.

SmartMaster content topics

SmartMaster content topics provide content for specific types of presentations such as a marketing plan or a project status report. Over 30 fully editable content topics ship with Freelance Graphics.

Content topics include:

•	Pages with task-specific prompts (for example, "Click here to type marketing goals").

•	Content advice to help users fill out presentation pages.

•	Actual content in the form of filled-in text and graphics.

•	Suggested content provided by industry experts, such as Phillip Kotler, Zig Ziglar, Trout & Ries, and others.

•	Guided charts with the chart type and style already chosen for you. You can simply add your own data.

New startup sequence

A new startup sequence lets you open an existing presentation, or create a new presentation using a SmartMaster content topic, or, optionally, without a content topic.

Automation

Content topics help automate the presentation process by including scripts that run when you create new pages or click prompts and buttons. Scripts, based on LotusScript, are fully customizable to meet your particular business needs.

Scripts reduce the time required to create and enter data in a presentation. For example, if you enter data on one page, a script can add it to other presentation pages automatically.

Scripts also automate tasks such as adding a new block to a pyramid chart.


TeamMail

TeamMail lets you send a message using your e-mail system without leaving Freelance Graphics, and attach selected pages or an entire presentation to the message, which can be routed to members of a workgroup for team review. TeamMail supports cc:Mail, Lotus Notes, and other e-mail systems including VIM and MAPI-based systems.

You can send a presentation to several people at once (broadcasting) or to a list of people sequentially (routing) so that each person can add comments. Tracking options allow the author to monitor the progress of the presentation as it moves to each stop on the route.

Comments are accumulated as the presentation progresses through the list so that each person on the list can see previously added comments.

If a recipient does not have a copy of Freelance Graphics, you can include the Mobile Screen Show Player along with your message. For more information, see Mobile Screen Show Player.


TeamShow

TeamShow lets you display a screen show on computers in remote locations.

When team members are in different locations, TeamShow eliminates the need for on-site meetings and expensive travel by letting you display a screen show simultaneously on computers in remote locations via an active network connection.

The presenter runs the show on the viewer's machine and controls the keyboard and mouse to navigate the show. The presenter can display speaker notes on a machine that the viewer cannot see. The viewer can see the presentation and make comments over the phone as the presentation runs.


TeamReview

TeamReview lets authors distribute presentations electronically to members of a team for review, comment, and consolidation.

Authors can post a presentation for review to a Lotus Notes database or to a server, e-mail it with an application such as cc:Mail, or copy it to a floppy disk. Reviewers can add comments with electronic "sticky notes." Authors can also give reviewers the ability to edit the presentation content, by assigning a password to the distributed presentation. All reviewers' comments are consolidated into a single file so that the author can view, evaluate, delete, or incorporate them into the presentation.

Presentations posted to a special Lotus Notes presentation database add special benefits such as:

•	Allowing multiple reviewers to add comments simultaneously.

•	Facilitating easy browsing of Notes databases from Freelance Graphics.

•	Offering access control and security.

•	Providing presentation management capabilities (for example, users can sort presentations by presentation name or author name).

Presentation Library and Review database

The Freelance Graphics Presentation Library and Review database for Notes Release 4 is a major enhancement to the Freelance Graphics Presentation Library that shipped with previous versions of Freelance Graphics. In addition to supporting the "electronic filing cabinet" functionality of the old Presentation Library, the Presentation Library and Review database supports the new TeamReview feature provided in Freelance Graphics 97 and takes advantage of Notes Release 4.

The Presentation Library and Review database provides you with two databases in one by providing two main views:

•	The Presentation Library view--Provides all the views and forms of the old Presentation Library.

•	The TeamReview view--Provides all the views and forms necessary to carry out TeamReview in Freelance Graphics using Lotus Notes.

To use this database, perform a custom installation of Freelance Graphics. For a comprehensive orientation to the Presentation Library and Review database for Notes Release 4 (FLPRES4.NSF), open the database in Notes and choose Help - About This Database. For step-by-step information, choose Help - Using This Database.


Text tools

Freelance Graphics has several new ways to enter, format, and work with text. You no longer need to click on a "Click here..." text block before adding text to a page. You can now add text to a selected text block just by starting to type.

Bulleted lists

New bulleted list features include:

•	Five levels of formatting. See Changing the bullet type, size, or color.

•	More than forty bullet marker styles to choose from.

•	Spacing controls that let you adjust the horizontal space between a bullet and the corresponding text. See Modifying the space between the bullet and text.

•	Numbered and outline-style lists (including ability to start numbering with any number you like). See Specifying a starting number for a numbered list.

Formatting text

New text formatting features make text handling faster and more powerful.

•	A named style is a collection of text properties that you can group together, save with a name, and then easily reuse. Using named styles, you can quickly make presentation-wide changes to your text. A new command, Reset to Style, lets you remove all local character formatting quickly. For more information, see Overview: Text properties and named styles.

•	Ability to change typefaces globally for an entire presentation with a single command. See Changing the typeface of all text in a presentation.

•	New text effects, including shadowed text. See Adding a drop shadow to text.

•	Ability to add superscripts and subscripts.

Bullet builds

New bullet build features include:

•	Easier setup without adding extra pages to your presentation.

•	More control over appearance, including the ability to assign a special visual or sound effect to each bulleted item as it appears.

•	A soft page break feature that automatically detects when text will run over the current page and automatically prompts you to create a new page.

For more information, see Making bulleted items appear progressively.


View tabs

Freelance Graphics still has the same three views--Current Page, Outliner, and Page Sorter--to let you visualize your presentation in different ways. However, new tabs across the top of the presentation window make switching between views easier.

For more information, see Changing views.

Current Page view

Current Page view offers a clean, uncluttered look and makes it easy to find what you need to complete a task. Three easy-to-see buttons on the left of the window let you create a new page, add clip art or diagrams, and open the Drawing & Text toolbox.

See Overview: Current Page view.

Outliner view

Outliner view can now display sizable images of pages to the left of the outline, so you can see the design and layout of pages without returning to Current Page view. As you add text, these picture pages are updated.

You can now change text attributes in Outliner view and see the results without changing views.

A newly designed toolbar makes it easier to collapse and expand the outline, turn the display of pages on and off, indent and outdent text levels, change a bulleted list to a two-column bulleted list, add speaker notes, and add a new page.

For more information, see Overview: Outliner view.

Page Sorter view

Now you can zoom out in Page Sorter view to display more picture pages or zoom in for a closer view of pages.

For more information, see Overview: Page Sorter view.


Overview: Outliner view

Along with Current Page view and Page Sorter view, Outliner view is another way you can work on your presentation. Click the Outliner tab to work in Outliner view.

 Example: Outliner view

What you can do in Outliner view

A presentation in Outliner view looks like an outline: the indented text represents the overall structure of your presentation. Outliner view shows the page number, page title, and text that corresponds to bulleted lists or "Click here..." text blocks. You can use this view to create the text of a new presentation, or to reorganize the text in a presentation.

In Outliner view, you can:

•	Add, edit, move, and format text. See Overview: Working with text in Outliner view.

•	Add pages. See Adding pages in Outliner view.

•	Expand and collapse the outline to see more or less detail. See  Expanding and collapsing text in Outliner view.

•	Toggle between displaying formatted and unformatted text. Choose View - Show Text Attributes.

•	Display thumbnail sketches of each page next to the text. Choose View - Show Pictures of Pages.

•	Create a two-column bulleted list.

•	Add speaker notes.

•	Print the text of the outline using File - Print.

•	Use icons to manipulate the structure of the outline by promoting and demoting entries.

Moving between views

You can move to another view by clicking the Current Page tab or Page Sorter tab.

To move to a specific page in Current Page view, double-click the page icon or thumbnail sketch of the page you want to work on.

 See related topics


Changing views

Each view allows you to see your work in a unique way.

•	To see a presentation one page at a time, click the Current Page tab. See Overview: Current Page view.

•	To see thumbnail sketches of all the pages in a presentation, click the Page Sorter tab. See Overview: Page Sorter view.

•	To see text from a presentation as an outline, click the Outliner tab. See Overview: Outliner view.


Overview: Current Page view

Along with Page Sorter view and Outliner view, Current Page view is another way you can work on your presentation. Click the Current Page tab to work in Current Page view.

 Example: Current Page view

What you can do in Current Page view

Current Page view lets you work with text and graphics on individual pages of your presentation. All the Create, Presentation, and Page commands are available in this view.

This view offers buttons that make it easy to add a new page and access clip art and the drawing tools. The Content Advice button is available when you use a SmartMaster content topic. This button provides examples for the current task.

Moving between views

You can move to another view by clicking the Outliner tab or the Page Sorter tab.

 See related topics


Overview: Page Sorter view

Along with Current Page view and Outliner view, Page Sorter view is another way you can work on your presentation. Click the Page Sorter tab to work in Current Page view.

 Example: Page Sorter view

What you can do in Page Sorter view

Page Sorter view gives you an overall picture of the pages in a presentation. Each page appears as a thumbnail sketch, with each page numbered and named (using the "Click here" text you enter for the page title, or, if that is blank, the page is called "Unnamed").

Page Sorter view provides an easy way to manage the pages of a presentation. You can rearrange, copy, add, or delete pages. You can also combine pages from several presentations into one.

•	To rearrange the pages, click a page and drag it to a new position. The page numbering will change.

•	To copy a page, click a page to select it, then choose Page - Duplicate Page. The duplicated page appears to the right of the page that you are copying.

•	To add a page, choose Page - New Page.

•	To delete a page, click a page to select it, then choose Page - Delete Page.

•	To copy a page from another presentation, choose File - Copy Pages from Other Files. If the page you copy uses a different SmartMaster look, it is replaced by the look in the current presentation.

Changing the size of the thumbnail sketches

If you want to see a larger version of the thumbnail sketches, choose View - Zoom In. You can also choose View - Zoom Out if you want to shrink the size of the thumbnail sketches. Using either Zoom command changes all the thumbnail sketches to a uniform size.

Moving between views

You can move to another view by clicking the Current Page tab or the Outliner tab.

To move to a specific page in Current Page view, double-click the thumbnail sketch of the page that you want to work on.

 See related topics


Displaying more than one window

You can display more than one window at a time.

•	Choose Window - Tile Left-Right to split the screen into equal segments for each open file.

•	Choose Window - Cascade to overlap the windows, leaving the current window on top and showing the title bars of the overlapped windows.


Overview: Working in the Freelance Graphics window

Title bar

The title bar provides the following information:

•	The name of the application you are working in.

•	If you are the author or reviewer of a TeamReview presentation, the name of the file you are using and your role (Author or Reviewer) appears in square brackets.

•	Descriptions of menu commands display when you highlight a menu command.

•	Descriptions of SmartIcons display when you point to one and pause for a moment.

Window Control menu

The Control menu commands control the desktop. The Window Control menu commands appear at the left side of the title bar and menu bar. The Application Control menu commands apply to your Freelance Graphics work session.

Window Control menu

•	Restore returns a window to its size prior to a minimize or maximize operation.

•	Move allows you to relocate a window on the screen. You cannot use this command for a maximized window.

•	Size resizes a window. You cannot use this command for a maximized window.

•	Minimize reduces a window.

•	Maximize enlarges a window so that it fills the entire screen.

•	Close closes the current window. If you have not previously saved the file, a message appears asking if you want to save.

•	Next (Application Control menu only) moves among the open Freelance Graphics files.

Window Control buttons

The buttons are a quick way to change the size of a window without using a menu. The buttons appear on the right side of the title bar and menu bar.

Window Control buttons

Menu bar

The menu bar contains the Freelance Graphics menu commands. See Overview: Freelance Graphics menus.

SmartIcons

SmartIcons are small pictures that provide single-click access to Freelance Graphics commands. See Overview: SmartIcons.

Tabs

Click the tabs to display your work in different views.

•	Current Page view displays individual pages of a presentation.

 Example: Current Page view

•	Page Sorter view displays thumbnail sketches of all the pages in a presentation.

 Example: Page Sorter view

•	Outliner view displays the text of a presentation in outline form.

 Example: Outliner view

Status bar

The status bar, located at the bottom of the Freelance Graphics window, provides an alternative to some of the menu commands and SmartIcons. Use the status bar for easy access to many frequently performed tasks, such as changing the typeface and font size. Different options are available depending on what you have selected in a presentation.

 See related topics


Adding connection information for Internet hosts

1.	Choose File - Internet.

2.	Choose FTP Connection Setup.

3.	Click Hosts.

4.	Click New.

5.	Specify the host address, description, and connection information.

See details

6.	If you use a proxy, select "Use proxy" and specify a proxy.

7.	Click Save.

8.	Click Done.

9.	Click OK.

 See details


Details: Adding connection information for Internet hosts

Host description

Displays a description of the host. You can specify any desired descriptive name for a host domain name address.

Host address

Displays host domain addresses of the FTP servers.

User ID

Identifies you as someone with an account on the host. A system administrator assigns you this name. A user ID is not required for anonymous FTP. If you do not have an account, the default is anonymous FTP.

Password

Gives you access to your account. A system administrator originally assigns you a password which you can change. For anonymous FTP, you should use your e-mail address as the password, or use the default password "guest."

Initial directory at remote host

Displays this directory when you first connect to the selected host domain name address.

Anonymous FTP

Identifies that the remote host supports FTP without requiring a user ID and password. You should use your e-mail address as the password, or use the default password "guest."

Passive (PASV)

Identifies that your internal network is connected to the Internet via a firewall that supports passive transfers. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

Use Proxy

Identifies that your internal network is connected to the Internet via a firewall acting as a proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

Note	If you choose "Use Proxy" you must have already set up your proxy information. If you do not have proxy information set up, choose Edit Proxies and specify proxy information.

Proxy Information: Proxy

Identifies the network address of your proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

Proxy Information: Port

Identifies the port number or your proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

 Go to procedure


Adding, editing, or setting a default proxy

For guidance using proxies, see your system administrator.

1.	Choose File - Internet.

2.	Choose FTP Connection Setup.

3.	Click Hosts.

4.	Select "Use Proxy."

5.	Click Edit Proxies.

•	To add a proxy, click New, specify the proxy address and port, click Save, and click Done.

•	To edit a proxy, select the proxy address, specify the new information, click Save, and click Done.

•	To make a proxy the default, select the proxy address, select "Default proxy," click Save, and click Done.

6.	Click Done to return to the FTP Hosts dialog box.

7.	Click Done.

8.	Click OK.


Details: Configuring Internet options
Details: Configuring Internet 0ptions

Auto connect Open from Internet

Logs you in (requires a password, if needed) to the specified server when you choose Open from Internet.

Auto connect Save to Internet

Logs you in (requires a password, if needed) to the specified server when you choose Save to Internet.

Capture record of Open from Internet

Records the date, time, and full path from which a file was copied when you open a presentation. The record is added to the presentation's description.

 Go to procedure


Configuring Internet Options

If you regularly connect to the same server, you can set Internet Options so that you automatically connect to that server when opening or saving a file on the Internet.

1.	Choose File - Internet.

2.	Choose FTP Connection Setup.

3.	Select the desired options.

4.	For each "Auto connect" option you select, specify the domain name address of the server.

5.	Click OK.

 See details


Connecting to Lotus Customer Support

1.	Choose Help - Lotus Internet Support.

2.	Choose Lotus Customer Support.


Connecting to the Lotus FTP site

1.	Choose Help - Lotus Internet Support.

2.	Choose Lotus FTP Site.


Connecting to the Lotus Home page

1.	Choose Help - Lotus Internet Support.

2.	Choose Lotus Home Page.


Deleting connection information for Internet hosts

1.	Choose File - Internet.

2.	Choose FTP Connection Setup

3.	Click Hosts.

4.	Choose the desired Internet host from the "Host description" box.

5.	Click Delete.

6.	Click Done.

7.	Click OK.


Details: Editing connection information for Internet hosts

Host description

Displays a description of the host. You can specify any desired descriptive name for a host domain name address.

Host address

Displays host domain addresses of the FTP servers.

User ID

Identifies you as someone with an account on the host. A system administrator assigns you this name. A user ID is not required for anonymous FTP. If you do not have an account, the default is anyonymous FTP.

Password

Gives you access to your account. A system administrator originally assigns you a password which you can change. For anonymous FTP, you should use your e-mail address as the password, or use the default password "guest."

Initial directory at remote host

Displays this directory when you first connect to the selected host domain name address.

Anonymous FTP

Identifies that the remote host supports FTP without requiring a user ID and password. You should use your e-mail address as the password, or use the default password "guest."

Passive (PASV)

Identifies that your internal network is connected to the Internet via a firewall that supports passive transfers. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

Use Proxy

Identifies that your internal network is connected to the Internet via a firewall acting as a proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

Note	If you choose "Use Proxy" you must have already set up your proxy information. If you do not have proxy information set up, choose Edit Proxies and specify proxy information.

Proxy Information: Proxy

Identifies the network address of your proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

Proxy Information: Port

Identifies the port number or your proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

 Go to procedure


Editing connection information for Internet hosts

1.	Choose File - Internet.

2.	Choose FTP Connection Setup.

3.	Click Hosts.

4.	Choose the desired Internet host from the "Host description" box.

5.	Make the desired changes to the connection information.

See details

6.	Click Save.

7.	Click Done.

8.	Click OK.

 See details


FTP Hosts dialog box

You can add, edit, or delete FTP connection information.

Choose a task:

Adding connection information for Internet hosts

Deleting connection information for Internet hosts

Editing connection information for Internet hosts

Adding, editing, or setting a default proxy


Details: Opening a presentation from an FTP server on the Internet

Server type

Enables you to select either "FTP" (File Transport Protocol) or "WWW" (World Wide Web).

FTP Servers

Displays host domain name addresses or descriptions for the FTP server you selected.

List by description

Enables you to view FTP servers by a description rather than an address. You can determine the host description when you add or edit host information.

Look in

Displays all the folders (directories) for a specific drive.

File name

Displays all the files in the selected folder.

List files of type

Enables you to specify a file format.

Status bar

Displays a brief description of the file, such as access rights, owner, size, date, time, and file name.

 Go to procedure


Opening a presentation from an FTP server on the Internet

1.	Choose File - Open.

2.	Click Internet.

3.	Select "FTP" as the server type.

4.	Select a host domain address from the "FTP Servers" box.

5.	Click Connect to connect to the host.

6.	Select the file type of the file you want to open from the "List files of type" box.

7.	Specify the file you want to open.

8.	Click Open.

Note	You can also choose File - Internet - Open from Internet and then follow steps 3 through 8.

 See details


Details: Opening a presentation from a Web server on the Internet

Server type

Enables you to select either "FTP" (File Transport Protocol) or "WWW" (World Wide Web).

File name

Displays a list of previously used Web page file names.

Use Proxy

Identifies that your internal network is connected to the Internet via a firewall acting as a proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

Note	If you choose "Use Proxy" you must have already set up your proxy information. If you do not have proxy information set up, choose Edit Proxies and specify proxy information.

Proxy Information: Proxy

Identifies the network address of your proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

Proxy Information: Port

Identifies the port number or your proxy server. If unsure, check with your system administrator.

 Go to procedure


Opening a presentation from a Web server on the Internet

1.	Choose File - Open.

2.	Click Internet.

3.	Select "WWW" as the server type.

4.	Specify the Web page file name.

5.	If you use a server proxy, select "Use proxy" and specify the proxy name.

6.	Click Open.

Note	You can also choose File - Internet - Open from Internet and then follow steps 3 through 8.

 See details


Open from Internet dialog box

You can open any presentation from an FTP (File Transport Protocol) or a Web (World Wide Web) server via the Internet. When you open a presentation on the Internet, Freelance Graphics copies the presentation to your workstation where you can make changes.

Choose a task:

Opening a presentation from an FTP server on the Internet

Opening a presentation from a Web server on the Internet


Publishing a presentation to the Internet

1.	Choose File - Internet.

2.	Choose Publish as Web Page(s).

3.	If necessary, select "Do not show me this message again" and click OK.

4.	Save your presentation to an FTP server on the Internet.

5.	Select the publishing options you want and click OK.

6.	Enter a filename or navigate to a folder (directory) in which to save files.

7.	Click Save.

8.	Select Save files to an Internet server.

9.	Connect to a Web server and navigate to a folder in which to save files.

10.	Click Save.

 See related topics


Saving a presentation to an FTP server on the Internet

1.	Choose File - Save As.

2.	Click Internet.

3.	Select a host domain address or description from the "FTP Servers" box.

4.	Click Connect to connect to the host.

5.	Select the file type.

Note	If you choose the .HTM file type, you can then choose Publish to Web options for your presentation.

6.	Specify the file you want to save.

See details.

7.	Click Save.

Note	You can also choose File - Internet - Save to Internet and then follow steps 3 through 7.

 See details


Details: Saving a presentation to an FTP server on the Internet

FTP Servers

Displays host domain name addresses or descriptions for the FTP server you selected.

List by description

Enables you to view FTP servers by a description rather than an address. You can determine the host description when you add or edit host information.

Save in

Displays all the folders (directories) for a specified drive.

File name

Displays all the files in the selected folder.

Save as type

Enables you to specify a file format for saving the file.

 Go to procedure


Typing a password for an FTP site

Freelance Graphics prompts you for a password whenever you connect to an FTP site by choosing File - Internet and then choosing Open from Internet.

1.	Type the password for the FTP site host.

2.	Click OK.


Overview: Working with the Internet

Using Freelance Graphics, you can open any presentation from an FTP (File Transport Protocol) or a Web (World Wide Web) server via the Internet. You can also save a presentation to an FTP server.

Before you can open or save a presentation on the Internet:

•	Your computer and the server must both be connected to the Internet.

•	Your computer must have a WinSock-compatible TCP/IP stack installed.

•	The server must meet one of the following criteria:

•	The server must be a public Web server.

•	The server must support anonymous FTP.

•	The server must support FTP and you must have an account with permission to access files.

When you open a presentation on the Internet, Freelance Graphics copies the presentation to your workstation where you can make changes. To write the changes to the FTP server, you must save the modified presentation to the Internet. You must have Write permission to an FTP server to save changes.

You can maintain a list of addresses to FTP servers that you use often. You can also add, edit, or delete FTP connection information.

Access to FTP servers can be anonymous or require a user ID and password. You can access an FTP server directly or via a firewall (proxy server).

If you regularly connect to the same server, you can set Internet Options so that you automatically connect to that server when opening or saving a file on the Internet. You can also capture a transaction record of the date, time, and full path from which a file was copied when you open a presentation.

For each Internet connection, a log is kept of the messages sent to and from the Internet server. The log file is called LTSNET.LOG and is stored in the WIN95 directory. Freelance Graphics maintains only a log of the most recent connection. Each time you connect to a server the previous file is overwritten.


Choosing a Notes database

1.	Under Files of type, select the file type you want.

The default is the Notes database file type.

2.	Under Look in, select the folder (directory) containing the database you want.

3.	Select the database name from the file list box.

4.	Click Open.


Opening a presentation from a Notes database

1.	Choose File - Open.

2.	Click Lotus Notes.

3.	Select the server in the "Server" box.

4.	If prompted, enter your password.

5.	Specify the database that contains the file you want to open.

6.	Click Next to select a Notes document.

7.	Click Next to select the file.

8.	Click Done.


Saving a presentation to a Notes database

1.	Choose File - Save As.

2.	Click Lotus Notes.

3.	Select the server in the "Server" box.

4.	Specify the database where you want to save the presentation.

5.	Click Next to select the form and field into which you want to save the file.


Saving a Notes file as an attachment

You can save the file as an attachment .

1.	Specify the file name in the "File name" box.

2.	If you want to select a different form or database, click Back.

3.	Click Done.


Selecting form and field information

1.	Select the form in the "Form" box.

2.	Select the field in the "Field" box.

3.	Enter information for the respective fields.

4.	If you want to select a different Notes database, click Back.

5.	Click Next to enter more information about the file.


Selecting the Notes document

1.	Select the document view in the "View" box.

2.	Select the desired document in the "Documents in view" box.

3.	If you want to select a different database, click Back.

4.	Click Next to select the file you want to open.


Selecting the Notes file

You can open any attached file.

1.	Select the file you want to open.

2.	If you want to select a different Notes database or document, click Back.

3.	Click Done.

The selected file opens in new window.


Adding Notes/FX fields to a Notes form

You exchange data between Notes and Freelance Graphics by adding a field to a Notes form that corresponds to the name of any Freelance Graphics standard or custom-defined presentation properties field. For more information on the fields, see details.

1.	In Notes, choose Design - Forms from the Folders navigator.

2.	Select a form to edit, or choose Create - Design - Form to create a new form.

3.	Choose Create - Field.

4.	Enter the Notes field name of a Freelance Graphics presentation properties field.

Note	For Notes Release 4 and above, in the form choose Design - Form Properties. In the InfoBox, click the Default tab and de select "Disable Field Exchange"

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Adding Notes/FX fields to a Notes form

Freelance Graphics presentation properties fields

To create a Notes field that exchanges presentation properties data, use a Notes field name and data type listed in the table below.

Presentation properties  field	Notes field  name	Data  type
SmartMaster look	StyleSheet	Text
Description	Subject	Text
Keywords	Categories	Text
Date last revised	LastRevisionDate	Time
Time last revised	LastRevisionTime	Time
Total revisions	NumberOfEdits	Number
Total editing time	EditingTime	Number
No. of Pages	SizeInPages	Number
Size (K)	SizeInK	Number
List of page titles	PageTitles	List
(not displayed)	DocumentClass	Text

You can exchange the values of the Subject and Categories fields in both directions between Notes and Freelance Graphics. The other presentation properties fields only update from Freelance Graphics to Notes.

DocumentClass

DocumentClass provides the OLE class name of the embedded Freelance Graphics object. Use this field if a Notes database contains documents with embedded objects from different applications and you want to display the application name in a form or view.

The table below lists the OLE class names for Lotus desktop applications.

Application	OLE class name
1-2-3	123Worksheet
Word Pro	WordProDocument
Freelance Graphics	FLWPresentation
Approach	ApproachApplication
Types of fields

Notes supports single-use and shared fields.

•	Single-use fields are used only in a single form. Even if you use the same field name and definition in another form, the two fields are unrelated.

Select Create field to be used only within this Form to create a single-use field.

•	Shared fields allow you to re-use a field in any number of forms within a particular database. Every time you update one instance of the shared field, Notes automatically updates all other instances, because they use the same field definition.

Select Create shared field that can be used in other Forms to create a shared field.

 Go to procedure


Creating a new Notes document

If a Notes form contains an embedded Freelance Graphics object, Notes embeds a new copy of the object in each new document you compose.

1.	In Notes, choose Create.

2.	Choose the name of a form that contains an embedded Freelance Graphics object.

3.	If the form does not automatically start Freelance Graphics, double-click the Freelance Graphics object.

4.	In Freelance Graphics, enter new information into any Notes/FX field.

 See related topics


Embedding a Freelance Graphics object in a Notes document

You can embed a Freelance Graphics object in any Rich Text field in a Notes document and update the Notes/FX fields from the Freelance Graphics presentation.

1.	In Notes, open a document for editing.

2.	Position the insertion point where you want to insert the Freelance Graphics object.

3.	Choose Create - Object.

4.	To embed a new Freelance Graphics object in the Notes document, select "Create a new object" and specify Freelance Presentation as the object type.

5.	To embed an existing Freelance Graphics object in the Notes document, select "Create an object from a file" and specify an existing Freelance Graphics file.

6.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Embedding a Freelance Graphics object in a Notes document

By embedding a Freelance Graphics object in a Notes document you can:

•	Use the Notes database to store Freelance Graphics documents of different types

•	Collect and view presentation properties data for a group of otherwise unrelated documents

•	Use Notes views as a "card catalog" of your presentations

•	Use Notes e-mail routing to distribute the Freelance Graphics presentations to a list of people

•	Use Notes dial-in features to allow remote users to work on Freelance Graphics presentations

 Go to procedure


Embedding a Freelance Graphics object in a Notes form

You can embed a Freelance Graphics object anywhere in a Notes form. New documents composed with this form automatically include the embedded Freelance Graphics presentation.

1.	In Notes, choose Create - Design.

2.	Choose Form.

3.	Position the insertion point where you want to insert the Freelance Graphics object.

4.	Choose Create - Object.

5.	To embed a new Freelance Graphics object in the Notes form, select "Create a new object" and specify Freelance Presentation as the object type.

6.	To embed an existing Freelance presentation as an object in the Notes form, select "Create an object from a file" and specify an existing Freelance presentation file.

7.	Click OK.

8.	Close the Notes form.

9.	Click Yes to save the form.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Embedding a Freelance Graphics object in a Notes form

By embedding a Freelance Graphics object in a Notes form design you can:

•	Use a common template for all documents you compose

•	Include a consistent set of fields in all documents

•	Share, organize, and distribute Freelance Graphics presentations that are created with this form

•	Use Notes security features to protect Freelance Graphics presentations from unauthorized reading or editing

Automatically activating the Freelance Graphics object

You can set Notes to activate the embedded Freelance Graphics object each time you open or edit the form in Notes. To do this while editing a form design, choose Design - Form Attributes, click Object Activation, and select the object activation method you want to use.

Invoking the "welcome" sequence

You can guide users through the Freelance Graphics "welcome" sequence each time they create a new presentation. To do this, create an editable text field in Notes called CreateNewObject and assign "1" as the default value formula.

 Go to procedure


Defining custom presentation properties fields for exchange with Notes

You can define up to eight custom presentation properties fields for Notes/FX exchange. You can define different fields for each presentation object you embed.

1.	In Freelance Graphics, choose File - Presentation Properties.

2.	Click FX Fields.

3.	Click Rename Fields.

4.	Enter field names.

5.	Click OK to close the Rename Fields dialog box.

6.	Enter the text you want to exchange for each field.

7.	Click OK to close the FX Fields dialog box.

8.	Click OK.

Tip	Notes field names cannot contain spaces.

 See related topics


Overview: Exchanging data between Freelance Graphics and Notes

Notes/FX lets you exchange field data between Freelance Graphics and Notes.

With Notes/FX, you can:

•	Display the value of any standard Freelance Graphics presentation properties field in a Notes form

•	Exchange the values of up to eight custom-defined presentation properties fields and update the information from either Notes or Freelance Graphics

•	Create Notes applications using a common Notes template that let multiple users create and store presentations in a Notes database

Using Notes/FX

To use Notes/FX with Freelance Graphics, you:

•	Define fields to exchange

•	Embed in a Notes document or form a Freelance Graphics object that contains those fields

•	Create new Notes documents that exchange data with embedded Freelance Graphics objects

•	Update information in a Notes document from Freelance Graphics fields

•	Update information in Freelance Graphics from Notes

For example, you can design a Notes form that includes an embedded Freelance Graphics presentation. You can then launch the presentation object and create a new presentation.

When you complete the presentation and close Freelance Graphics, you can update the presentation object embedded in the Notes form. The presentation is stored in a Notes database with other presentations. You can then define views that categorize the presentations according to information in the presentation properties fields.

 See related topics


Overview: Setting up Notes/FX

To set up Notes/FX, you define fields to exchange and then embed a Freelance Graphics object in a Notes document or form.

What can you exchange?

You can exchange the following types of data between Freelance Graphics and Notes:

•	Presentation properties fields supplied by Freelance Graphics

•	Custom-defined presentation properties fields

Presentation properties fields supplied by Freelance Graphics

Freelance Graphics supplies presentation properties fields with predefined names that contain information about a presentation, such as its size and number of pages. You can use any of these fields for Notes/FX.

Custom-defined presentation properties fields

You can define your own presentation properties fields for storing information about a Freelance Graphics presentation and use them for two-way exchange with Notes.

For example, you can include the name of the meeting the presentation is for in a custom-defined presentation properties field. You can then create a Notes view that lists presentations by meeting name.

 See related topics


Updating fields in a Notes document from Freelance Graphics

You can update Notes fields with information from Freelance Graphics presentation properties fields.

1.	In Notes, display the document that contains the fields you want to update.

2.	Double-click the embedded Freelance Graphics object.

3.	In Freelance Graphics, enter new information into any Notes/FX field.

 See related topics


Updating information in Freelance Graphics from a Notes document

You can update the Description, Keywords, and custom-defined presentation properties in an embedded Freelance Graphics presentation from fields in a Notes form.

1.	In Notes, select the document you want to edit.

2.	Choose Edit - Edit Document.

3.	Enter new information in the Notes/FX fields.

4.	Double-click the embedded Freelance Graphics object to see the changes in the embedded Freelance Graphics presentation.

5.	Choose File - Exit & Return to Lotus Notes.

 See related topics


Breaking links

You can break a link if you no longer want it connected to its source. A broken link no longer updates the data.

1.	Choose Edit - Manage Links.

2.	Select the link you want to break.

3.	(Optional) To break a chart's link, click Chart Links, and select the link you want to break.

4.	(Optional) Hold down SHIFT and select additional objects.

5.	Click Break Link.

6.	Click Close.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Breaking links

When you break a link to an object, the object is transformed into another object. Depending upon the type of link one of the following happens:

•	Linked text becomes static text.

•	A linked chart becomes a static chart.

•	All other linked objects convert to Metafiles.

 Go to procedure


Changing a link's update mode

When you create a link, Freelance Graphics sets the update mode to automatic. Use automatic update mode to insure that your data is always current.

1.	Choose Edit - Manage Links.

2.	Select the link you want to modify.

3.	(Optional) To change the update mode of other links, hold down SHIFT and select them.

4.	Select Automatic or Manual.

This changes the update mode for the selected links.

5.	Click Close.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Changing a link's update mode

Use manual update mode to control when your data is updated, for example, when automatic updating would be slow.

Automatic updating

When the update mode is automatic, Freelance Graphics updates the links as follows:

•	If the link is to a file that is not currently active, Freelance Graphics updates the linked data from the file on disk when you open the presentation.

•	If you open the Freelance Graphics presentation before you open the source file in another Windows application that supports OLE links, click Update Now in the Manage Links dialog box for the linked object to update the links to the source file and re-establish automatic update mode for those links that are automatic.

Manual updating

When the update mode is manual, Freelance Graphics updates the links only when you click Update Now in the Manage Links dialog box.

If the file to which you are linking has changed, click Update Now to see the latest data.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Common OLE procedures

Consult the following table for an overview of how to link or embed data from another application into Freelance Graphics.

Linking to data in another application	From the source application, select the data you want to link to and choose Edit - Copy. Return to Freelance Graphics and make sure it is in Current Page view. Choose Edit - Paste Special, and select Paste Link.
Linking using drag and drop	Tile the Freelance Graphics window and the other OLE 2 application's window so that both are visible. Select the data you want to share. Press both the CTRL and the SHIFT keys while pressing the left mouse button and drag the selection into your Freelance Graphics window. Release the mouse button and the CTRL and SHIFT keys when you reach the destination.
Embedding an existing object	Copy or cut the data you want to embed from the source application. Return to Freelance Graphics and choose Edit - Paste Special. Select "Paste," and under "As" select the object's type.
Embedding a file	Choose Create - Object. Click Create from File, and select the file you want to embed.
Creating an embedded object	Choose Create - Object. Click Create New to create a new object. Select the type of object that you want to embed from the list.
Embedding using drag and drop	Tile the Freelance Graphics window and the other OLE 2 application's window so that both are visible. Select the data you want to share. Press SHIFT while pressing the left mouse button and drag the selection into your Freelance Graphics window. Release the mouse button and the SHIFT key when you reach the destination.
 See related topics


Converting the file format of an OLE object

You can use the Convert feature to change the file format of an OLE object whose creator application  fully supports OLE 2 functionality.

Converting an Object

1.	Select the object you want to convert.

2.	Click the right mouse button over the object.

3.	Choose "Convert" from the menu.

4.	Select the new file format for the object from the Object type list

5.	Choose "Convert to" or "Activate as."

Note	"Convert to" permanently changes the format of an object. "Activate as" displays the object in the new file format, but does not permanently change the object's file format.

6.	Select "Display as icon" to display the object as an icon in your current file.

7.	Click OK.

Note	"Convert to" applies the new file format only to the selected object. "Activate as" updates the Registry, so it applies the new file format to all objects of the same type as the selected object.


Creating an embedded object

You can create an object using another application, but embed (store) the object in a Freelance Graphics file.

1.	Choose Create - Object.

2.	Select "Create a new object."

3.	Double-click the type of object that you want to embed to display the appropriate application.

4.	Use the other application to create the object.

5.	Close the application and return to Freelance Graphics.

Tip	Depending on your application, you may be able to choose File - Exit & Return to Freelance Graphics. This closes the application and returns you to Freelance Graphics in one easy step.

 See related topics


Creating a link using drag and drop

The source application must fully support OLE 2. Make sure you have given the source application's file a name and have saved it.

1.	Tile the Freelance Graphics window and the window of the other OLE 2 application so that both are visible.

2.	Make the source application the active window.

3.	Hold down both the CTRL and the SHIFT keys while pressing the left mouse button as you select the data to which you want to link.

4.	Without releasing the mouse button or the CTRL and SHIFT keys, drag the selection to its destination in Freelance Graphics.

5.	Release the mouse button and the CTRL and SHIFT keys when you reach the destination.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating a link using drag and drop

If you have trouble using drag and drop to create links, try creating a link manually by copying the data and using Edit - Paste Special. If you still experience problems, consult your source application's documentation to find out how to use drag and drop from that application.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Dragging and dropping to another application

You can create a link or embed from Freelance Graphics to a file in another application using drag and drop only if the destination application supports OLE 2 drag and drop.

The following table offers some suggestions to keep in mind when dragging and dropping from Freelance Graphics to another application.

Copy an object to another application	Press the left mouse button and drag an object from Freelance Graphics to the destination application. For more information, see Dragging and dropping to another application.
Move an object to another application	Press SHIFT as you drag the object from Freelance Graphics to the destination application.
Create a link, with Freelance Graphics as the source	Select the object, then, while still holding down the mouse button, press CTRL and SHIFT as you drag an object from Freelance Graphics to the destination application.
 See related topics


Dragging and dropping to another application

You can create a link or embed from Freelance Graphics to a file in another application using drag and drop only if the destination application supports OLE 2 drag and drop.

1.	Tile the Freelance Graphics window and the window of the other OLE 2 application so that both are visible.

2.	Make the Freelance Graphics file that contains the original data the active window. Make sure you have given the Freelance Graphics file a name and have saved it.

3.	Select the object to copy.

This can be an object, such as an organization chart, or, if you are in Page Sorter view, it can be a page or group of pages.

4.	Position the mouse pointer on the border of your selection.

5.	(Optional) To embed a copy of the object, drag the object to the other OLE 2 application.

6.	(Optional) To create a link, hold down both the CTRL and the SHIFT keys, and drag the object to the other OLE 2 application.

7.	Release the mouse button when you reach the destination (followed by the CTRL and SHIFT keys, if necessary).

Note	If you have trouble using drag and drop to create a link, copy the data and use Edit - Paste Special, or the other application's command equivalent.

 See related topics


Editing an embedded object

You can edit an object "in place" if the object's source application fully supports OLE 2 functionality (if the Freelance Graphics menus change when you double-click the object). Otherwise, follow the second procedure given below.

Editing in place

1.	Double-click the object you want to edit.

2.	Edit the object.

3.	Click outside the object when you are done.

Editing objects that cannot be edited in place

1.	Double-click the object to open the object's application.

2.	Edit the object.

3.	Choose File - Update in the object's application.

4.	Depending on your application, choose File - Exit or File - Exit & Return (or the application's command equivalent).

5.	In Freelance Graphics, choose File - Save.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Editing an embedded object

Editing in place

Applications that support OLE 2 let you edit embedded objects "in place." When you select an embedded object that can be edited in place, the following happens:

•	The selected object looks as though it is still embedded in Freelance Graphics.

•	The commands (except for the File and Window commands), tools, and so on, change.

•	The user interface of the application that the embedded object comes from may appear around the edges of the object. For example, spreadsheet rows and columns appear if the embedded object is from a spreadsheet.

•	The object changes in place; you do not have to perform any special save operation.

Editing objects that cannot be edited in place

Applications that do not support in-place editing of embedded objects allow you to edit them in a separate window. When you select an object that is editable in a separate window, the following happens:

•	The selected object opens in the window of the source application in which it was created.

•	In the container application, the object is shaded.

•	The object changes both in the separate window and in the container application, though in some applications there is a two-to-five second delay.

•	You do not have to perform a special save operation in Freelance Graphics. However, other applications may require you to use a command, such as File - Update, or File - Exit & Return.

Editing objects with the right mouse button

You can select an embedded object with the right mouse button. When the object is selected, click the right mouse button (again) to see the right mouse menu. From this menu, you can edit the object.

 Go to procedure


Editing links

You can modify the linked data, and/or change the source of a linked object.

1.	Choose Edit - Manage Links.

2.	Select the linked data.

3.	(Optional) To modify a chart's link, click Chart Links, and select the link you want to edit.

4.	(Optional) To modify the linked data, click Open Source, make your changes, and return to Freelance Graphics.

5.	(Optional) To change the source of linked data, click Change Source and specify a new file or path.

6.	Click Close.

Tip	You can also select a link using the right mouse button. When the link is selected, click the right mouse button (again) to see the right mouse menu. From this menu, you can edit the linked data.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Editing links

You cannot update the components of a chart link, individually. Instead, you must update all of the chart's links at the same time by clicking Update All Now in the Chart Links dialog box.

 Go to procedure


Overview: Embedded objects

When you embed an object, you store the object in the container file into which you are embedding. The embedded object does not refer to (or point to) data outside of the container file. In other words, it is not linked to another file and does not "update."

For example, if you make a Freelance Graphics presentation highlighting the key points from a Word Pro document, you can embed the Word Pro file into the presentation. When you distribute it for review online, if your reviewers want information from the Word Pro document, they can simply double-click the Word Pro icon to open the Word Pro file.

An embedded object displays in your presentation as an object or an icon, depending on the application it came from.

You edit the embedded object by opening the source application from within the container file (usually by double-clicking the embedded object). The source application is brought up as an editor for the embedded object, even though the object itself is part of the container file.

How do you embed an object?

If both applications support OLE, you can embed objects. You can embed either an existing object (an object that you copied from another application) or objects that you create at the moment.

You embed objects using Edit - Paste Special or Create - Object. You use Edit - Paste Special to embed an object either copied or cut from another application. Use Create - Object to embed an object that you create at the moment or to embed an entire pre-existing file. For more information, see Creating an embedded object, Embedding an existing object, or Using drag and drop to embed an object.

What can you do with embedded objects?

Although you edit an embedded object using the tools from the application in which it was created, you do the editing within Freelance Graphics.

For example, you embed an object (such as a 1-2-3 file, or a drawn object) and double-click the object to edit it. If it supports complete OLE 2, you can edit it "in place." You do not "enter" the source application. Instead, the Freelance Graphics menu changes to accommodate the appropriate commands for the embedded object.

Editing in place gives the impression of never leaving Freelance Graphics. If the source application does not support complete OLE 2 functionality, you cannot edit in place. Instead, when you click the embedded object, the source application is activated and you can edit the object.

 See related topics


Embedding an existing object

There are two ways to embed an existing object into a Freelance Graphic presentation. Use the first procedure below to embed an object that you copied or cut from another application. Use the second to embed an entire existing file.

Embedding an object created in another application

1.	Copy or cut the data you want to embed from the source application.

2.	In Freelance Graphics, choose Edit - Paste Special.

3.	Select "Paste" if it is not already selected.

4.	Select the type of object you are embedding.

5.	Click OK.

Embedding a whole file

1.	In Freelance Graphics, choose Create - Object .

2.	Select "Create from file."

3.	Type the name of the path and file name, or click Browse to select from the available directories.

4.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Embedding an existing object
Details: Embedding existing object

When you embed an existing object from another application, the object and its data are stored in the Freelance Graphics file. However, you use the other application to edit the object while you are in Freelance Graphics. For more information, see Overview: Embedded objects.

 Go to procedure


Linking to data in another application

You can create links to a wide range of objects, including text, drawings, and charts. The source application must support OLE. Also, the file in the source application must have been saved (that is, it cannot be an "untitled file) and it must be kept open as you follow these steps.

1.	Start the other application and open the file that has the data you want.

2.	Copy the data to which you want to link.

3.	Open the Freelance Graphics file in Current Page view.

4.	Choose Edit - Paste Special.

5.	Select "Paste link to source."

6.	Select how you want to bring in the data.

7.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Linking to data in another application

Save the source file

Make sure you save the source file before copying the object; it must have a name in order to make a link.

Keep the source application open while creating links. If you want, minimize the application's window to an icon.

How text is linked

When you link text, Freelance Graphics does one of the following:

•	If you are not editing text, Freelance Graphics creates linked text.

•	If you are editing text, Freelance Graphics checks if there is already a link to that text block. If a link exists, Freelance Graphics deletes the existing link. If there is any existing text in the text block, creating the link will replace the existing text.

Ways you can link text

You can link text in two different ways:

•	Linked object--the object (text, in this case) is linked to the source file so that changes in the source file will be reflected in the presentation. That is, all of the attributes of this object are controlled through the source application. It may appear that you can edit the text from Freelance Graphics, but you cannot; you must be in the source application window for changes to an object's attributes to take effect.

•	Text (unformatted)--text is linked to the other application but uses the default text attributes set by Freelance Graphics. You set all attributes for the text in Freelance Graphics.

Improving system performance

When you have many links in a file, make the links' update modes manual. For more information, see Changing a link's update mode .

 Go to procedure


Overview: Links

A link is a connection between a destination file and data in a source file. Links can automatically update the destination file so that it reflects changes made in the source file.

Suppose you use data from a 1-2-3 file in a Freelance Graphics presentation and the data changes weekly. You can create automatic links to the data in the 1-2-3 file. Now, whenever you open the Freelance Graphics presentation, it automatically displays the latest 1-2-3 data.

What does a link look like?

Depending on the application that the link is connected to (the source), the link's appearance in the destination application varies. It can look like an ordinary object, like a piece of the source application, or like the source application's icon.

How do you create links?

To create a link from another application to a Freelance Graphics presentation see Linking to data in another application and Creating a link using drag and drop.

To create a link with a Freelance Graphics presentation as the source file and another application's file as the destination file, see Dragging and dropping to another application.

What can you do with a link?

You can double-click a link to activate the source application so that you can change the original data. You can also view, edit, update, and delete links using Edit - Manage Links. For example, you can edit a link so that it refers to a different piece of data in the source application or change a link from automatic to manual.

If the original file to which the data is linked has been moved, information about the link's location must be revised.

Note	You cannot edit linked objects "in place." However, you can double-click a link, activating the source application and file, to edit the source data.

 See related topics


Overview: Managing links

You can edit, update, and delete existing links using the Manage Links dialog box. To display the Manage Links dialog box, choose Edit - Manage Links.

Choose a task

Editing links

Updating links

Changing a link's update mode

Breaking links

 See related topics


Overview: OLE custom controls

Freelance Graphics supports OLE custom controls (OCXs), including Lotus Components. Lotus Components are a set of small, fast, reusable software applets, including the Lotus Spreadsheet, Chart, Draw/Diagram, Project, Comment, and File Viewer Components, and the Lotus Template Builder.

Editing  OLE controls

You can edit an OLE control within Freelance Graphics, using the tools from the application in which it was created. When you edit an OLE control, the Freelance Graphics menu changes to the appropriate commands for the OLE control.

To edit an OLE control, make sure that "Design OLE controls" is selected in the View Menu. In this mode, single-clicking the object selects it, and double-clicking the object puts the object into editing mode.

Note	 If "Design OLE controls" is deselected in the View menu, a single click on the OLE control will run the control.


Overview: Sharing data using OLE 2

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) lets you share data (called objects) across applications. Depending on the task, you either create a link or embed the data.

When should you use links?

A link is a channel through which data stored in a source file is displayed in a destination file. When you update linked data in a destination file, the latest data from the source file is displayed.

Use links when all of the following are true:

•	You need to share data between Windows applications.

•	You expect the shared data to change.

•	You need to update the shared data when the original data changes.

Suppose you use data from a 1-2-3 file in a Freelance Graphics presentation and the data changes weekly. You can create automatic links in the Freelance Graphics presentation to the data in the 1-2-3 file. Now, whenever you open the Freelance Graphics presentation, it automatically displays the latest 1-2-3 data.

You do not need to use links when any one of the following is true:

•	You only use the data in one application.

•	You do not expect the data to change.

•	You do not need to update the shared data when the original data changes.

For example, if you created your company logo in Freelance Graphics and you wanted to use the logo in a Word Pro document, you would not use links since the logo is not likely to change. Instead, you could simply copy the logo in Freelance Graphics and paste it into Word Pro.

When should you use embedded objects?

An embedded object consists of an object created using one application, but stored in a file created using another application (sometimes called the container file).

Embed objects when both of the following are true:

•	You only use the data in one application.

•	You expect to edit or update the data.

For example, if you make a Freelance Graphics presentation highlighting the key points from a Word Pro document, you can embed the Word Pro file into the presentation. When you distribute it for review online, if your reviewers want information from the Word Pro document, they can simply double-click the Word Pro icon to open the Word Pro file.

 See related topics


Updating links

You can update an object's links when the update mode for the link is manual.

1.	Choose Edit - Manage Links.

2.	Select the link you want to update.

3.	(Optional) Hold down SHIFT and select additional objects.

4.	Click Update Now.

5.	Click Close.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Updating links

When the update mode is manual, Freelance Graphics updates the links only when you click Update Now in the Manage Links dialog box

If the original file to which the data has been linked has moved, before updating the link, you must first use Change Source to modify the link so it matches the source's new location.

Charts can contain multiple links. You cannot update the links of a chart individually. When you select a chart in the Links dialog box and click Update Now, you update all of the chart's links.

 Go to procedure


Using drag and drop to embed an object

The source application must fully support OLE 2. Make sure you have given the source application's file a name and have saved it.

1.	Tile the Freelance Graphics window and the window of the other OLE 2 application so that both are visible.

2.	Make the source application the active window.

3.	Hold down the left mouse button as you select the data that you want to embed.

4.	Without releasing the mouse button, drag the selection to its destination in Freelance Graphics.

5.	Release the mouse button when you reach the destination.

Note	If you have trouble using drag and drop to embed an object, try embedding manually by copying the data and using Edit - Paste Special. If you still experience problems, consult your source application's documentation to find out how to use drag and drop from that application.

 See related topics


Adding an icon to a set of SmartIcons

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	To review the entire list of SmartIcons, use the up and down arrows in the Available icons (drag to add) box.

Freelance Graphics displays all SmartIcons in this box.

3.	Drag an icon from the list to the set at the top of the dialog box.

4.	To save the set as a different set and with a different name, click Save Set. To overwrite the existing set, click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Adding an icon to a set of SmartIcons

Available icons (drag to add)

The standard Freelance Graphics icons in this list are grouped according to the Freelance Graphics menu: File, Edit, View, Create, Presentation, the menu for the currently selected object (Page, Text, and so on), Window, and Help.

Custom icons appear at the top of this list, in alphabetical order.

Dragging an icon into a set

When you drag and drop icons, Freelance Graphics moves the other icons in the set either forward or backward one position to accommodate the change. The SmartIcons then appear in the new order in the dialog box.

You can use the left and right arrows to see icons that scroll out of sight.

Saving a SmartIcons set

If you click:	This is what happens:
Save Set	Takes you to the Save As SmartIcons File dialog box where you can give the new icon set a name and save it in its own file. The new set name becomes part of the SmartIcons list.  Click OK to return to the SmartIcons Setup dialog box.
OK	Displays the new SmartIcons set. The set saves under its original name. Freelance Graphics displays the new arrangement every time you select this set.
 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Overview: Placing SmartIcons on the Freelance Graphics window

You can display a set of SmartIcons at the sides of the Freelance Graphics window in a fixed position (left, right, top, or bottom). If you drag a SmartIcons bar to an edge, it will snap to and stay with that edge, even when the window is moved.

You can also display SmartIcons in a floating position anywhere inside or outside the Freelance Graphics window. Dragging SmartIcons to a place other than an edge creates a floating palette. You can also drag one palette of SmartIcons over another.

Context SmartIcons sets

One set of SmartIcons exists for each context supported by Freelance Graphics (such as text, table, and so on). When you place a set of context SmartIcons in a specific position, this position is used by other context SmartIcons sets.

You can display the sets of context SmartIcons in different locations, but this is an advanced option. For information, see Setting location preferences for context SmartIcons. Typically, you will want all the sets of context SmartIcons to display in the same location.

 See related topics


Creating a new SmartIcons set

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	You can use the default SmartIcons set as a base for the new set or select another set under "Bar name."

3.	Use drag and drop to add, move, group, and remove icons until the set is the way you want.

4.	Click Save Set and then click Save As New.

5.	Type the SmartIcons bar name and file name.

6.	Click OK to return to the SmartIcons Setup dialog box.

7.	To display this bar when you are working in a specific part of the presentation, select the context under "Bar can be displayed when context is."

8.	To display this bar when the chosen context is active, select "Bar is enabled to display during its context."

9.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Creating a new SmartIcons set

You can add icons by dragging icons from the "Available icons (drag to add)" box up into the new set. You can also move and rearrange icons by dragging them (including spacers) within the new set.

You can remove icons from the set by dragging them away from the displayed set.

Save Set

Clicking Save Set takes you to the Save as SmartIcons File dialog box, where you can give the new icon set a name and save it as an .SMI file. The new name will appear in the Bar name list box.

If you save the new SmartIcons set with its original name, the changes you made will apply to the original set.

Bar can be displayed when context is

This setting lists all the Freelance Graphics contexts. Each context is associated with a set of icons selected under "Bar name." In this case, you select a context for the set of icons you just created.

For example, you want the set of SmartIcons you just created to display when you are working with Drawings.

•	First, select the icon set you just created under "Bar name."

•	Then select Drawing under "Bar can be displayed when context is."

Now, this set of SmartIcons will display in the Freelance Graphics window when you are working with drawings.

Bar is enabled to display during its context

This option acts as an on/off display switch. If selected, it displays the set of SmartIcons under "Bar name" for the given context. Typically, this setting will be selected.

If you have defined several sets of SmartIcons to display for a given context, you can also use this setting to control which of these icon sets will actually display in that context. For example, you may have created two sets of text-related SmartIcons--Draw1 (for sizing, aligning, and so forth) and Draw2 (for zooming, flipping, and so forth)--to display when you are working with drawings. You can select this setting for Draw2 and deselect this setting for Draw1.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Deleting a SmartIcons set

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Click Delete Set.

3.	Select the set you want to delete.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Freelance Graphics asks you to confirm your selection.

Clicking Yes deletes the .SMI file and returns you to the SmartIcons Setup dialog box.

6.	Click OK.

If you delete an icon set that was displayed on the screen, Freelance Graphics displays the next icon set in the default icons folder (directory) (\LOTUS\FLG\ICONS). If there is no other alternative in the folder, Freelance Graphics displays the default set of SmartIcons.

 See related topics


Displaying or hiding SmartIcons

Choose View - Show SmartIcons.

A checkmark appears by the command when the SmartIcons are displayed. You can hide the SmartIcons by repeating this step.

 See related topics


Displaying or hiding bubble help

Use this procedure to display or hide bubble help for both SmartIcons and InfoBox tabs.

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Select "Show icon descriptions (bubble help)."

3.	Click OK.

4.	Place the mouse pointer on the desired icon and pause for a second.

Freelance Graphics displays a bubble describing what the icon or InfoBox tab represents.

Note	You can remove bubble help by following the same steps and deselecting "Show icon descriptions (bubble help)."

 See related topics


Hiding SmartIcons using the bar button

1.	Click the bar button on the icon bar.

2.	Choose Hide all SmartIcons.

 See related topics


Moving an icon using the mouse

1.	Press CTRL.

2.	Drag an icon to the desired location.

Dragging the icon off the SmartIcons bar moves it to the end of the set.

 See related topics


Placing a set of SmartIcons using the mouse

1.	Place the mouse pointer over the area next to the bar button.

2.	Click and drag the bar wherever you want it in the Freelance Graphics window.

As you drag the bar, the hand closes around an outline of the bar.

 See related topics


Removing an icon from a set of SmartIcons

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Select the set you want to modify under "Bar name."

3.	Drag the icon(s) you want to remove away from the displayed set.

4.	Click OK.

Freelance Graphics displays the new arrangement every time you select this set.

 See related topics


Selecting and displaying a specific icon set

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Select the desired set under "Bar name."

3.	Select an option under "Bar can be displayed when context is."

4.	If you want to display the set at specific times (depending on your selections in steps 2 and 3), select  "Bar is enabled to display during its context."

Note	Typically, this setting should always be selected.

5.	Click OK.

 See details

 See related topics


Details: Selecting and displaying a specific icon set

Selecting icon sets and contexts

Freelance Graphics provides a set of SmartIcons for each available context (such as table, drawing, and so on). You can customize existing icon sets or create your own. You cannot add or change contexts.

Bar name

This setting controls the set of SmartIcons that displays for each of the Freelance Graphics contexts. When you select a SmartIcons set here, you then associate it with a context under "Bar can be displayed when context is." This ensures that the icon set displays for that context.

Bar can be displayed when context is

This setting lists all the Freelance Graphics contexts. Each context is associated with a set of icons selected under "Bar name."

For example, you want the set of Drawing SmartIcons to display when you are working with drawings.

•	First, select Drawing under "Bar name."

•	Then select Drawing under "Bar can be displayed when context is."

Now, the set of Drawing SmartIcons will display in the Freelance Graphics window when you are working with drawings.

Bar is enabled to display during its context

This option acts as an on/off display switch. If selected, it displays the set of SmartIcons under "Bar name" for the given context. Typically, this setting will be selected.

If you have defined several sets of SmartIcons to display for a given context, you can also use this setting to control which of these icon sets will actually display in that context. For example, you may have created two sets of text-related SmartIcons--Draw1 (for sizing, aligning, and so forth) and Draw2 (for zooming, flipping, and so forth)--to display when you are working with drawings. You can select this setting for Draw2 and deselect this setting for Draw1.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Selecting a SmartIcons set using the bar button

1.	Click the bar button on the icon bar.

2.	Select a SmartIcons set from the menu.

The Universal SmartIcons set always displays in this menu. The other menu commands that display depend upon the current context. For example, if you are working in tables, the Universal set will display, as well as all sets of SmartIcons associated with the context Table.

 See related topics


Details: Setting location preferences for context SmartIcons

Bars that will appear in the same location

This is a list in which all context sets of SmartIcons are selected, indicating they can display in a context SmartIcons location.

If you move a context SmartIcons set from its original position, the next context SmartIcons set in this list displays where the first set was moved. For example, if you drag a set into a floating position when you are working with text and then display the text SmartIcons when you work with text blocks, the text set displays in the same floating position.

 Go to procedure

 See related topics


Setting location preferences for context SmartIcons

One set of SmartIcons exists for each context supported by Freelance Graphics (table, organization chart, and so on).

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Select the desired SmartIcons sets under "Bars that will appear in the same location."

3.	Click OK.

When you move a set of context SmartIcons, all other sets of context SmartIcons will display in that same location.

Tip	If you have more than one SmartIcons set for a specific context, only select one set. Otherwise, both sets will be in the same location, with one on top of the other. You will only be able to use one set.

 See details

 See related topics


Sizing icons in a SmartIcons set

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	In the Icon size box, select Regular or Large.

Note	Select Large for high-resolution monitors.

3.	Click OK.

 See related topics


Overview: SmartIcons

SmartIcons are icons that represent shortcuts for Freelance Graphics actions, commands, and scripts.

You can modify SmartIcons for use as a custom set, or you can create and edit custom icons to be part of a standard Freelance Graphics set.

When you use SmartIcons, you can:

•	Check to see what each icon represents.

•	Place sets of SmartIcons at the side of or floating in the Freelance Graphics window.

•	Specify their size.

•	Display different SmartIcons sets while you are working in specific parts of a document.

•	Customize one or more specific sets.

•	Add, move, group, edit, and remove the icons in a set.

•	Delete them, either individually or as a set.

•	Create and modify custom icons. You can associate a script, an executable file (such as a .BAT or .EXE file) to launch an application, or a new or existing OLE object with a custom icon.

•	Place them in the Freelance Graphics Icons folder (directory) as .BMP files.

 See related topics


SmartIcons Setup dialog box

You can review all sets of SmartIcons in this dialog box by selecting an icon set from the Bar name list. When you do this, the specific icon set appears at the top of the box.

In this dialog box, you can add, move, group, edit, and remove the icons in a set. You can also create and edit custom icons from this dialog box.

Tip	You can also open the SmartIcons Setup dialog box by clicking the bar button on the SmartIcons bar and choosing SmartIcons Setup.

Choose a task

Selecting and displaying a specific icon set

Sizing icons in a SmartIcons set

Spacing between SmartIcons in a set

Adding an icon to a set of SmartIcons

Removing an icon from a set of SmartIcons

Creating a new SmartIcons set

Deleting a SmartIcons set

Creating a custom icon

Editing a custom icon

Setting location preferences for context SmartIcons

 See related topics


Spacing between SmartIcons in a set

1.	Choose File - User Setup - SmartIcons Setup.

2.	Under Bar name, select the SmartIcons set that you want to work with.

3.	Drag a spacer to separate the icons within the displayed set.

4.	Click OK.

Note	You can use the left and right arrows to see icons that scroll out of sight.

 See related topics


Using an icon

Place the mouse pointer on the desired icon and click.

 See related topics


Overview: Using SmartIcons

When you first start Freelance Graphics, two default sets of SmartIcons display. You can easily display one or more different sets.

If you place SmartIcons at the sides of or floating in the Freelance Graphics window, their position is used by other SmartIcons sets that subsequently display. For example, if you place table SmartIcons in a floating position in the Freelance Graphics window and then click a text block, the text SmartIcons will appear in the same floating location.

Sets of SmartIcons are saved as .SMI files. Custom icons are saved as .BMP files.

 See related topics